Table of Contents Cadillac STS/STS-V - IFS Europe BV

AKENG45_STS Page 1 Monday, April 28, 2008 11:38 AM 

Cadillac 

STS/STS-V 

Owner's Manual 

Table of Contents 

How to Use this Manual................................. 3 

Important Safety Precautions ........................ 5 

Section 1 

Instrumentation and Controls ..................... 21 

Section 2 

Seats and Restraints................................... 253 

Section 3 

Starting and Operating Instructions ......... 301 

Section 4 

Service and Maintenance........................... 355 

Section 5 

Problems on the Road................................ 431 

Index........................................................... 467 

05AKENG45


Important Notes About this Manual 

We thank you for choosing a 

General Motors product, and we 

want to assure you of our continuing 

commitment to your motoring 

pleasure and satisfaction. 

This manual should be considered 

a permanent part of the vehicle. 

Keep it with the vehicle when sold, 

to provide the next owner with 

important operating, safety and 

maintenance information. 

Environment-friendly and recycled 

materials were used in the development 

and manufacture of your 

vehicle. The production methods 

used to make your vehicle are also 

environment-friendly. 

Production waste is recycled, with 

some of the waste material recovered 

for re-use. Water requirements 

have been reduced to help 

conserve natural resources. 

All information, illustrations and 

specifications in this manual are 

based on the latest product information 

available at the time of 

printing. We reserve the right to 

make changes in the product without 

further notice. 

The illustrations throughout the 

manual are typical and are not 

intended to be exact representations 

of any part of your vehicle. 

Please be aware that the vehicle 

you purchased may not be 

equipped with each option that is 

explained in this manual. 

This Owner's Manual is supplemented 

by a "Maintenance Schedule 

and Warranty and Owner 

Assistance Information" booklet. 

Although we feel that this Owner's 

Manual is complete, in that it 

covers the more important vehicle 

operating information, it is most 

valuable when used with the 

Maintenance Schedule. 

. . . 2


How to Use this Manual 

When it comes to service, keep in 

mind that your dealer knows your 

vehicle best and is committed to 

your complete satisfaction. Your 

dealer invites you to return for all 

of your service needs both during 

and after the warranty period. 

Should you have any concern that 

has not been handled to your satisfaction, 

follow the steps outlined 

in the "Maintenance Schedule and 

Warranty and Owner Assistance 

Information" booklet. 

FOR CONTINUING SATISFAC- 

TION AND QUALITY, KEEP YOUR 

GM VEHICLE ALL GM. GENERAL 

MOTORS PARTS ARE IDENTIFIED 

BY ONE OF THESE TRADEMARKS: 

Use this manual to learn about the 

features of your new vehicle and 

how they operate. 

The manual is intended to be used 

as a reference guide to help you to 

quickly identify and use the various 

features of your vehicle. For this 

reason, the manual is organized 

according to feature location as 

opposed to feature operation. 

It also includes some very important 

safety and maintenance information 

and even deals with some 

problems you may have while 

driving. 

This manual is divided into five 

sections: 

• Section 1: Instrumentation 

and Controls 

To get a general understanding of 

how the content of this manual is 

organized, imagine yourself sitting 

in the driver's seat. Your attention 

is first focused on the instrument 

panel directly in front of you, then 

up and out to the mirrors, 

windows and doors and continuing 

back around the vehicle to the 

rear cargo area, then up to the 

overhead area and the roof. The 

content of this manual is organized 

to follow this order. The vast 

majority of your vehicle's instruments 

and controls are built into 

these areas, and are discussed first 

in this manual, in Section 1. 

3 . . .



• Section 2: Seats and 

Restraints 

Next, focus on the center of 

your vehicle: the seats and 

safety belts. Information about 

these features and about your 

vehicle's air bag system is covered 

in Section 2. Section 2 

also includes any information 

pertaining to child restraints. 

• Section 3: Starting and Operating 

Instructions 

Once you have been familiarized 

with your vehicle's instruments, 

controls, seats and 

restraint systems in Sections 1 

and 2, Section 3 outlines your 

vehicle's starting and operating 

instructions. This section 

includes information about 

your keys and keyless entry (if 

equipped), about the ignition 

and vehicle starting, and about 

the transmission, transfer case 

(if equipped), parking, traction, 

steering, brake, and suspension 

systems. It also covers your 

vehicle's specific loading and 

towing capabilities. 

• Section 4: Service and 

Maintenance 

The Service and Maintenance 

section: 

- contains fuel information 

- helps you locate the various 

components in your vehicle's 

engine compartment 

- offers basic maintenance and 

fluid information for the 

major, easily-accessible 

engine components (e.g., oil, 

coolant, transmission fluid, 

power steering fluid, brake 

fluid, refrigerant, washer 

fluid, battery) 

. . . 4



- contains information about 

tire inflation, inspection, rotation 

and replacement 

- locates and describes your 

vehicle's fuses and circuit 

breakers 

- contains some bulb replacement 

instructions and 

specifications 

- includes major component 

specifications and capacities 

• Section 5: Problems on the 

Road 

This section tells you how to 

handle certain problems you 

may have while driving. It 

covers: 

- jump starting your vehicle 

- towing your vehicle 

- engine overheating 

- changing a flat tire 

Each section begins with a brief 

table of contents to help you 

locate the information you want. 

5 . . .


Important Safety Precautions 

CAUTION AND NOTICE BOXES 

CAUTIONS and NOTICES alert you 

to conditions that may result in 

injury, or that may damage your 

vehicle. 

CAUTION 

Means: This can hurt people. 

NOTICE 

Means: This can damage your 

vehicle. 

Seating Position 

CAUTION 

Do not adjust the driver's seat 

when the vehicle is moving. 

The seat could jerk and cause a 

loss of control. 

Sitting in a reclined position 

when your vehicle is in motion 

can be dangerous. Even if you 

buckle up, your safety belts 

can't do their job when the 

seatback is excessively reclined. 

Safety Belts 

CAUTION 

Always wear your safety belt. Be 

sure it is adjusted properly at all 

times. 

Do not let anyone ride where 

they cannot wear a safety belt 

properly. If you are in a crash 

and you are not wearing a safety 

belt, you can be seriously 

injured or killed. In the same 

crash, you might not be injured 

if you are buckled up. Always 

fasten your safety belt, and 

check that your passengers' 

belts are fastened properly, too. 

. . . 6



CAUTION (Continued) 

Wearing a safety belt improperly 

could cause serious injury. 

The lap part of the belt should 

be worn low and snug on the 

hips, just touching the thighs. 

In a crash, this applies force to 

the strong pelvic bones, and 

you would be less likely to slide 

under the lap belt. If you slid 

under it, the belt would apply 

force to your abdomen. This 

could cause serious or even fatal 

injuries. 


Wear your belt fitted closely 

against the body. Do not wear 

your shoulder belt under your 

arm. Make sure the belt is not 

twisted across your body. 

You could be seriously injured if 

your belt is buckled in the 

wrong place. Always buckle 

your belt into the buckle nearest 

you. 

CAUTION 

The shoulder belt should go 

over the shoulder and across 

the chest. These parts of the 

body are best able to take belt 

restraining forces. 


A safety belt must be used by 

only one person at a time. Do 

not allow two children to share 

the same belt. 

Accident statistics show that 

children are safer if they are 

restrained in the rear seat. 

7 . . .



Air Bags 


A pregnant woman should 

wear a lap-shoulder belt, and 

the lap portion should be worn 

as low as possible throughout 

the pregnancy. 

CAUTION 

Both the safety belt restraint 

system and the air bag restraint 

system are designed to best 

protect adults. 

Anyone who is up against, or 

very close to, an inflating air 

bag could be seriously injured 

or killed. 


Be sure that if children are too 

small to be well restrained by 

the safety belt system, that they 

are secured in an appropriate 

child restraint. 

The presence of an airbag is not 

a substitute for a safety belt and 

is only effective in conjunction 

with the safety belts. 

. . . 8




Air bags are designed to be 

used with the safety belts. Even 

with an air bag, if you are in a 

crash and not wearing a safety 

belt, your injuries could be 

much worse. 

If you are too close to an inflating 

air bag, it could seriously 

injure you. Safety belts help 

keep you in position in case an 

air bag inflates in a collision. 

The driver should sit as far back 

as possible while still able to 

maintain control of the vehicle. 

The path of an inflating air bag 

must be kept clear of any 

objects at all times. 


When an air bag inflates, it 

leaves dust in the air. This dust 

could cause breathing problems 

for people with a history of 

asthma or other breathing trouble. 

To avoid this, everyone in 

the vehicle should get out as 

soon as it is safe to do so. If you 

are unable to get out of the 

vehicle, then open a window or 

door. 

Children and Safety Restraints 

CAUTION 

Never hold a baby in your arms 

while riding in a vehicle. During 

a crash a baby will become so 

heavy you can't hold it. For 

example, in a crash at only 40 

km/h, a 5.5 kg baby will 

suddenly become a 110 kg 

force on your arms. The baby 

would be almost impossible to 

hold. Secure the baby in an 

infant restraint. 

9 . . .




A rear-facing child restraint in 

the front seat could be pushed 

into the seatback by the front 

passenger's air bag if it inflates. 

A child in a rear-facing child 

restraint can be seriously 

injured if this happens. In vehicles 

with the front passenger's 

inflatable restraint system, 

always secure a rear-facing 

child restraint in the rear seat. 

CAUTION 

Infants who must use rearfacing 

child restraints cannot 

ride safely in passenger air bagequipped 

vehicles that do not 

have rear seats. 

If, however, you secure a 

forward-facing child restraint in 

the front passenger seat, be 

sure to move the front passenger 

seat as far back as it will go. 

Leaving Your Vehicle 

CAUTION 

Avoid leaving your vehicle while 

the engine is running. 

Do not leave children in the 

vehicle with the ignition key. 

They could operate the power 

windows or other controls and 

could even make the vehicle 

move. A child or others could 

be injured or even killed. 

. . . 10




It is very dangerous to leave 

children inside the vehicle for 

any extended period of time - 

especially in hot weather. When 

you leave the vehicle, take your 

children with you. 

Vehicles with Automatic 

Transmissions 


If your vehicle is equipped with 

an automatic transmission, 

observe the following precautions 

to ensure proper and safe 

operation. Otherwise, the vehicle 

may move suddenly and/or 

cause an accident. 


• Be sure the shift lever is in P 

(Park) and the parking brake 

is firmly applied when you 

leave your vehicle. 

• Keep your foot firmly on the 

brake pedal and do not race 

the engine when shifting out 

of P (Park) or N (Neutral). 

• Do not shift into D (Drive) or 

R (Reverse) when the engine 

is racing. 

• Do not shift into P (Park) 

while the vehicle is moving. 

Read Section 3, "Starting and 

Operating Instructions", for 

more information. 

11 . . .



Exhaust Warnings 

CAUTION 

• Things that can burn can 

touch hot exhaust parts 

under your vehicle and ignite. 

Don't park over papers, 

leaves, dry grass or other 

things that can burn. 

• Engine exhaust can kill. It 

contains carbon monoxide 

(CO) gas, which you can't see 

or smell. It can cause unconsciousness 

and death. 


• Do not idle the engine in a 

closed-in place, such as the 

garage. Carbon monoxide 

(CO) gas could get into your 

vehicle. 

• Idling the engine with the 

windows closed and the air 

conditioning fan off (if 

equipped), may allow dangerous 

exhaust fumes into 

your vehicle. 


• It can also be very dangerous 

to drive with the trunk, rear 

windows, hatch or rear doors 

open. If you must drive with 

one of these open or with 

their seal broken, make sure 

all other windows are closed 

and turn the fan on to the 

highest speed using any setting 

that brings in outside air. 

Doing this will force outside 

air into the vehicle. 

• Make sure that no window, 

door, trunk or hatch at the 

rear of the vehicle is open if 

you are pulling a trailer. 

. . . 12




• Engine exhaust may also be 

entering your vehicle if: 

– your exhaust system 

sounds strange or different 

– your vehicle gets rusty 

underneath 

– your vehicle has been 

damaged or improperly 

serviced 

– the base of your vehicle, 

especially your exhaust 

pipe, is blocked by snow or 

debris 


If you suspect that exhaust is 

entering your vehicle, drive 

with all the windows open, turn 

the air conditioning (if 

equipped) on to any setting 

that circulates outside air and 

have the vehicle serviced 

immediately. 

Water and Your Vehicle 

CAUTION 

After a car wash or driving 

through a puddle, the brakes 

may not work well. Apply light 

pedal pressure until the brakes 

work normally. 

Do not drive through deep 

puddles. If water enters into an 

air inlet, it might damage the 

engine. If you must drive 

through a puddle, drive carefully 

so as not to allow the water to 

splash against the underbody of 

the vehicle. 

13 . . .




Flowing or rushing water 

creates strong forces. If you try 

to drive through flowing water, 

as you might at a low water 

crossing, your vehicle can be 

carried away. As little as six 

inches of flowing water can 

carry away a smaller vehicle. If 

this happens, you and other 

vehicle occupants could drown. 

Don't ignore police warning 

signs, and otherwise be very 

cautious about trying to drive 

through flowing water. 

Driving on Hills 

CAUTION 

If you need to stop on a hill, do 

not hold the vehicle there with 

the accelerator pedal. This 

could damage the transmission. 

Apply the brakes to hold the 

vehicle in position. 

When you are going down a 

steep hill, use a lower shift 

range, along with the brakes, to 

control the vehicle's speed. 

Do not coast downhill in 

Neutral or with the ignition off. 

The brakes could overheat and 

you could have an accident. 

Vehicle Loading 

CAUTION 

Do not load your vehicle in 

excess of the Gross Vehicle 

Weight Rating or either Gross 

Axle Weight Rating. If you do, 

parts on your vehicle could 

break and it could change the 

way your vehicle handles. Overloading 

could result in loss of 

vehicle control and personal 

injury. It can also shorten the 

service life of your vehicle. 

. . . 14




Things you put inside your vehicle 

can strike and injure people 

in a sudden stop or turn, or in a 

crash. Put things in the cargo 

area of your vehicle and try to 

spread the weight evenly. 

Never stack things inside the 

vehicle any higher than the 

seatbacks. Do not leave unsecured 

child restraints inside the 

vehicle. Try to secure anything 

that is carried inside the vehicle. 

Fuel and Other Flammable 

Materials 

CAUTION 

Turn off the engine before 

refueling. 

When you open the fuel filler 

cap, open it slightly at first to 

release the pressure inside the 

tank, then turn it all the way. 

Never fill a portable fuel 

container while it is in your 

vehicle. 

Dispense gasoline only into 

approved containers. 

Do not smoke while pumping 

gasoline. 

Do not carry combustible materials, 

such as gasoline, in the 

vehicle. 


Do not put paper or flammable 

items in an ashtray. They may 

catch fire from a cigarette. 

To allow room for fuel expansion 

in the fuel tank (caused by 

heat from the engine), fill the 

tank only until the pump's automatic 

nozzle shuts off. 

15 . . .



Batteries 

CAUTION 

Vehicle batteries can hurt you. 

They contain acid and electricity 

that can burn and gas that 

can explode or ignite. Use care 

and follow any applicable 

instructions when working near 

a battery. 

Do not let battery fluid touch 

your skin. If you do get it in your 

eyes or on your skin, flush the 

place with water and get medical 

help immediately. 

Do not use a match or flame 

near a vehicle's battery. If you 

need more light, use a 

flashlight. 


Every new GM vehicle uses an 

AC Delco ® battery that requires 

no maintenance. However, if 

another battery has filler caps, 

be sure the right amount of 

fluid is there. If it is low, add 

water to make sure that there is 

no explosive gas present. 

Towing Your Vehicle 

CAUTION 

To help avoid injury to you or 

others: 

• Do not let anyone ride in a 

vehicle that is being towed. 

• Do not tow faster than safe or 

posted speeds. 

• Be sure to secure any loose or 

damaged parts. 

• Never get under a vehicle 

after it has been lifted. 

• Always use separate safety 

chains on each side of the 

vehicle. 

. . . 16



Engine Compartment 

CAUTION 

Steam from an overheated 

engine can burn you badly. 

Stay away from the engine if 

you see or hear steam coming 

from it. 

Be careful when working 

around the engine compartment. 

Some engine parts can 

get very hot and could burn 

you. 


Exercise extreme caution 

around the electric engine fan. 

It sometimes starts by itself, 

even when the engine is not 

running. 

Cooling System 

CAUTION 

Do not run the engine if the 

coolant is leaking. If the vehicle 

loses all coolant, it could cause 

an engine fire and you could be 

burned. 

Adding only plain water or a 

liquid other than the recommended 

coolant can be 

dangerous. The engine could 

overheat, but you would not 

get the overheat warning. The 

engine could catch on fire and 

you or others could be burned. 

CAUTION 

Under some conditions the 

ethylene glycol in engine coolant 

is combustible. To avoid 

being burned, do not spill coolant 

on the exhaust system or on 

hot engine parts. If you have 

any doubt, have this operation 

performed by a qualified 

technician. 

17 . . .




Steam and scalding liquids from 

a hot cooling system can blow 

out and burn you badly. Never 

turn the cap when the engine 

and cooling system are hot. 

Changing a Flat Tire 

CAUTION 

Changing a tire can cause injury. 

The vehicle can slip off the 

jack and injure you or other 

people. 

Getting under a vehicle when it 

is jacked up is dangerous. If the 

vehicle slips off the jack, you 

could be badly injured or killed. 

Never get under a vehicle when 

it is supported only by a jack. 


Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on 

the parts to which it is fastened, 

can make the wheel nuts 

become loose after a time. The 

wheel could come off and cause 

an accident. When you change 

a wheel, remove any rust or dirt 

from the places where the 

wheel attaches to the vehicle. In 

an emergency, you could use a 

cloth or a paper towel to do 

this; but be sure to use a scraper 

or wire brush later, if necessary, 

to get all the rust or dirt off. 

. . . 18



System Problems 

CAUTION 

Driving with the brake warning 

light on can lead to an accident. 

Have the brakes checked immediately 

if the brake warning 

light stays on. 

Do not keep driving with low oil 

pressure. Your engine could 

overheat and may catch on fire. 

You or others could be burned. 

Check the oil as soon as possible 

and have your vehicle 

serviced. 

CAUTION 

If any warning light on the 

instrument panel illuminates 

while you are driving, immediately 

park your vehicle in a safe 

place, and follow the instructions 

in this manual. 

If the engine stalls while you are 

driving, the power-assisted 

brake and steering systems will 

not work properly, and braking 

and steering will require 

substantial effort. Try to pull 

over to a safe place before your 

vehicle stops. 

NOTICE 

Additional electronic equipment, 

such as a CB radio, cellular 

phone, navigation package 

or two-way radio, may interfere 

with the operation of your vehicle's 

engine, radio or other electronic 

systems and even 

damage them. Please consult 

with an authorized GM dealer 

before installing electronic 

equipment. 

19 . . .



Additional Safety Cautions 

CAUTION 

Drinking and driving is very 

dangerous. Your reflexes, 

perceptions, attentiveness and 

judgment can be affected by 

even a small amount of alcohol. 

You can have a serious, or even 

fatal collision if you drive after 

drinking. Please don't drink and 

drive or ride with a driver who 

has been drinking. Ride home 

in a cab or designate a driver 

who will not drink. 


Medical research shows that 

alcohol in a person's system can 

make crash injuries worse. This 

is especially true of injuries to 

the brain, spinal cord or heart. 

This means that when any 

person who has been drinking - 

whether a driver or a passenger 

- is in a crash, that person's 

chance of being killed or 

permanently disabled is higher 

than if the person had not been 

drinking. 

CAUTION 

Unlocked doors can be dangerous. 

Make sure to lock all doors 

while riding in the vehicle. 

Turn the cruise control switch 

off when you are not using it. 

. . . 20


– 

1 

Dash- and Console-Mounted Instruments 

and Controls...................................................25 

Instrument Cluster ..........................................27 

Warning Lights................................................29 

Driver Information Center ...............................41 

Driver Information Center Buttons ..................42 

Vehicle Information Displays ...........................47 

Trip Information Displays ................................52 

Driver Information Center Messages ...............53 

Head-Up Display ............................................ 72 

Hazard Warning Flasher .................................. 77 

Valet Lockout Switch .......................................78 

Traction Control System .................................79 

Competitive Driving Mode 

(STS-V Model Only)........................................81 

Stabilitrak ® System..........................................82 

Accessory Power Outlets .................................84 

Section 1 - Instrumentation and Controls 

Lights ...............................................................85 

Lights Main Switch ..........................................85 

Automatic Headlight System...........................88 

Wiper Activated Headlights.............................89 

Headlight Washers ..........................................89 

Headlight Leveling Control .............................90 

Fog Lights.......................................................90 

Rear Fog Lights ...............................................91 

Interior Lights .................................................91 

Instrument Light Dimmer ...............................91 

Illuminated Entry System.................................92 

Reading Lights ................................................92 

Battery Saver...................................................93 

Heating and Air Conditioning System............93 

Dual Zone Climate Control System .................94 

Sensors .........................................................101 

Air Outlets ....................................................102 

Operating Tips..............................................102 

Rear Window Defogger.................................102 

Rear Climate Control.....................................104 

Passenger Compartment Air Filter .................105 

21 . . .



Sound System and Clock...............................106 

RDS Sound System with 6-Disc CD Player .....108 

Setting the Clock and Date ...........................109 

Radio Controls ..............................................110 

Compact Disc Changer .................................123 

Playing MP3 format CDs ...............................126 

Disc Error ......................................................133 

Care of Your Compact Disc Player.................134 

Care of Your Compact Discs..........................134 

Reconfigurable Radio Display Buttons ...........135 

Radio Personalization ....................................136 

Radio Main Menu (Base Sound System) ........136 

Main Menu Items (Base Sound System) ........136 

Audio Steering Wheel Controls ......................142 

Anti-Theft Feature .........................................144 

Antenna ........................................................144 

Navigation System .......................................145 

Controls Mounted on Steering 

Wheel/Column .............................................146 

Multifunction Lever.......................................146 

Audio Steering Wheel Controls .....................147 

Heated Steering Wheel Control ....................147 

Telescopic Power Tilt Wheel Control .............148 

Horn .............................................................148 

Windshield Wipers/Washer Stalk ...................149 

Multifunction Lever.......................................153 

Turn Signal ...................................................153 

Main Light Controls ......................................154 

Cruise Control...............................................154 

Forward Collision Alert System .....................154 

Forward Collision Alert System ....................154 

Alerting the Driver ........................................156 

Vehicle Detection..........................................157 

Alert System Messages..................................158 

Cruise Control ...............................................158 

Traditional Cruise Control ............................158 

Adaptive Cruise Control ...............................162 

Operation .....................................................164 

Cleaning the System .....................................178 

Mirrors...........................................................179 

Outside Mirrors.............................................179 

Inside Day/Night Mirror................................181 

Vanity Mirrors ...............................................182 

Windows........................................................183 

Power Windows............................................184 

Doors .............................................................187 

Door Locks....................................................187 

Rear Door Security Lock ................................189 

. . . 22



Trunk Area .....................................................190 

Trunk Release................................................191 

Rear Seat Pass-Through Door ........................192 

Emergency Trunk Release Handle..................193 

Convenience Net ..........................................193 

Overhead Area and Roof...............................194 

Sun Visors .....................................................194 

Sunroof ........................................................194 

Reading Lights ..............................................196 

Storage ..........................................................196 

Center Console Armrest ................................196 

Glove Box .....................................................197 

Map Pockets .................................................197 

Cupholders ...................................................197 

Convenience Net ..........................................198 

Ashtrays and Lighter .....................................198 

Retained Accessory Power ............................200 

Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist.......................200 

Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist System 

Problems .....................................................202 

Battery Load Management ...........................203 

Electric Power Management.........................204 

Vehicle Programming and Personalization 

Features ........................................................204 

Feature Customization (Base Sound System) . 208 

PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU 

(Base Sound System) ...................................208 

DRIVER SELECTION Menu.............................233 

DRIVER EXIT SETTINGS Menu .......................236 

Feature Customization (Navigation System) .. 237 

Language Selection Menu.............................237 

PERSONAL SETTINGS Menu 

(Navigation System) ....................................239 

MEMORY Menu............................................251 

23 . . .


Instrumentation and Controls 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

1 7 1 1 

8 9 10 11 9 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 

. . . 24


Section 1 

■ DASH- AND CONSOLE- 

MOUNTED 

INSTRUMENTS AND 

CONTROLS 

1. Air Vent 

2. Instrument Light Dimmer 

Driver Information Center 

Buttons 

Head-Up Display Controls (If 

equipped) 

3. Multifunction Lever 

This lever controls the following 

features: 

- Turn Signals 

- Headlights and Other Exterior 

Lights 

- Fog Lights 

4. Instrument Cluster 

5. Driver Information Center 

Display 

6. Windshield Wipers/Washer 

Stalk 

7. Sound System and Clock 

Navigation System (If 

equipped) 

8. Hood Release 

9. Steering Wheel Controls 

- Audio Steering Wheel 

Controls 

- Adaptive Cruise Control Button 

(If equipped) 

- Cruise Control Cancel Button 

- Heated Steering Wheel Control 

(If equipped) 

10. Telescopic Power Tilt Wheel 

Control 

11. Horn 

12. Keyless Ignition Controls 

13. Heating and Air Conditioning 

System 

14. Hazard Warning Flasher 

Control 

15. Cupholders 

16. Traction Control Button 

17. Gear Shift Lever 

18. Ashtray and Lighter 

19. Glove Box 

– 

- Cruise Control 

- Adaptive Cruise Control (If 

equipped) 

- Forward Collision Alert System 

(If equipped) 

25 . . .



3 2 7 

1 4 2 

5 

8 

6 

. . . 26


Section 1 

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 

1. High Beam Indicator 

The indicator light turns on 

when the headlights are set to 

high beams. 

2. Turn Signal Indicators 

An arrow will flash in the direction 

of the turn or lane change 

when the turn signal is 

activated. 

The instrument cluster is designed 

to let you know at a glance how 

your vehicle is running. 

You can use the Driver Information 

Center to change your display's 

readings between English and 

metric units. 

See "Driver Information Center" 

later in this section for 

information. 

For information about the various 

warning lights located on your 

instrument cluster or elsewhere in 

your vehicle, see "Warning Lights" 

later in this section. 

3. Engine Coolant Temperature 

Gage 

This gage shows the engine 

coolant temperature. If the 

pointer moves into the shaded 

warning area, the engine is too 

hot! 

If the engine coolant has overheated, 

stop the vehicle and 

turn the engine off immediately. 

See Sections 4 and 5 for 

more information on your vehicle's 

cooling system. 

– 

27 . . .



4. Speedometer 

The speedometer displays the 

vehicle's speed. 

The reading will be indicated 

in metric units of km/h (kilometers 

per hour) or MPH 

(Miles Per Hour). 

5. Odometer/Trip Odometers 

The odometer and the trip 

odometers are viewable in the 

bottom line of the driver information 

center display. 

The odometer shows how far 

your vehicle has been driven. 

Your vehicle has two trip 

odometers which are distinguished 

as TRIP A and TRIP B. 

Each trip odometer can tell 

you how far your vehicle has 

been driven since you last set 

the trip odometer to zero. 

See the following under "Driver 

Information Center" later in 

this section for more 

information: 

-Trip Information Displays 

- Driver Information Center 

Buttons 

Trip Information Button 

. . . 28


Section 1 

6. Fuel Gage 

The fuel gage shows how 

much fuel is in the fuel tank. 

The fuel gage works only when 

the engine is on. 

If the fuel is low, the FUEL LEV- 

EL LOW message will appear 

on the Driver Information Center 

display. 

A chime will also sound if the 

fuel is low. 

The arrow on the gage indicates 

the side of the vehicle 

where the fuel door is located. 

7. Tachometer 

The tachometer displays engine 

speed in thousands of 

revolutions per minute (RPM). 

8. Driver Information Center 

Display 



information. 

Warning Lights 

Your vehicle has a number of 

warning lights. 

The warning lights go on when 

there may be or there is a problem 

with one of your vehicle's functions. 

Some warning lights come 

on briefly when you start the 

engine just to let you know they're 

working properly. 

Your vehicle also has a Driver Information 

Center that works along 

with the warning lights and gages. 



– 

29 . . .



Engine Oil Pressure Warning 

Light 

This light should come on briefly 

as you start the engine, as a check 

to show you it is working properly. 

If it doesn't come on, then have it 

fixed so it will be ready to warn 

you if there is a problem. 

If you have a problem with the oil, 

this light may stay on after you 

start the engine, or come on while 

you are driving. This indicates that 

oil is not going through the engine 

quickly enough to keep it lubricated. 

The engine could be low on 

oil, or could have some other oil 

problem. Have it fixed right away. 

Sometimes when the engine is 

idling at a stop, the light may blink 

on and off. This is normal. 

A chime may also sound when the 

light comes on. 

CAUTION 


pressure. Your engine could 

overheat and may catch on fire. 

You or others could be burned. 

Check the oil as soon as possible 

and have your vehicle 

serviced. 

NOTICE 

Engine damage due to neglected 

oil problems can be costly to 

repair and is not covered by 

your warranty. 

. . . 30


Section 1 

If it stays on or comes on while you 

are driving, there may be a problem 

with one of the systems. Have 

it checked as soon as possible. 

Driving while this light is on could 

drain your battery. 

If you must drive a short distance 

with the light on, turn off all your 

accessories, such as the radio and 

air conditioner. 

If there is a problem with the 

battery charging system, a 

message will be displayed. See 

"Driver Information Center 

Messages" later in this section. 

Charging System Light 

The charging system light monitors 

the generator and battery 

charging systems. 

This light should come on when 

the ignition is on but the engine is 

not running, as a check to show 

you it is working properly. 




Engine Coolant Temperature 

Light 









with the cooling system. 

Driving while this light is on could 

cause the vehicle to overheat. 

– 

31 . . .



See Sections 4 and 5 for more 

information on your vehicle's cooling 

system. 

Also, see "Driver Information 

Center Messages" later in this 

section for more information. 

Brake System Warning Light 

Your vehicle has "dual" brake 

systems. If one system fails, the 

other system can still stop your 

vehicle. 







If the light comes on while you are 

driving, pull over and stop 

carefully. 

The brake pedal may be harder to 

push or it may go closer to the 

floor. It may take longer to stop. 

If the light stays on, have the vehicle 

towed for service. The brake 

system should be inspected right 

away. 

This light also comes on when you 

set your parking brake while the 

ignition is on. 

If it stays on after the parking brake 

is fully released, it means you may 

have a brake problem. 

Have it checked right away. 

. . . 32


Section 1 

If the light does not come on when 

the parking brake is set, have your 

vehicle serviced. 

CAUTION 

Driving with the brake warning 

light on can lead to an accident. 

Have the brakes checked immediately 

if the brake warning 

light stays on. 

Have the vehicle towed for 

service. 

ABS 

Antilock Brake System Warning 

Light 

This light will go on when you start 

the engine and may stay on for a 

few seconds. If it doesn't come on, 

then have it fixed so it will be ready 

to warn you if there is a problem. 



with this system. 

Stop as soon as possible and turn 

the ignition off. Then start the 

engine to reset the system. 

If the light still stays on, or if it 

comes on again while you're driving, 

your vehicle needs service. 

Until you get it fixed, the brakes 

will still work, but without the 

antilock feature. 

If the regular brake system warning 

light is also on, the vehicle 

does not have antilock brakes and 

there is a problem with the regular 

brakes. Pull off the road and stop 

carefully. Have the vehicle towed 

for service. 

See "Brake System Warning Light" 

earlier in this section. 

A text message may also appear in 

the Driver Information Center 

display. 

See "Driver Information Center 

Messages" later in this section for 


– 

33 . . .



Malfunction Indicator Light 

This light monitors the fuel, ignition 

and emission control systems. 

This light should come on as you 

start the engine. If it doesn't come 

on, then have it fixed so it will be 

ready to warn you if there is a 

problem. 




Problems with the system may be 

detected before they are apparent. 

Have it checked right away. 

If the light stays on, you may be 

able to correct the malfunction by 

making sure the fuel cap is properly 

installed, if you have just refilled 

the tank with fuel. 

NOTICE 

If you keep driving your vehicle 

with this light on, after a while, 

your emission controls may not 

work as well, your fuel economy 

may not be as good and your 

engine may not run as smoothly. 

This could lead to costly 

repairs that may not be covered 

by your warranty. 

. . . 34


Section 1 

NOTICE 

Modifications made to the 

engine, transmission, exhaust, 

intake or fuel system of your 

vehicle or the replacement of 

the original tires with other 

than those of the same Tire 

Performance Criteria can affect 

your vehicle's emission controls 

and may cause this light to 

come on. Modifications to 

these systems could lead to 

costly repairs not covered by 


See "Accessories and Modifications" 

for more information. 

In order for your vehicle to pass an 

inspection of its emission control 

equipment, the Malfunction Indicator 

Light must be working properly 

and must be off. 

To check if the indicator light is 

working properly, do the 

following: 

1. The keyless access transmitter 

must be in the vehicle. 

2. Press and hold the keyless 

ignition off/accessory button 

for 5 seconds to turn on the 

ignition without starting the 

engine. 

The Malfunction Indicator 

Light should illuminate. 

After performing the bulb check, 

make sure to press the keyless ignition 

off/accessory button again to 

turn off the ignition. 

NOTICE 

Leaving the ignition on for an 

extended period of time will 

drain the battery. 

If you have recently replaced the 

battery in your vehicle, or if the 

battery has run down, the vehicle's 

on-board diagnostic system may 

determine that the vehicle is not 

ready for inspection. It may take 

several days of routine driving in 

order for the diagnostic system to 

have enough data for the 

inspection. 

– 

35 . . .



If the vehicle has been driven for 

several days (with a fully charged 

battery) prior to the inspection, 

but the vehicle still does not pass 

for lack of on-board diagnostic 

system readiness, see your dealer 

or a qualified service center to 

prepare the vehicle for inspection. 

Traction System Malfunction 

Light 







Whenever this light is on, the traction 

control system is off and will 

not limit wheel spin. 

The traction control system may 

have been turned off manually 

using the traction control button. 

If the light stays on, or if it comes 

on while you're driving when you 

have not turned off traction 

control, there may be a problem 


Pull over and stop the vehicle as 

soon as it is safe to do so. 

Turn the ignition off, and then 

restart the vehicle. 

If the light still stays on, or if it 

comes on again while you're driving, 

your vehicle needs service. 

Have the traction control system 

inspected as soon as possible. 

See "Traction Control System" 


Also, see "Competitive Driving 

Mode" later in this section. 

. . . 36


Section 1 

If there is a problem with the air 

bag system, the SERVICE AIR BAG 

message will appear on the Driver 

Information Center display. See 



Restraint System Light 

See "Safety Belts" in Section 2 for 

information. 

Air Bag Light 

This light will go on when you start 

the engine and may flash for a few 

seconds. 







Have the vehicle serviced right 

away. 

CAUTION 

If the air bag light stays on or 

comes on while you are driving, 

there may be a problem with 

this system. The air bags may 

not inflate in a crash, or they 

may inflate even when there 

hasn't been a crash. To avoid 

injury to yourself or others, 

have the vehicle serviced right 

away. 

See Section 2 for more information 

on the air bag system. 

– 

37 . . .



Passenger Air Bag On/Off 

Indicator 

See "Passenger Sensing System" in 

Section 2. 

Passenger Safety Belt Reminder 

Light 

See "Safety Belts" in Section 2 for 

information. 

Security System Light 

See "Theft Deterrent System" in 

Section 3 for information. 

. . . 38


Section 1 

– 

Fog Lamp Light 

This light will come on when the 

fog lights are turned on. See "Fog 

Lights" later in this section for 


Rear Fog Lamp Light 

This light will come on when the 

rear fog lights are turned on. See 

"Rear Fog Lights" later in this 


Lights On Reminder Light 

This light turns on as a reminder 

whenever the parking lights are 

on. 

For more information, see "Lights 

On Reminder" later in this section. 

39 . . .



Cruise Control Light 

This light turns on whenever you 

set the cruise control. 

See "Cruise Control" later in this 


Low Tire Pressure Light 

This light comes on briefly as you 

are starting your engine as a check 





After the initial bulb check, this 

light appears when the Tire Pressure 

Monitor detects a low pressure 

condition in one or more of 

the road tires. 

The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE 

message will also appear on the 

driver information center display. 

If you get the low tire pressure 

warning, stop as soon as possible, 

check all the tires for damage and 

inflate them to the proper 

pressure. 

If a problem is detected, the indicator 

light will flash for about one 

minute and then remain on for the 

rest of the ignition cycle. 

For more information, see "Tire 

Pressure Monitor" under "Tires" in 

Section 4. 

Also, see "Driver Information 

Center Messages" later in this 


. . . 40


Section 1 

Lane Departure Warning System 

Lights (If equipped) 

There are two lights on the instrument 

cluster for the Lane Departure 

Warning System. 

An amber light should come on 

briefly as you start the engine, as a 

check to show you the system is 

working properly. 

A green light in the instrument 

cluster will turn on once the vehicle 

speed is greater than 56 km/h 

and a left or right lane marker is 

detected by the system. 

The amber light will flash if you 

cross a detected lane marking 

without activating your turn 

signal. 

Three chimes will also sound. 

For information on how to use this 

system, see the separate navigation 

system manual. 

DRIVER INFORMATION 

CENTER 

The Driver Information Center 

gives you the status of many of 

your vehicle's systems. 

When the ignition is turned on, 

the Driver Information Center will 

turn on. 

After a short delay, the Driver 

Information Center will recall the 

mode last displayed before the 

engine was turned off. 

The control buttons are located on 

the instrument panel, near the 

steering wheel. 

The display is located at the 

bottom of the instrument cluster. 

The top line of the display shows 

information about vehicle systems. 


Information Center Buttons" later 

in this section: 

• Information Button 

– 

41 . . .



The bottom line of the display 

shows the following: 

• odometer, trip odometer A or 

trip odometer B 

See the following for more 

information: 

-Trip Information Displays 

- Driver Information Center 

Buttons 


• outside temperature 

• shift lever position indicator 

See "Automatic Transmission" 

in Section 3 for information. 

• S if sport mode is active, or M if 

manual shift mode is active 

See "Automatic Transmission 

Driver-Controlled Shift Mode" 

under "Automatic Transmission" 

in Section 3 for 

information. 

If the system senses a problem, a 

message will appear on the 

display. 


Messages" later in this section for 



Buttons 

The control buttons are located on 

the instrument panel, near the 

steering wheel. 

. . . 42


Section 1 

VEHICLES NOT EQUIPPED WITH 

A HEAD-UP DISPLAY 

This is your vehicle's driver information 

center control panel. 

Information Button 

Press the up or down arrow on the 

information button to scroll 

through the available information 

displays: 

• Digital Speed Display (If 

equipped) 

• Fuel Range 

• Average Fuel Economy 

• Instant Fuel Economy 

• Fuel Used 

• Average Speed 

• Timer 

• Battery Voltage 

• Tire Pressure 

• Engine Oil Life 

• Blank Display 

The following displays are only 

available on the STS-V Model: 

• Engine Boost 

• Engine Oil Temperature 

• Oil Pressure 

• Transmission Fluid Temperature 


information: 

• Vehicle Information Displays 

– 

43 . . .



Note: Trip odometers A and B can 

be used simultaneously. 


information: 

• Trip Information Displays 

Reset Button 

Press this button to reset Driver 

Information Center features and to 

turn off or acknowledge messages. 


Press the top of this button to 

show the trip odometer A or trip 

odometer B reading in place of the 

standard odometer reading. 

To set a trip odometer to zero, first 

display the desired trip odometer 

and then press and hold the 

bottom of the button. 

Only the trip odometer that is 

displayed will be reset. 

. . . 44


Section 1 

– 

English/Metric Unit Selection 

Button 

Press this button to switch your 

displays between English and 

metric units. 

VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH A 

HEAD-UP DISPLAY 

This is your vehicle's driver information 

center control panel. 

Information Button 




displays: 

• Digital Speed Display (If 

equipped) 

• Fuel Range 

• Average Fuel Economy 

• Instant Fuel Economy 

45 . . .



• Fuel Used 

• Average Speed 

• Timer 

• Battery Voltage 

• Tire Pressure 

• Engine Oil Life 

• Display Units 



information: 


Reset Button 

Press this button to reset Driver 

Information Center features and to 

turn off or acknowledge messages. 

Head-Up Display Control 

This button is part of the head-up 

display system. 


information: 

• Head-Up Display 

. . . 46


Section 1 

Only the trip odometer that is 

displayed will be reset. 

Note: Trip odometers A and B can 

be used simultaneously. 


information: 

Vehicle Information 

Displays 




displays: 


Press this button to show the trip 

odometer A or trip odometer B 

reading in place of the standard 

odometer reading. 

• Trip Information Displays 

• MPH/KM/H 

In addition to the standard 

analog speedometer, your 

vehicle may be equipped with 

this digital speed display. 

– 

To set a trip odometer to zero, first 

display the desired trip odometer 

and then do either of the 

following: 

• Press the Reset button. 

• Press and hold the Trip Information 

button. 

47 . . .



• MILES RANGE/KM RANGE 

This display shows how far the 

computer thinks you can travel 

with the fuel that's in the tank. 

The fuel range estimate is 

based on your current driving 

conditions. 

When the range drops below 

approximately 64 km (40 

miles), the display will show 

LOW RANGE. 

If the fuel level is low, the FUEL 

LEVEL LOW message will 

appear in the display. See 



• MPG AVG/L/100 KM AVG 

This display shows the average 

fuel economy since the last 

time you reset the system. 

To reset this reading to zero, 

first select its display, then press 

the Reset button. 

• MPG INST/L/100 KM INST 

This will show what the fuel 

economy is at the instant the 

display is viewed. 

This item cannot be reset. 

• GAL FUEL USED/L FUEL USED 

This display shows how much 

fuel has been used since you 

last reset the system. 




• AVG MPH/AVG KM/H 

This display shows your average 

speed since you last reset 

the system. 




. . . 48


Section 1 

• 00:00:00 TIMER OFF 

The timer function allows you 

to time how long it takes to get 

from one point to another. 

To start the timer, first select its 

display, then press the Reset 

button. 

00:00:00 TIMER ON will be 

displayed. 

The timer will start. 

To stop the timer, select its display, 

then press the Reset button 

again. 

When the timer is off, the display 

will show the timer value 

and TIMER OFF. 

If you press and release the 

Reset button again, the timer 

will resume. 

To reset the timer to 00:00:00, 

press and hold the Reset button 

after the timer has been 

stopped. 

• BATTERY VOLTS 

This display lets you monitor 

battery voltage to make sure it 

is charging properly. 

If the battery voltage is below 

the normal range, BATTERY 

VOLTS LOW will be displayed. 

If the battery voltage is above 

the normal range, BATTERY 

VOLTS HIGH will be displayed. 

You may see the reading fluctuate. 

This is normal. 

See "Charging System Light" 

under "Warning Lights" earlier 

in this section for more 

information. 

If there is a problem with the 

battery charging system, a 

message will be displayed. See 



– 

49 . . .



• Tire Pressure Monitor Displays 

This display shows the air pressure 

for each of the vehicle's 

tires. 

Press the Information button to 

scroll through the following 

displays: 

- LF TIRE: This display shows 

the air pressure in the left 

front tire. 

- RF TIRE (right front tire): This 

display shows the air pressure 

in the right front tire. 

- LR TIRE: This display shows 

the air pressure in the left rear 

tire. 

- RR TIRE (right rear tire): This 

display shows the air pressure 

in the right rear tire. 

The reading will be indicated in 

metric units of kPa or in English 

units of PSI. 

If the tire pressure is low, LOW 

will be displayed with the pressure 

reading. 

If the tire pressure is high, 

HIGH will be displayed with 

the pressure reading. 

If the display shows dashes 

instead of a value, there may 

be a problem with the system. 

If this occurs consistently, see 

your dealer for service. 

• ENGINE OIL LIFE 

This display shows the percentage 

of oil life remaining since 

the system was last reset. 

If, for example, you see 95% 

ENGINE OIL LIFE, that means 

that the way you are driving 

your vehicle, 95% of the current 

oil life remains. 

When the remaining oil life is 

low, the CHANGE ENGINE OIL 

SOON message will appear. 

After the oil change message 

comes on, change the engine 

oil as soon as possible within 

the next 1000 km (600 miles). 

. . . 50


Section 1 

After you change the oil, the oil 

life monitor will need to be 

reset. See your dealer for 

service. 

See "Engine Oil" in Section 4 


Also see the Maintenance 

Schedule booklet for more 

information. 

• ENGLISH DISPLAY UNITS or 

METRIC DISPLAY UNITS 

This item only appears in vehicles 

equipped with a head-up 

display. 

To switch your displays 

between English and metric 

units, first select this item, then 

press the Reset button. 


The Driver Information Center's 

Vehicle Information display is 

off. 

• ENGINE BOOST 

(STS-V Model Only) 

This display shows a graphic 

that indicates the amount of 

boost the engine is receiving 

from the supercharger. 




• ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE 


This display shows the engine 

oil temperature. 


metric units of °C or in English 

units of °F. 

– 

51 . . .



• OIL PRESSURE 


This display shows the engine 

oil pressure. 




• TRANS FLUID TEMP 


This display shows the transmission 

fluid temperature. 


metric units of °C or in English 

units of °F. 

Trip Information Displays 

Use the trip information button to 

scroll through the following 

displays: 

• Odometer 

The odometer shows how far 

your vehicle has been driven. 

• Trip Odometers: 

- TRIP A 

- TRIP B 

Each trip odometer can tell you 

how far your vehicle has been 

driven since you last set the trip 

odometer to zero. 

Note: Trip odometers A and B 

can be used simultaneously. 


Buttons" earlier in this section 



metric units of kilometers or in 

English units of miles. 

. . . 52


Section 1 


Messages 

These messages will appear if a 

problem is sensed in one of your 

vehicle's systems or to display 

system information. 

If there is more than one message, 

the messages will appear one 

behind the other. 

A symbol may also appear. 

The text messages are the same for 

both the base sound system and 

the navigation system unless 

otherwise indicated. 

To clear a message from the Driver 

Information Center display, press 


Some messages may not be 

cleared until the problem is fixed. 

Clearing a message only makes the 

message disappear. It does not 

eliminate the problem. Be sure to 

take messages seriously. 

• AUTOMATIC LIGHTS OFF 

Appears when the automatic 

headlight system is turned off. 

See "Lights" later in this section 


• AUTOMATIC LIGHTS ON 

Appears when the automatic 

headlight system is turned on. 

See "Lights" later in this section 


• BATTERY NOT CHARGING 

SERVICE CHARGING SYS 

Appears if there is a problem 

with the electrical charging system. 

Have the system checked 

right away. Driving while this 

message is on could drain your 

battery. 

– 

53 . . .



• BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE 

Appears if the vehicle detects 

that the battery voltage is 

dropping beyond a reasonable 

point. When the battery voltage 

drops, the battery saver 

system will start reducing 

power to certain features that 

may not be noticeable. If a feature 

must be disabled, this 

message will be displayed to let 

you know that the vehicle is 

trying to save the charge in the 

battery. Turn off any unneeded 

accessories. 

You can monitor battery voltage 

using the Driver Information 

Center. The normal range 

is 11.5 to 15.5 volts when the 

engine is running. 

See the following, later in this 

section, for more information: 

- Battery Load Management 

• BATTERY VOLTAGE HIGH 

Appears if the electrical charging 

system is overcharging. The 

message will appear when the 

battery voltage is above 16 

volts. You can reduce the 

charging overload by using the 

vehicle's accessories. You can 

monitor battery voltage using 

the Driver Information Center. 

The normal range is 11.5 to 

15.5 volts when the engine is 

running. 

. . . 54


Section 1 

• BATTERY VOLTAGE LOW 

Appears when the electrical 

system is charging less than 10 

volts or if the battery has been 

drained. If it appears immediately 

after starting, the battery 

should recharge while you are 

driving, but it may take a few 

hours to do so. 

Consider using an auxiliary 

charger to boost the battery 

after you arrive at your final 

destination. 

Be sure to follow the manufacturer's 

instructions when using 

a battery charger. 

If this message appears while 

you are driving or comes on 

after starting the vehicle and 

stays on, have the electrical system 

checked immediately. 

If you must drive a short distance, 

turn off all your accessories, 

such as the radio and air 

conditioner. 

You can monitor battery voltage 

using the Driver Information 

Center. The normal range 

is 11.5 to 15.5 volts when the 

engine is running. 

• CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON 

Appears when the life of the 

engine oil has expired and the 

oil should be replaced. 

After you change the oil, the oil 

life monitor will need to be 

reset. See your dealer for 

service. 

See your dealer for service. 

See "Engine Oil" in Section 4 


Also see the Maintenance 

Schedule booklet for more 

information. 

– 

55 . . .



• CHECK BRAKE FLUID 

Appears when the ignition is 

on and the brake fluid level is 

low. Have the vehicle serviced 

as soon as possible. 

See "Brake System Warning 

Light" earlier in this section. 

• CHECK GAS CAP 

Appears when the gas cap has 

not been properly installed. 

Check the gas cap to be sure 

that it is on properly. 

See "Malfunction Indicator 

Light" earlier in this section for 


• CHECK TIRE PRESSURE 

Appears when the tire pressure 

in one of the vehicle tires needs 

to be checked. 

Stop as soon as possible and 

have the tire pressures checked 

and corrected. 


information: 

-Vehicle Information Displays 

-Tire Pressure Monitor 

- Low Tire Pressure Light 

• CHECK WASHER FLUID 

Appears when the washer fluid 

level is low. 

Add washer fluid. 

See "Windshield Washer Fluid" 

in Section 4 for information. 

. . . 56


Section 1 

• CLEAN RADAR 

Note: This message may not be 

available on all vehicles. 

Appears when the adaptive 

cruise control system is disabled 

because the radar is 

blocked and cannot detect 

vehicles in your path. This message 

may also appear during 

heavy rain or due to road spray. 

To clean the system, see "Adaptive 

Cruise Control" later in this 

section. 

• COMPETITIVE DRIVING 


Appears when the competitive 

driving mode is selected. 

The traction control system will 

not be operating, so adjust 

your driving accordingly. 

See "Competitive Driving 

Mode" later in this section. 

• DRIVER DOOR AJAR 

Appears when the driver's door 

is open or ajar. 

Make sure that there are no 

obstructions in the way of the 

door and close the door. 

• ENGINE COOLANT HOT/IDLE 

ENGINE 

Appears when the coolant temperature 

is too hot. 

Pull over and stop the vehicle 

as soon as it is safe to do so. 

Let the engine idle until it is 

cool. 


information: 

- Engine Coolant Temperature 

Light 

- Overheat Protection Mode 

– 

57 . . .



NOTICE 

Continuing to drive your vehicle 

with an overheated engine 

can result in severe engine 

damage. 

If you get an overheat warning, 

stop as soon as possible. 

Do not increase engine speed 

above normal idle. 

See "Engine Overheating" in 

Section 5. 

• ENGINE HOT -- AC OFF 

Appears when the coolant temperature 

is over normal operating 

temperature. The air 

conditioning will automatically 

turn off until the coolant temperature 

turns back to normal. 

The air conditioning will then 

turn back on. You may continue 

to drive the vehicle. 

If this message continues to 

appear, have the system 

repaired as soon as possible to 

avoid engine damage. 

• ENGINE POWER REDUCED 

Appears when engine power is 

being reduced to protect the 

engine from damage. 

There are several malfunctions 

that might trigger this 

message. 

There may be a noticeable 

reduction in the vehicle's 

performance. 

This also can affect the vehicle's 

ability to accelerate. 

If this message appears with no 

reduction in vehicle performance, 

proceed to your destination. 

The next time the 

vehicle is driven, acceleration 

and speed may be reduced. 

Drive at a reduced speed. 

Have the vehicle serviced as 

soon as possible. 

. . . 58


Section 1 

• ENGINE PROTECTION 

REDUCED RPM'S 

Appears when the system has 

entered the engine overheat 

protection mode. 

Continued operation of the 

vehicle at the current engine 

speed may cause the engine to 

overheat. 

Engine rpms will be limited to 

prevent engine overheating. 

While this message is displayed, 

the transmission may 

upshift earlier than normal and 

vehicle speed may be reduced. 

This is normal. Your vehicle 

does not need service. 

When the engine oil temperature 

returns to a safe level, the 

message will clear 

automatically. • FUEL LEVEL LOW 

Warns that the fuel level in the 

fuel tank is low. A single chime 

will sound. Stop for fuel soon. 

– 

59 . . .



• HOOD AJAR 

Appears if the hood is not completely 

closed. 

• ICE POSSIBLE 

Appears when the outside temperature 

is cold enough to create 

icy road conditions. 

Adjust your driving 

accordingly. 

• KEY FOB BATTERY LOW 

Appears if the keyless access 

transmitter battery is low. 

Replace the battery. 

See the following in Section 3 

for more information: 

- Battery Replacement 

• LANE DEPARTURE SYSTEM 

UNAVAILABLE 



Appears when the lane departure 

warning system will not 

activate due to a temporary 

condition. 

Be sure to keep the windshield 

free of mud, dirt, snow, ice and 

slush. 

For information on how to use 

this system, see the separate 

navigation system manual. 

. . . 60


Section 1 

Interference may be caused by 

equipment plugged into the 

accessory power outlet on the 

center console. Examples of 

such equipment include: 

- cell phone 

• LEFT REAR DOOR AJAR 

Appears when the left rear 

door is open or ajar. 




• NO FOBS DETECTED 

Appears when the vehicle does 

not detect the presence of a 

keyless access transmitter when 

you attempt to start the vehicle 

or after a door is closed. 

The keyless access transmitter 

must be in the vehicle for the 

ignition to work. 

This message may appear 

because something is causing 

interference. 

- cell phone charger 

- two-way radio 

- power inverter 

Try moving the transmitter 

away from the device when 

starting the vehicle. 

Personal Digital Assistant 

devices and remote garage/ 

gate openers may generate 

electromagnetic interference. 

Do not carry the keyless access 

transmitter in the same pocket 

or bag as these devices. 

– 

61 . . .



There may also be interference 

in areas where there is an electro-magnetic 

field, such as near 

an airport, automatic toll 

booth, or some gas stations. 

Try moving the transmitter to 

different locations within the 

vehicle. If this does not help, 

place the transmitter in the 

console bin transmitter pocket 

with the buttons facing to the 

front and then start the vehicle. 

This message may also appear 

when the vehicle's battery is 

low. 

The battery charge must be 

above 10 volts to detect the 

transmitter. 

• NO FOB - OFF OR RUN? 

Appears when you turn off the 

engine and the vehicle does 

not detect a keyless access 

transmitter in the vehicle. 

The vehicle will remain in 

accessory mode until one of 

the following events has 

occurred: 

- the engine is restarted 

- 10 minutes have passed 

- the keyless ignition off button 

is pressed to turn off the 

ignition 

While the vehicle is in accessory 

mode, make sure that you have 

the transmitter. 

If the keyless ignition off button 

is pressed, the vehicle cannot 

be started again unless the 

remote keyless access transmitter 

is in the vehicle. 

The remote keyless access 

transmitter must be in the vehicle 

for the ignition to work. 

See "Starting Instructions" in 

Section 3 for more information. 

. . . 62


Section 1 

• OIL PRESSURE LOW/STOP 

ENGINE 

Appears when the engine oil 

pressure is low. 

If this message appears while 

the engine is running, stop and 

turn the engine off immediately. 

Do not use the vehicle 

until the problem is fixed. A 

multiple chime will also sound. 

• PRESS START AND BRAKE TO 

START ENGINE 

Appears to remind you that, in 

order to start the vehicle, the 

brake pedal must be applied 

while pressing the keyless ignition 

start button. 



• PASSENGER DOOR AJAR 

Appears when the front passenger 





– 

NOTICE 


pressure. Severe engine 

damage can result from driving 

the vehicle with low oil pressure. 

Check the oil as soon as 

possible and have your vehicle 

serviced. 

See "Engine Oil" in Section 4 for 


63 . . .



• RADAR CRUISE NOT READY 



Appears when adaptive cruise 

control will not activate due to 

a temporary condition. The 

vehicle does not require service. 

Continue driving for several 

minutes and then try to 

activate cruise control again. 

This message will also appear 

under the following conditions: 

- The driver turns off the headup 

display while adaptive 

cruise control is engaged. 

- The driver tries to engage the 

adaptive cruise control system 

while the head-up display 

is off. 

• RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR 

Appears when the right rear 





• SERVICE AC SYSTEM 

Appears when the electronic 

sensors that control the air conditioning 

and heating systems 

are no longer working. If you 

notice a drop in heating and air 

conditioning efficiency, have 

the climate control system 

serviced. 

• SERVICE AIR BAG 


with the air bag system. See 


See "Air Bag Light" earlier in 


information. 

. . . 64


Section 1 

• SERVICE BRAKE ASSIST 


with the brake assist system. 


See "Brake Assist" in Section 3. 

• SERVICE COLUMN LOCK 

Appears when there is a problem 

with the system that controls 

the locking and unlocking 

of the steering column. Have 

the vehicle towed for service. 

• SERVICE LANE DEPARTURE 

SYSTEM 




with the lane departure warning 

system. 

If this message continues to 

appear, have the system 

repaired as soon as possible. 



this system, see the separate 


• SERVICE HEADLAMP LEVEL 


with the automatic headlight 

leveling control system. 


• SERVICE RADAR CRUISE 



Appears if the adaptive cruise 

control system is disabled. 


– 

65 . . .



• SERVICE STABILITY SYS 

Appears if your stability 

enhancement system is 

malfunctioning. 

To reset the system, stop and 

turn the ignition off and then 

back on. 

If the message still comes on, 

see your dealer for service. 

See "Stabilitrak ® " later in this 


• SERVICE STEERING SYS 


with the variable effort 

steering system. Have it fixed. 

When this message is displayed, 

you may notice the 

effort required to steer the 

vehicle increases, but you will 

still be able to steer. 

• SERVICE SUSPENSION SYS 

Appears when the suspension 

system is not working properly. 


• SERVICE THEFT SYSTEM 


with the hood open and 

closed switches. 

You may need to replace the 

switches. 

Until this problem is fixed, you 

should note the following: 

- The theft deterrent system 

will still protect the interior of 

the vehicle. 

- The hood area will not be 

protected by the theft deterrent 

system. 

- The remote-starter will not 

operate. 


. . . 66


Section 1 

• SERVICE TIRE MONITOR 

Appears when the tire pressure 

monitoring system is not working 

properly. 

The Low Tire Pressure Light 

may also appear on the instrument 

cluster. For more information, 

see "Low Tire Pressure 

Light" under "Warning Lights" 



See "Tire Pressure Monitor" 

under "Tires" in Section 4 for 


• SERVICE TRANSMISSION 


with the transmission. 


• SERVICE VEHICLE SOON 

Appears when a non-emissions 

related malfunction occurs. 

Have the vehicle serviced as 


• SPEED LIMITED TO XXX KM/H 

Appears when the vehicle is 

limiting speed because there is 

a problem in the steering or 

suspension systems. Take your 

vehicle in for service. 

– 

67 . . .



• STABILITY SYS ACTIVE 

Appears if the vehicle begins to 

go in a direction other than 

that intended by the driver and 

the Stabilitrak system activates. 

Adjustments are automatically 

made to try to regain 

control of the vehicle. 

Slippery road conditions may 

exist. 

Adjust your driving 

accordingly. 

The message may stay on for a 

few seconds after Stabilitrak ® 

has stopped assisting with 

directional control of the vehicle. 




• STABILITY SYS NOT READY 

Appears if the Stabilitrak system 

is not ready. 

- The sensors may need to be 

centered. 

To center the sensors, drive 

the vehicle in a straight line. 

- This message will also come 

on while the Stabilitrak system 

warms up. 

When the system is ready, the 

STABILITY SYS READY message 

will appear. 



• STABILITY SYS OFF 

Appears when the traction control 

and Stabilitrak systems are 

turned off. Adjust your driving 

accordingly. 



• STABILITY SYS READY 

Appears when the stability system 

is turned on using the traction 

on/off button and the 

system is ready to activate if 

needed. 



. . . 68


Section 1 

• STARTING DISABLED THEFT 

PROBLEM 


with the theft deterrent system. 


• STARTING DISABLED THROT- 

TLE PROBLEM 


with the throttle system. 

Have your vehicle serviced. 

– 

• THEFT ATTEMPTED 

Appears if the theft system has 

detected a break-in attempt 

while you were away from the 

vehicle. 

69 . . .



• TRACTION ACTIVE 

Appears when the Traction 

Control system is limiting 

wheel spin. Slippery road conditions 

may exist, so adjust 

your driving accordingly. 


later in this section for more 

information. 

• TRANS HOT IDLE ENGINE 

Appears if the transmission 

fluid is too hot. Stop and idle 

the engine until the transmission 

cools or the message is 

removed. 

NOTICE 

Continuing to drive your vehicle 

with overheated transmission 

fluid can result in severe 

transmission damage. 

The repairs would not be 

covered by your warranty. 

If you get an overheat warning, 

stop as soon as possible. 

• TRUNK OPEN 

Appears when the trunk is 

open. 

• TURN SIGNAL ON 

Appears to remind you that the 

turn signal is on after approximately 

1.6 km (1 mile). 

A multiple chime will also 

sound. 

. . . 70


Section 1 

Other Miscellaneous Messages 

• ACCESSORY ACTIVE 

See "Keyless Ignition" in Section 

3 for more information. 

• DISABLE INTRUSION SYS? 



• INTRUSION SYS OFF 



• INTRUSION SYS READY 



• KNOWN FOB 

• MAX # FOBS LEARNED 

• OFF/ACC TO LEARN 

• READY FOR FOB X 

• SHIFT TO PARK 



• WAIT XX MIN 

– 

71 . . .



HEAD-UP DISPLAY (IF 

EQUIPPED) 

CAUTION 

Make sure the head-up display 

image is not too bright or too 

high in your field of view. 

The Head-Up Display allows you to 

see the speedometer through the 

windshield. It also shows: 

• the Turn Signal Indicator lights 

• the High-Beam Indicator 

symbol 

• the Check Gages icon 

• Radio features 

• the Adaptive Cruise Control 

display 

• the Forward Collision Alert System 

display 

• Automatic Transmission Driver- 

Controlled Shift Mode Display 

Make sure to continue scanning 

your displays, controls and driving 

environment just as you would if 

you didn't have a head-up display. 

Otherwise, you may overlook 

some important information or 

warnings. 

CHECK GAGES will appear on the 

display when there is an important 

warning condition. 

Check your Driver Information 

Center display for more information 

on your vehicle's systems. 

. . . 72


Section 1 

Head-Up Display Adjustment 

The head-up display controls are 

located to the left of the steering 

wheel. 

To adjust the display so you can 

see it properly: 

1. Adjust the driver's seat to the 

way you want it. 

2. Start the engine. 

3. To center the head-up display 

image in your field of view, 

press the top or bottom of the 

head-up display switch . 

The image can only be adjusted 

up and down, not side to 

side. 

A 

B 

4. The instrument light dimmer 

controls the brightness of 

the head-up display. 

Press lightly on the knob to 

make it spring out. 

Pull the knob until it is completely 

extended. 

Rotate the knob to the right to 

increase brightness or to the 

left to decrease brightness. 

The brightness of the display 

image is determined by the 

light conditions in front of the 

vehicle and also by where the 

head-up display is set. 




metric units. 


earlier in this section for 

information. 

– 

73 . . .



If the head-up display does not 

come on, check to see if: 

• something is covering the 

head-up display unit 

• the dimmer control is adjusted 

properly 

• the image is adjusted to the 

proper height 

• ambient light in front of the 

vehicle is low 

• the fuse in the fuse panel is 

blown 

See "Fuses and Circuit Breakers" 

in Section 4 for additional 

information. 

If the vehicle is facing a dark object 

or a heavily shaded area, the headup 

display may anticipate entering 

a dark area and may begin to dim. 

It is possible for sunlight to enter 

the head-up display, causing all of 

the graphics to light up. The 

display will return to normal when 

the sunlight is no longer entering 

the head-up display. 

Wearing polarized sunglasses 

could make the head-up display 

image more difficult to see. 

To turn the head-up display off, 

use the instrument light dimmer 

: 

1. Press lightly on the knob to 

make it spring out. 

2. Pull the knob until it is completely 

extended. 

3. Rotate the knob all the way to 

the left. 

B 

. . . 74


Section 1 

NOTICE 

Keep the inside of the windshield 

clean to maintain the 

sharpness and clarity of the 

display image. 

To clean the head-up display 

lens, spray glass cleaner on a 

soft, clean cloth and wipe the 

lens gently. Do not spray cleaner 

directly on the lens. 

Be careful not to scratch the 

head-up display or camera lenses 

when cleaning. 

Your windshield is part of the 

head-up display system. If the 

windshield must be replaced, 

be sure to get one that is 

compatible with this system. 

Head-Up Display Adaptive 

Cruise Control Message 

The following message may 

appear in the head-up display: 

• PEDAL APPLIED ACC 

OVERRIDE 

This message indicates that you 

are overriding the adaptive 

cruise control system by pressing 

the accelerator pedal. 

Adaptive cruise control will not 

automatically apply the brakes. 

When you take your foot off 

the pedal, the vehicle will go 

back down to your previously 

chosen cruise control speed 

and the adaptive cruise control 

system will return to normal 

operation. 

The following adaptive cruise 

control symbols may also appear 

in the head-up display: 

• "adaptive cruise control active" 

symbol 

• "alert" symbol 

• "vehicle ahead" symbol 

See "Adaptive Cruise Control" later 


information. 

– 

75 . . .



LIGHTS 

The exterior light controls are on 

the multifunction lever. 

The instrument light dimmer is on 

the instrument panel. 

See "Lights" and "Multifunction 

Lever" later in this section for more 

information. 

HEATING AND AIR 

CONDITIONING SYSTEM 

Your vehicle is equipped with a 

heating and air conditioning 

system. See "Heating and Air 

Conditioning" later in this section 

for more information on how to 

operate the system. 

SOUND SYSTEM AND 

CLOCK 

See "Sound System and Clock", 

later in this section, to find out 

how to operate your vehicle's 

radio. 

NAVIGATION SYSTEM (IF 

EQUIPPED) 

See "Navigation System" later in 

this section and see the separate 

navigation system manual for 

information. 

HOOD RELEASE 

Use the hood release handle, 

located near the driver's door, to 

open the hood. See Section 4 for 


. . . 76


Section 1 

PARKING BRAKE 

See "Parking Brake" in Section 3 for 

information on how to properly 

set and release the parking brake. 

KEYLESS IGNITION 

See Section 3 for information. 

GEAR SHIFT LEVER 

The shift lever is located on the 

center console. 

See "Automatic Transmission" in 

Section 3 for information. 

– 

HAZARD WARNING 

FLASHER 

Use hazard warning flashers to 

warn others of emergency conditions 

or when your vehicle is in a 

traffic hazard. 

The hazard warning flasher control 

is located on the center console. 

Press the flasher button in to make 

your front and rear turn signal 

lights flash on and off. 

77 . . .



B 

A 

To secure your vehicle even more 

while this feature is on, lock the 

glove box with your key. 

Press to turn the valet lockout 

off and re-enable these features. 

To turn off the flashers, press the 

button again. 

When the flasher is on, the function 

of the turn signal lever is 

cancelled. 

VALET LOCKOUT SWITCH 

This on/off switch is located inside 

the glove box. 

Press to turn on the valet lockout 

and disable the following 

features: 

• the remote keyless access transmitter's 

trunk release button 

• the trunk release button 

located on the driver's door 

• the vehicle remote-start feature 

. . . 78


Section 1 

■ TRACTION CONTROL 

SYSTEM 

This system automatically limits 

wheel spin under slippery road 

conditions. 

On vehicles with rear-wheel drive, 

when the system senses that one 

or both of the rear wheels are spinning 

or beginning to lose traction, 

it selectively applies the brakes 

and/or reduces engine power to 

limit wheel spin. 

On vehicles with all-wheel drive, 

when the system senses that any 

of the wheels are spinning or 

beginning to lose traction, it selectively 

applies the brakes and/or 

reduces engine power to limit 

wheel spin. 

You may feel or hear the system 

working, but this is normal. 

The system comes on automatically 

when you start the engine. 

To help limit wheel spin, you 

should always leave this system 

on. 

However, you can turn this system 

off if you need to. 

The button is on the center 

console. 

NOTE: 

Turning the traction control 

system off on some surfaces, 

such as deep snow and loose 

gravel, will assist vehicle 

motion at lower speeds. 

– 

79 . . .



NOTICE 

Make sure to turn the system off 

if the vehicle is stuck in mud, 

sand or snow. 

See "If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck" 

in Section 5. 

Press the TC button to turn the 

system off. The traction system 

malfunction light will come on 

when the system is turned off. 

When this warning light is on, the 

traction control system will not 

limit wheel spin. 

Adjust your driving accordingly. 

NOTICE 

Do not brake repeatedly or 

accelerate heavily when the 

traction control system is off to 

avoid damaging the driveline. 

Press the button again to turn the 

system back on. 

If the system is on and the light 

comes on and stays on, then the 

system is not working, and you 

should have it fixed. 

See "Traction System Malfunction 

Light" under "Warning Lights" 

earlier in this section for more 

information. 

. . . 80


Section 1 

NOTE: 

• The traction control button is 

also used to control the Stabilitrak 

system. 



• All-Wheel Drive Vehicles and 

STS-V Models 

You may still feel the traction 

control system working even 

after it has been turned off. 


• Adding accessories to your 

vehicle can affect your vehicle's 

performance and safety. 

See "Accessories and Modifications" 


■ COMPETITIVE 

DRIVING MODE (STS-V 

MODEL ONLY) 

The competitive driving mode 

allows the driver to have full 

control of the rear wheels while 

the Stabilitrak ® system helps steer 

the vehicle using selective brake 

application. 

Racing or other competitive driving 

may affect the warranty coverage 

of the vehicle. 

See "Engine Oil" in Section 4 for 


To activate this mode, press the 

traction control button on the 

center console twice quickly. 

The COMPETITIVE DRIVING 


Information Center display. 

The Traction Control System will 

be turned off. 

– 

81 . . .



The Traction Control System Light 

will come on to remind you that 

the system is off. 



system back on. 

■ STABILITRAK ® SYSTEM 

This system selectively applies any 

one of the brakes to help maintain 

directional control in difficult driving 

conditions. 

When the system senses that there 

is a discrepancy between the 

intended path and the direction 

the vehicle is travelling, it selectively 

applies the brakes to help 

steer the vehicle. 

The system comes on automatically 

when you start the engine. 

If the vehicle begins to go in a 

direction other than that intended 

by the driver and the Stabilitrak 

system activates, the STABILITY 

SYS ACTIVE message will appear. 


Messages" earlier in this section for 


When this message appears, 

continue to steer in the direction 

you want to go. 

You may feel or hear the system 

working, but this is normal. 

To help maintain directional 

control of your vehicle, you should 

always leave this system on. 

However, you can turn this system 

off if you need to. 

. . . 82


Section 1 


console. 

Press the TC button to turn the 

system off. The traction system 

malfunction light will come on 

when the system is turned off. 

The Traction Control System will 

also be turned off. 

The STABILITY SYS OFF will 

appear on the Driver Information 

Center. See "Driver Information 

Center Messages" earlier in this 



systems back on. 

SERVICE STABILITY SYS will 


Center if your stability enhancement 

system is malfunctioning. 





the system is not operational and 

you should adjust your driving 

accordingly. 

NOTE: 

If your vehicle is in cruise 

control when the Stabilitrak 

system activates, the cruise 

control will automatically 

disengage. 

Once conditions are back to 

normal, you may turn the cruise 

control back on. 



– 

83 . . .



■ ACCESSORY POWER 

OUTLETS 

Outlets can be used to plug in 

electrical equipment such as a 

cellular telephone, CB radio, etc. 

Power outlets may be found in the 

following locations: 

• in front of the center console 

• inside the center console 

• on the rear of the center console 

(if equipped) 

To use an outlet, remove the cap. 

When not in use, always cover the 

outlets with the protective caps (if 

equipped). 

NOTICE 

Maximum load of any electrical 

equipment should not exceed 

20 amps. 

Leaving electrical equipment 

on for extended periods of time 

can drain your battery. 

Always turn off any electrical 

equipment that is not in use. 

NOTICE 

Adding some electrical equipment 

to your vehicle can 

damage it or keep other things 

from working properly. This 

damage wouldn't be covered 

by your warranty. Check with 

your dealer before adding electrical 

equipment. 

When adding electrical equipment, 

be sure to follow the 

proper installation instructions 

included with the equipment. 

. . . 84


Section 1 

Certain accessory power plugs 

may not be compatible with the 

power outlets in your vehicle. Use 

of such plugs may result in blown 

vehicle or adapter fuses. If you 

experience a problem, see your 

dealer for more information on the 

accessory power outlets. 

NOTICE 

Power outlets are designed for 

accessory plugs only. Do not 

hang any type of accessory or 

bracket from the plug. Improper 

use of the power outlet may 

result in damage not covered 

by your warranty. 

■ LIGHTS 

LIGHTS MAIN SWITCH 

The main light switch controls 

these light systems: 

• Headlights 

• Taillights 

• Parking lights 

– 

• License lights 

• Sidemarker lights 

85 . . .



A 

Rotate the band to to turn on 

your parking and other operating 

lights. The headlights will not 

come on. 

Rotate the band to to turn on 

your headlights. The parking and 

other operating lights will also 

come on. 

B 

C 

To change the lights from low 

beams to high beams, push the 

multifunction lever toward the 

front of the vehicle. To change the 

lights back to low beams, pull the 

lever back toward you. When the 

high beams are on, an indicator 

light on the instrument cluster will 

also be on. 

You can also flash your high beams 

to signal other drivers when the 

headlights are either off, in low 

beam or in daytime running light 

mode (if equipped). 

To use it, pull the multi-function 

lever toward you and release it. 

If the headlights are in high beam 

mode, they will switch to low 

beam. Push the lever away from 

you to turn the high beams back 

on. 

If you turn off the vehicle with the 

high beams on, the low beams will 

be on the next time the vehicle is 

started. 

Rotate the band to AUTO to activate 

the automatic headlight 

system. 

When activated, this automatic 

headlight feature turns your headlights 

and other operating lights 

on and off by sensing how dark it 

is outside. 

. . . 86


Section 1 

Rotate the band to to turn off 

the exterior lights and automatic 

lighting features. 

The band will not stay in the off 

position. It will bounce back to 

AUTO. 

To turn the automatic headlight 

system back on, rotate the band to 

the off position again, then release 

it. 

See "Automatic Headlight System" 


information. 

C 

Note: 

The headlights are protected by 

fuses in the fuse block. If there is 

an electrical overload, the headlights 

will flicker on and off. 

Have the headlight wiring 

checked right away. 

Lights On Reminder 

If you open the driver's door while 

the lights' manual control is in 

or and the ignition is off, you 

will hear a warning chime. 

A warning light will also appear on 

the instrument cluster. 

See the following, earlier in this 


• Lights On Reminder Light 

– 

87 . . .



Automatic Headlight 

System 

When activated, this automatic 

headlight feature turns your headlights 

and other operating lights 

on and off by sensing how dark it 

is outside. 

In order for this feature to work 

properly, be sure not to cover the 

light sensor on the top of the 

instrument panel. 

Rotate the band to AUTO to activate 

this system. 

The following message will appear 

in the Driver Information Center 

display: 

• AUTOMATIC LIGHTS ON 

If the band is already in the AUTO 

position when you start your vehicle, 

the automatic headlight 

system is automatically enabled. 

If it is dark outside, your vehicle's 

headlights and operating lights 

will turn on automatically. 

Once it is bright enough outside, 

the headlights and operating 

lights will automatically turn back 


The lights may also turn on when 

you drive through a low-light area. 

Once you leave the low-light area, 

it may take about one minute 

before the automatic headlights 

turn off. During this brief delay, 

the instrument cluster may not be 

as bright as usual. Make sure the 

instrument light dimmer is set to 

full brightness. See "Instrument 

Light Dimmer" later in this section. 

To temporarily disable the automatic 

headlight system, rotate the 

band to the off position. 

The band will not stay in the off 

position. It will bounce back to 

AUTO. 



display: 

• AUTOMATIC LIGHTS OFF 

. . . 88


Section 1 

To turn the automatic headlight 

system back on, rotate the band to 

the off position again, then release 

it. 

If the automatic headlight system 

has the headlights turned on and 

you turn the ignition off, the exterior 

lights will stay on for a period 

of delayed illumination while you 

leave the vicinity of the vehicle. 


information: 

• Vehicle Programming and Personalization 

Features 

Wiper Activated Headlights 

If the automatic lights control is 

on, the headlights and parking 

lights will automatically come on 

when the windshield wipers have 

been in use for about six seconds. 

The headlights will go off immediately 

if the ignition is turned off or 

after the wipers have been turned 


Headlight Washers 

To wash your headlights, activate 

the windshield washer while the 

headlights are on. 

The windshield and headlights will 

be washed. 

After the first cycle, the headlight 

washers will cycle once every fifth 

time the windshield washer is 

activated. 

If the washer fluid is low, the headlight 

washers will not work. 

See "Windshield Washer Fluid" in 


– 

89 . . .



Headlight Leveling Control 

The headlight leveling is 

controlled automatically, depending 

on the load the vehicle is 

carrying. 

Laws in some regions may require 

that the headlights be on when 

using the fog lights. 

When the fog lights are on, the 

Fog Lamp Light on the instrument 

cluster will also be on. 

Fog Lights 

Use fog lights for better vision in 

foggy or misty conditions. 

Rotate the band up to align the 

front fog light symbol with the 

dot and then release it to turn your 

fog lights on and off. 

The band returns to its original 

position when released. 

Your vehicle's parking lights must 

be on in order for the fog lights to 

operate. 

. . . 90


Section 1 

Do not use the fog lights when 

visibility is good because it may 

bother other drivers. It is also not 

recommended that rear fog lights 

be used in city driving. Rear fog 

lights should only be used in foggy 

or misty conditions to allow the 

drivers behind you to see your 

vehicle. 

– 

Rear Fog Lights 

Rotate the band down to align the 

rear fog light symbol with the 

dot and then release it to turn your 

rear fog lights on and off. 

The band returns to its original 

position when released. 

The rear fog lights only operate if 

the headlights are on. 

INTERIOR LIGHTS 

Instrument Light Dimmer 

The instrument light dimmer 

controls the brightness of the 

instrument panel lights. 

The knob is located on the instrument 

panel near the steering 

wheel. 

Press lightly on the knob to make 

it spring out. 

91 . . .



Then, rotate the knob to the right 

to increase brightness and to the 

left to decrease brightness. Rotate 

the knob all the way to the right to 

turn on the interior lights. 

If the parking lights are on when it 

is dark outside, make sure the 

instrument panel brightness is set 

high enough that you are able to 

see all instrument panel readouts 

clearly. 

If the low beam headlights are 

turned on when it is light outside, 

the interior lights will not dim. 

That way, the driver will still be 

able to clearly see all instrument 

panel readouts and radio and 

climate control displays. 

Illuminated Entry System 

The interior lights will come on for 

a while when you open any door 

or press the unlock button on the 

keyless access transmitter while it 

is dark outside. 

If the doors are unlocked using the 

keyless access transmitter, the 

lights will stay on for about 25 

seconds. 

To turn the lights off quickly, lock 

the doors using the power door 

locks or turn on the ignition. 

Otherwise, the lights should turn 

off about 25 seconds after all the 

doors are closed. 

Reading Lights 

Your vehicle may have reading 

lights. 

These lights turn on whenever a 

door is opened or unlocked while 

it is dark outside. 

Each reading light has an on/off 

switch next to it. 

To turn a reading light on or off, 

press the on/off switch. 

If the lights are left on, they will 

turn off automatically ten minutes 

after the ignition is turned off. 

. . . 92


Section 1 

Battery Saver 

Exterior Lights 

If the manual light control is left on 

when the ignition is turned off, the 

exterior lights will turn off automatically 

after 10 minutes to keep 

your battery from draining. 

If the lights were left on intentionally, 

turn the manual light control 

off then back on to reactivate the 

exterior lights. 

Interior Lights 

Power to the interior lights and 

accessories is automatically turned 

off 10 minutes after the ignition is 

turned off. 

If the odometer on a new car 

shows fewer than 25 km (16 

miles), the interior lights will turn 

off after only three minutes. 

To restore power for an additional 

10 minutes, open any door or the 

trunk or turn the courtesy lights on 

by using the switch. 

■ HEATING AND AIR 

CONDITIONING SYSTEM 

For your comfort, your vehicle can 

be programmed to automatically 

activate certain climate control 

functions when you use the vehicle's 

remote-starter. 


information: 


Features 

– 

93 . . .



Dual Zone Climate Control 

System 

The following pages describe how 

to operate your dual zone climate 

control system. 

This electronic, automatic air 

conditioning system allows the 

driver and the front seat passenger 

to independently select desired air 

temperatures. 




metric units. 

I E F I 

A H C G D H B 



information. 

Power Control 

Press the knob to turn the 

system on or off. 

. . . 94


Section 1 

AUTOMATIC MODE 

In automatic mode, all you have to 

do is select a desired temperature 

setting. 

The system will automatically 

control the inside temperature, air 

delivery mode and the fan speed 

to achieve your set temperature as 

quickly as possible. 

The air conditioning compressor 

and the recirculation mode will 

turn on as needed. 

Press AUTO to activate the automatic 

mode. 

Note: 

When full automatic operation 

is active, the word AUTO 

appears under the fan and air 

delivery mode icons on the 

display. 

Adjust the temperature to a 

comfortable setting. See "Temperature 

Control" later in this section. 

In cold weather, the system will 

start at a reduced fan speed to 

avoid blowing cold air into the 

vehicle. 

It may take from 10 to 20 minutes 

for the system to regulate. 

Readjust the temperature as 

needed. 

In order for the automatic climate 

control system to work properly, 

be sure not to cover the sensors. 

See "Sensors" later in this section. 

– 

95 . . .



TEMPERATURE CONTROL 

Driver Temperature Control 

Rotate the driver's side knob to 

choose the temperature you want 

inside the vehicle. 

Rotate the knob clockwise to 

increase or counterclockwise to 

decrease the temperature. 

If you would like to use the climate 

control system's automatic operation 

you should adjust the temperature 

to a comfortable setting, 

usually between 21°C (70°F) and 

27°C (80°F). 

Choosing the warmest or coldest 

temperature setting will not cause 

the system to heat or cool any 

faster. 

Passenger Temperature Control 

Press to turn the passenger's 

temperature control on and off. 

Rotate the knob clockwise to 

increase or counterclockwise to 

decrease the temperature for the 

front passenger zone. 

If the passenger temperature 

control is not activated, then the 

driver temperature control regulates 

the temperature for the entire 

vehicle. 

MANUAL MODE 

Fan Speed Selector 

Use to manually control the fan 

speed. Press the top part of the 

switch to increase fan speed and 

the bottom part of the switch to 

decrease fan speed. 

If there is a reduction in the airflow 

coming through your climate 

control system, the filter may need 

to be replaced. See "Passenger 

Compartment Air Filter" in Section 


. . . 96


Section 1 

Air Outlet Selector 

Press the up or down arrow on 

switch to stop the automatic 

operation and to manually select 

one of the modes controlling the 

direction of airflow. The display 

shows the selected mode. 

This mode directs airflow 

through the instrument 

panel outlets. 

I E F I 

– 

A H C G D H B 

The blending mode directs 

airflow through both the 

instrument panel outlets 

and the floor outlets. The 

air coming from the floor 

outlets will be warmer than 

the air coming from the instrument 

panel outlets. 

The heater mode directs 

most of the airflow through 

the floor outlets, with some 

air going to the windshield 

and side window defroster 

vents. 

97 . . .



The heating/defogging 

mode divides airflow between 

the windshield defroster 

vents, the floor 

outlets and the side window 

defroster vents. 

Use this mode to remove 

fog from the windshield or 

side windows while also 

heating the vehicle. 

The A/C compressor will 

operate in this mode if the 

outside temperature is 

above 0°C (32°F). 

If the heating/defogging 

mode is selected while the 

recirculation feature is on, 

the recirculation feature 

will automatically turn off. 

If the recirculation button is 

pressed while the heating/ 

defogging mode is active, 

the recirculation feature 

will run for ten minutes and 

turn off automatically. 

Some air will continue to flow 

through the outboard instrument 

panel outlets no matter which 

mode is chosen. If you do not 

want air to flow from these outlets, 

close the outlets. 

See "Air Outlets" later in this 

section. 

Recirculation 

Press the recirculation button to 

recirculate the air in your vehicle. 

This is useful for keeping dust and 

odors out or when quick cooling is 

desired. 

This function will not work in 

conjunction with a defrosting 

mode. 

If the heating/defogging mode is 

selected while the recirculation 

feature is on, the recirculation 

feature will automatically turn off. 

. . . 98


Section 1 

If the recirculation button is 

pressed while the heating/defogging 

mode is active, the recirculation 

feature will run for ten 

minutes and turn off 

automatically. 

If the recirculation feature is used 

for a long period of time, the air in 

the vehicle may become too dry. 

Press again to turn off the recirculation 

feature and circulate 

outside air into your vehicle. 

Air Conditioning Mode 

The air conditioning compressor 

cools and dehumidifies the air 


Press to manually turn off the air 

conditioning compressor. 

Press again or press AUTO to 

return to automatic operation. 

The compressor cannot be turned 

off while the system is in defrost 

mode. 

Defrosting 

Press to get fog or ice off the 

windshield and side windows. 

Most of the air is directed through 

the windshield defroster outlets, 

with a small amount directed 

through the side window defogger 

outlets. 

The fan speed and temperature 

may increase. 

The A/C compressor will operate 

in this mode if the outside temperature 

is above 0°C (32°F). 

The recirculation function cannot 

be activated in this mode. 

Press the button again to turn this 

feature off. 

– 

99 . . .



Heated Seats (If equipped) 

Your vehicle may be equipped 

with heated seats. 

Use to control this feature. 

The switch closest to the driver is 

for the driver's seat. 

The switch closest to the front 

passenger is for the passenger's 

seat. 

See "Seat Controls" in Section 2 for 


Ventilated Seats (If equipped) 


with ventilated seats. 

Use to control this feature. 

The switch closest to the driver is 

for the driver's seat. 

I 

E F I 

A H C G D H B 

The switch closest to the front 

passenger is for the passenger's 

seat. 

See "Seat Controls" in Section 2 for 


. . . 100


Section 1 

Sensors 

The climate control system uses 

the information from the sensors 

to adjust the temperature, fan 

speed and air delivery mode 


The system may also deliver cooler 

air to the side of the vehicle facing 

the sun. 

In order for the automatic climate 

control system to work properly, 

be sure not to cover the sensors. 

Solar Sensor 

The sensor is located on top of the 

instrument panel. 

Temperature Sensor 

The inside temperature sensor is 

located on the instrument panel, 

next to the steering wheel. 

– 

101 . . .



Air Outlets 

Move the lever on the outlets to 

direct airflow up, down, right or 

left. 

To control the amount of airflow 

through an outlet, rotate the 

thumbwheel below the outlet 

right or left. 

To close an outlet, rotate the 

thumbwheel toward the center 

console. 

Operating Tips 

Keep the hood and front air inlet 

free of ice, snow, leaves or any 

other obstruction. 

Only use GM-approved hood 

deflectors on your vehicle. 

Keep the area under the front seats 

clear of objects to help air circulate 

through the vehicle. 



control system, the filter may need 

to be replaced. See "Passenger 

Compartment Air Filter" in Section 


Rear Window Defogger 

The engine must be running in 

order for this feature to work. 

For best results, clear the window 

of as much ice or snow as possible 

before using the rear window 

defogger. 

. . . 102


Section 1 

Press this button to defog your 

rear window. The defogger turns 

off by itself after 10 minutes if your 

vehicle is travelling under 48 km/h 

(30 mph). If your speed is over 48 

km/h (30 mph), then the rear 

defogger will run continuously. 

You can also turn the defogger off 

by turning off the ignition or pressing 

the button again. 

If the defogger is reactivated 

immediately after completion of 

the initial ten minute cycle, it will 

only run for five minutes at a time. 

To turn it off sooner, press the 

button again. 

The outside mirrors are heated 

every time the rear defogger is 

activated. 

NOTICE 

Do not attach a temporary vehicle 

license, tape or decals across 

the defogger grid on the rear 

window. 

Don't use a razor blade or 

anything else that is sharp on 

the inside of the rear window. 

You could cut or damage the 

warming grid. 





activate the rear window defogger 

when you use the vehicle's 

remote-starter. 


information: 


Features 

– 

103 . . .



E F D A B C 

Rear Climate Control 


rear climate control system. 

The upper outlets are located on 

the rear of the center console. 

The lower outlets are located 

below the front seats. 

If your vehicle does not have a rear 

climate control system control 

panel on the rear of the center 

console, then the temperature, air 

delivery mode and the fan speed 

are controlled automatically by the 

front, main climate control system. 

If your vehicle does have a rear 

climate control system control 

panel on the rear of the center 

console, then the rear seat passengers 

may independently select 

desired climate control settings. 

The left knob controls the 

temperature. 

Turn the rear temperature knob 

clockwise for warmer air or counterclockwise 

for cooler air. 

The right knob controls the air 

delivery mode. 

Use to direct rear airflow 

through the center console 

outlets. This air delivery mode is 

recommended for cooling the 

vehicle. 


through the center console outlets 

and through the floor outlets. 

. . . 104


Section 1 


through the floor outlets. This air 

delivery mode is recommended 

for heating the vehicle. 

Turn the right knob to to stop 

all airflow through the rear outlets. 

Otherwise, the amount of airflow 

through the rear outlets is 

controlled by the front climate 

control system settings. 

When the rear system's airflow is 

turned off, the airflow from the 

front system may sound louder 

than usual. This is normal. 

The rear climate controls are 

disabled any time the front 

system's defrost mode is activated. 

Heated Rear Seats (If equipped) 

Use to control the heated seat 

feature for the left rear passenger 

position. 


feature for the right rear passenger 

position. 

See "Heated Rear Seats" under 

"Seat Controls" in Section 2 for 


Passenger Compartment 

Air Filter 


passenger compartment air filter 

which filters outside air entering 

the vehicle. 

Change the filter at the intervals 

recommended in your Maintenance 

Schedule. 



control system, the filter may 

require early replacement. 

See "Passenger Compartment Air 

Filter" in Section 4 for more 

information. 

– 

105 . . .



■ SOUND SYSTEM AND 

CLOCK 

CAUTION 

Avoid or minimize any sound 

system or navigation system 

activities while operating your 

vehicle. 

You could lose control of the 

vehicle and you or others may 

be injured. 

The driver's full attention is 

always required while driving. 

NOTICE 

Added sound equipment - such 

as an audio system, a CD player, 

a CB radio, mobile telephone 

or two-way radio - may 

interfere with the operation of 

your vehicle's engine, radio or 

other systems, and even 

damage them. Check with your 

dealer. 

See your dealer before adding 

any equipment. 

Also check applicable rules 

covering mobile radio and telephone 

units. 

NOTICE 

Cellular phone usage may 

cause interference with your 

vehicle's radio. This interference 

may occur when making or 

receiving phone calls, charging 

the phone's battery or simply 

when the phone is on. This 

interference is described as an 

increased level of static while 

listening to the radio. If you 

notice static while listening to 

the radio, unplug the cellular 

phone and turn it off. 

. . . 106


Section 1 

NOTICE (Continued) 

Radio frequency interference 

may be caused by equipment 

(cell phone chargers, vehicle 

convenience accessories, or 

external electronic devices) 

plugged into the accessory 

power outlet. This interference 

is described as an increased 

level of static while listening to 

the radio. 

If you notice interference or 

static, unplug the device from 

the accessory power outlet. 

If your vehicle is equipped with a 

navigation system, then the radio 

is integrated into that system's 

control panel. See the separate 

manual for the navigation system 

and its radio for further 

information. 

Otherwise, your vehicle is 

equipped with the following 

sound system: 

• RDS Sound System with 6-Disc 

CD Player 

In order for this feature to work, 

the ignition must be on or 

Retained Accessory Power must be 

active. 

While your vehicle is parked, take 

the time to familiarize yourself 

with the system controls and operation, 

and to set up various 

features. 

That way, you will be able to use 

the system with less effort and less 

distraction from the road. 

CAUTION 

Giving extended attention to 

entertainment tasks while driving 

will greatly increase the risk 

of a collision that may cause 

personal injury or death. 

Road safety has absolute priority. 

Only operate this system if 

the road and traffic conditions 

allow you to do so. The driver's 

full attention is always required 

while driving. 

– 

107 . . .



RDS SOUND SYSTEM WITH 

6-DISC CD PLAYER 

The following pages describe the 

sound system in your vehicle, and 

how to get the best performance 

from it. 

The displays shown in this manual 

are typical. The actual displays in 

your vehicle may vary depending 

on the particular options included 

in your vehicle and on the 

language to which the system is 

set. 

Your vehicle is equipped with an 

RDS radio. RDS stands for Radio 

Data System, which encodes information 

on the radio's FM 

frequency. 

RDS features are only available for 

use on FM stations which broadcast 

RDS information. 

. . . 108


Section 1 

Setting the Clock and Date 

BASE SOUND SYSTEM 


digital clock located in the sound 

system display. 

To set the clock, use the 

knob. 

1. Press the knob to access 

the main menu. 

2. Turn the tune/select knob 

until SET CLOCK appears on 

the display. 

3. Press the knob to select 

this option. 

4. Rotate the knob to adjust 

the time. 

5. Press the knob to update 

the time. 

VEHICLE TIME UPDATED will 

appear on the display. 

The time and date will always 


To set the date, use the 

knob. 



2. Turn the knob until SET 

DATE appears on the display. 


this option. 


the date. 

5. Press the knob to update 

the date. 

VEHICLE DATE UPDATED will 


The time and date will always 


– 

109 . . .



NAVIGATION/SOUND SYSTEM 

If your vehicle is equipped with the 

navigation system, see the separate 

navigation system manual to 

find out how to set the clock. 

Radio Controls 

Power Control 

Press lightly on the knob to turn 

the system on. Press it again to 

turn the system off. 

Volume Control 


increase the volume and to the left 

to decrease the volume. 

Source Selection 

Press SRCE to select a source, 

either the radio or compact disc 

player. 

The audio source must be loaded 

to play. 

When the radio is on and the disc 

player is loaded with a disc, the 

display will show CD. 

If a disc is not loaded, the display 

will not change from the radio 

source. 

. . . 110


Section 1 

Band Selection 

Press BAND to select AM, FM1 or 

FM2. 

Tuning 


go to a higher station and to the 

left to go to a lower station. 

Station Seeking 

Press the | button and the radio 

will go to the next higher station 

and stay there. Press the | button 

to go to the previous station and 

stay there. 

The sound will mute while 

seeking. 

The radio will only seek to stations 

that are in the selected band. 

The radio will not stop on stations 

with weak reception. 

Station Scanning 

Press the | | button to enter 

scan mode. 

SCAN will appear on the display. 

The radio will find the next station 

and stay there for a few seconds. 

Then it will go to the next station 

and pause, and keep doing that. 

Press the button again when you 

want to stop scanning. 

The radio will only scan to stations 

that are in the selected band. 



– 

111 . . .



Preset Station Scanning 

Press and hold the | | button 

until you hear a beep and PSCAN 

appears on the display to sample 

all the stations that are pre-set on 

your radio's push-buttons. Press 

the button again to stop this 

function. 

The preset scan will only scan the 

presets that are in the selected 

band. 



Local/Distance Station Selection 

With this feature, you can set the 

radio to search for local stations 

only or for stations within a broader 

area if you would prefer a larger 

selection of stations. 

To set this feature to LOCAL or 

DISTANT, use the knob. 



Then, turn the knob until 

SEEK LOCAL or SEEK DIS- 

TANT appears on the display. 

2. Press the knob to toggle 

between the two choices. 

. . . 112


Section 1 

3. Press the F6 (back) button to 

exit the display. 

To return to the original display, 

press the F6 (back) button 

repeatedly or just wait for 

the display to time out. 

To search for stations, use either 

the | or | button. 

If the system is set to LOCAL, SEEK 

will appear on the display. 

If the system is set to DISTANT, D- 

SEEK will appear on the display. 

Presetting Stations Manually 

The station preset push-buttons let 

you choose and set favorite 

stations. Each of the push-buttons 

can be set to program one AM, 

one FM1 and one FM2 station. 

1. Press BAND to select AM, FM1 

or FM2. 

2. Tune in the station. 

3. Press and hold one of the 

push-buttons until you hear a 

beep. Whenever you push 

that button again, the preset 

station will return. 

The station number will appear 

on the display above the 

pushbutton. 

4. Repeat these steps for each 

push-button. 

To store an equalization setting or 

a program type setting for your 

preset stations, see each of these 

features later in this section. 

When battery power is removed 

and later applied, you will not 

have to reset your radio preset 

stations because the audio system 

remembers them. 

– 

113 . . .



Presetting Stations 

Automatically 

The station preset push-buttons let 

you choose and set favorite 

stations. Each of the push-buttons 

can be set to program one AM, 

one FM1 and one FM2 station. 

The push-buttons can be 

programmed manually or 


To program the push-buttons 

manually, see "Presetting Stations 

Manually" earlier in this section. 

To program the push-buttons 

automatically: 

1. Press BAND to select AM, FM1 

or FM2. 




AUTOSTORE PRESETS appears 

on the display. 


this option. 

AUTOSTORE will appear on 

the display. 

The radio will automatically 

search the band and store the 

six radio stations with the 

strongest reception. 

The stations will be stored to 

the push-buttons according to 

frequency strength. 

The station number will appear 

on the display above the 

pushbutton. 







When battery power is removed 

and later applied, you will not 

have to reset your radio preset 

stations because the audio system 

remembers them. 

. . . 114


Section 1 

Radio Home and Away Station 

Presets 

The system is equipped with a 

feature that allows you to program 

two sets of stations on the preset 

push-buttons. You can program 

one "home" set (radio stations that 

are within your normal operating 

range) and one "away" set (radio 

stations that are outside of your 

normal operating range). That 

way, you will not need to reprogram 

your presets every time you 

travel. 

To select home and away preset 

stations, do the following: 




PRESETS HOME/AWAY appears 



between the two choices. 

HOME or AWAY will appear 








To program the radio's pushbuttons 

for home and away 

presets, see "Presetting Stations 

Manually" or "Presetting Stations 

Automatically" earlier in this 

section. 

– 

115 . . .



Manual Tone Adjustment 

To adjust your bass, treble and 

midrange, do the following: 




BASS-MID-TREBLE appears 


2. Press the knob to scroll 

through the tone controls 

(bass, midrange or treble). 

3. Rotate the knob to 

increase or decrease the 

selected tone control. 

If a station is weak or noisy, 

you may want to lower the treble 

tone. 

4. Press the knob to set your 

adjustment. 







. . . 116


Section 1 

Equalization Settings 

This feature allows you to choose 

one of several preset bass, 

midrange and treble equalization 

settings that suit different kinds of 

music or radio stations. 

To choose an equalization setting: 




EQUALIZER appears on the 

display. 


this option. 

The equalization settings are 

set to the following: 

- EQ0: Normal 

- EQ1: Pop Music 

- EQ2: Rock Music 

- EQ3: Jazz Music 

- EQ4: Talk 

- EQ5: Country Music 

The equalization setting will 








Adjusting the Speakers 

To adjust the speaker balance or 

fade, do the following: 




BALANCE-FADER appears on 

the display. 


this option. 

3. Press the knob to scroll to 

BALANCE or FADER. 

Choosing BALANCE allows 

you to adjust the sound between 

the right and left speakers. 

Choosing FADER allows 

you to adjust the sound between 

the front and rear 

speakers. 

– 

117 . . .




the speaker balance or fade. 

5. Press the knob to set your 

adjustment. 







EQ0 will not appear on the display 

when in this mode. 

Error Messages 

If THEFTLOCK appears on the 

display, then the Theftlock ® 

system has locked up. See your 

dealer for service. 

RDS FEATURES AND CONTROLS 

The RDS feature: 

• allows you to seek only to stations 

with the types of programs 

you want to listen to. 

• interrupts the radio or CD to 

broadcast announcements 

concerning local and national 

emergencies. 

• allows you to seek to stations 

which broadcast traffic 

announcements. 

• allows you to receive and display 

messages from radio 

stations. 

. . . 118


Section 1 




In rare cases, a station may broadcast 

incorrect information that will 

cause the radio features to work 

improperly. If this happens, please 

contact the radio station. 

When you are tuned to an RDS 

station, the station name will 

appear on the display instead of 

the frequency. 

Most RDS stations provide their 

station name, the time and a 

program type for the current 

programming. 

Stations may also provide the 

name of the program being 

broadcast. 

Emergency Alerts 


interrupt the audio to bring you 

local or national emergency 

broadcasts. ALERT appears on the 

display. Emergency broadcasts 

cannot be turned off. 

The announcement is heard even 

if the volume is muted or a 

compact disc is playing. 

When the emergency broadcast is 

over, the radio will return to the 

volume setting and the station or 

compact disc you were listening to 

prior to the broadcast. 

Note: This feature is not supported 

by all RDS stations. 

Traffic Announcement 

The sound system is capable of 

interrupting the playback of the 

radio or compact disc to bring you 

a traffic announcement. 

TP will appear on the display when 

the radio detects a signal from an 

RDS station that has traffic 

announcement broadcast 

capability. 

– 

119 . . .



To turn this feature on or off, use 

the knob. 



2. Turn the knob until TRAF- 

FIC ANNOUNCE appears on 

the display. 


this feature on and off. 

An X will appear when this feature 

is turned on. 







If the traffic announcement (TA) 

feature is turned on and you are 

not tuned to a station that broadcasts 

traffic announcements, the 

radio will automatically seek to the 

next station that does. 

When the audio system finds a 

station which broadcasts traffic 

announcements, it will stop. 

TA will appear on the display. 

If no station is found, NO TRAFFIC 


If a traffic message is generated by 

the tuned station, the radio will 

interrupt your current listening 

mode to bring you the 

announcement. 

The announcement is heard even 

if a compact disc is playing. 

Text Messages 

Messages are additional text information 

that is being broadcast by 

a station. 

If the currently tuned RDS station 

has broadcast a message that has 

not yet been reviewed, then MSG 


. . . 120


Section 1 

To view the most recent message: 



2. Turn the knob until 

RECALL RDS MESSAGE 

appears on the display. 


this option. 

If the whole message does not 

appear on the display, parts of the 

message will appear every three 

seconds until the message is 

complete. 

Once the entire message has been 

displayed, MSG will disappear 

from the display until another new 

message is received. 

Program Type (PTY) 

This feature allows you to search 

for stations with specific program 

types. 

The selectable program types are: 

POP, EASY (easy listening), TALK, 

CNTRY (country music), CLASS 

(classical music) and JAZZ. 


the knob. 



2. Turn the knob until PRO- 

GRAM TYPE MODE appears 



this feature on and off. 


is turned on. 







– 

121 . . .



Once the program type feature is 

turned on, a selectable program 

type name will appear on the 

display above each push-button, 

in place of the preset stations (if 

programmed). 

Press the push-button for the 

program type you would like to 

listen to. 

Not all stations support the 

program type feature. 

Pressing a program type pushbutton 

may not take you to all of 

the stations with that type of 

broadcast. 

Alternate Frequency 

In this mode, the radio will automatically 

switch to a station with a 

stronger signal with the same 

program type. 


the knob. 



2. Turn the knob until 

ALTERNATE FREQ appears on 

the display. 


AF OFF, AF ON or AF REG. 


is turned on. 







. . . 122


Section 1 

Compact Disc Changer 

This compact disc player can 

accommodate up to six compact 

discs. 

NOTICE 

Do not apply paper labels to 

discs. The labels may get 

caught in the player. 

Insert only one disc at a time. 

Do not use scratched or 

damaged discs. 

Keep other items, liquids and 

debris away from the loading 

slot. 

Normal size discs can be loaded 

into the compact disc player. 

However small, 8 cm (3-inch) discs 

can only be played with specially 

designed adaptors. 

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality 

may be reduced due to CD-R 

quality, the method of recording, 

the quality of the music that has 

been recorded, or the way the CD- 

R has been handled. You may 

experience an increase in skipping, 

difficulty in finding tracks and/or 

difficulty in loading and ejecting. 

If these problems occur, check the 

bottom of the disc for damage or 

try a known good disc. 

See "Disc Error" later in this section 


LOADING THE CD CHANGER 

With the compact disc changer, 

you can play up to six discs 

continuously. 

To load a single disc, do the 

following: 

1. The ignition and the radio can 

be on or off. 

2. Press the (Load) button. 

PLEASE WAIT will appear on 

the display. 

3. When INSERT appears on the 

display, insert the CD label 

side up, partway into the slot. 

The player will automatically 

pull the CD in. 

If the radio is turned on, the disc 

will begin to play. 

– 

123 . . .



To load multiple discs, do the 

following: 

1. The ignition and the radio can 

be on or off. 

2. Press and hold the (Load) 

button for two seconds. 

You will hear a beep and 

PLEASE WAIT will appear on 

the display. 

3. When INSERT appears on the 

display, insert a CD label side 

up, partway into the slot. The 

player will automatically pull 

the CD in. 

4. Repeat the previous step until 

all the discs are loaded. 

Do not try to load more than 

six discs. 

When you are done loading 

discs, the disc player will time 

out when it does not receive 

any more discs. 

If the radio is turned on, the 

last loaded disc will begin to 

play. 

If the ignition or the radio is turned 

off, the compact disc will stay in 

the player. When the ignition and 

radio are turned on, the compact 

disc will resume play at the point 

where it stopped. 

A compact disc symbol will appear 


A track number will appear on the 

display when each track starts to 

play. 

Once the disc is inserted, compact 

disc functions will appear on the 

display above each push-button, 

in place of the preset stations (if 

programmed). 

. . . 124


Section 1 

Press DISP (F6) to display the track 

elapsed time. Press it again to 

display CD PLAY MODE. 

Press DISC ↓ (F1) to select the 

previous disc in the changer. 

Press DISC ↑ (F2) to select the next 

disc in the changer. 

Press the | button or press CD 

REV (F4) to move quickly to 

the beginning of the next track. 

Press and hold CD FWD >> (F4) to 

move quickly ahead to another 

part of the disc. Release it to return 

to playing speed. 

Press the | | button to sample 

about 10 seconds of the beginning 

of each track. Press it again to stop 

the scanning function. 

Press MODE (F5) to select from 

NORMAL, RPT TRCK, RPT DISC, 

RDM TRCK (random track) and 

RDM ALL (random all discs). 

• Select NORMAL to sequentially 

play the discs and tracks. 

• Select RPT TRCK to repeat the 

track you have previously listened 

to. RPT TRCK will appear 


Press MODE again to turn off 

repeat play. 

– 

125 . . .



• Select RPT DISC to repeat the 

disc you have previously listened 

to. RPT DISC will appear 



repeat disc. 

• Select RDM TRCK (random 

track) to hear the tracks on the 

selected disc in random, rather 

than sequential, order. RDM 

TRCK will appear on the 

display. 


random track. 

• Select RDM ALL (random all) 

to randomly seek through all 

the discs and tracks. RDM ALL 



random all. 

Press SRCE to select a source, 

either the radio or compact disc 

player. 

The audio source must be loaded 

to play. 

For more information about 

switching between sources, see 

"Source Selection" under "Radio 

Controls" earlier in this section. 

Press and release to eject the 

disc that is currently playing. 

To eject all the discs, press and 

hold the eject button. You will 

hear a beep. 

Eject may be activated with either 

the ignition or radio off. 

Playing MP3 format CDs 

If you burn your own MP3 disc on 

a personal computer: 

• Make sure the MP3 files are 

recorded on a CD-R disc. 

• When burning an MP3 disc 

using multiple sessions, make 

sure to finalize the disc. 

It is usually better to burn the 

disc all at once. 

• Song title, artist name and the 

album name will be available 

when the CD has been 

recorded using ID3 tags versions 

1 and 2. 

• Do not mix standard audio and 

MP3 files on one disc. 

. . . 126


Section 1 

• Make sure playlists have one of 

the following extensions: 

- .m3u 

- .wpl 

Files with other extensions may 

not work. 

The player will be able to read and 

play a maximum of 50 folders, 50 

playlists, 10 sessions, and 255 files. 

Long file, folder, or playlist names 

or a combination of a large 

number of files and folders or playlists 

may cause the player to be 

unable to play up to the maximum 

number of files, folders, playlists, 

or sessions. 

To play a large number of files, 

folders, playlists, or sessions, minimize 

the length of the file, folder 

or playlist name. 

MP3 CDs recorded without file 

folders can also be played. 

The player can support up to 11 

folders in depth, but keep the 

depth of the folders to a minimum 

in order to make it easier to locate 

a file for playback. 

If a CD contains more than the 

maximum number of folders, playlists, 

sessions, or files, the player 

will access the CD up to the maximum 

limit and any items over the 

limit will be ignored. 

Root Directory 

The root directory will be treated 

as a folder. If the root directory 

contains compressed audio files, 

the directory will be displayed as 

F1 ROOT. 

All files contained directly under 

the root directory will be accessed 

prior to any root directory folders. 

However, playlists (PX) will always 

be accessed before root folders or 

files. 

– 

127 . . .



Empty Directory or Folder 

If a root directory or a folder is 

empty or contains only folders, the 

player will automatically advance 

to the next folder in the file structure 

that contains a compressed 

audio file. The empty folder(s) will 

not be displayed or numbered. 

No Folder 

When the CD only contains 

compressed audio files without 

any folders or playlists, the next 

and previous folder functions will 

have no function. ROOT will 

appear on the display as the name 

of the folder. 

When the CD only contains 

compressed audio files and playlists 

without any folders, all files will 

be located under the root folder. 

The folder up and down buttons 

will search playlists (PX) first and 

then go to the root folder. ROOT 

will appear on the display as the 

name of the folder. 

Order of Play 

The tracks will begin to play from 

the first track in the first playlist 

and will continue sequentially 

through all tracks in each playlist. 

When the last track of the last playlist 

has been played, play will 

continue from the first track of the 

first playlist. 

If the CD does not contain any 

playlists, the first track under the 

root directory will play first. When 

all the tracks from the root directory 

have been played, the remaining 

tracks will play in the order of 

their numerical listing. When the 

last track of the last folder has been 

played, play will continue with the 

first track in the first folder or root 

directory. 

. . . 128


Section 1 

File System and Naming 

The displayed song title is taken 

from the file's ID3 tag. If a song 

title is not present in the ID3 tag, 

the radio will display the file name 

as the track name. 

Track names longer than 32 characters 

or 4 pages will be 

shortened. 

Preprogrammed Playlists 

The radio will recognize preprogrammed 

playlists which were 

created by WinAmp, Music- 

Match, or Real Jukebox software, 

however there will be no 

editing capability. These playlists 

are treated as special folders 

containing compressed audio files. 

Playing an MP3 Audio File 

Make sure that the CD player 

source is activated and that at least 

one disc is loaded. 

See "Loading the CD Changer" 


If the ignition is on, the disc will 

begin to play as soon as it is 

inserted. 

A compact disc symbol will appear 


If the ignition or the radio is turned 

off, the compact disc will stay in 

the player. When the ignition and 

radio are turned on, the compact 

disc will resume play at the point 

where it stopped. 

– 

129 . . .



A track number will appear on the 

display when each track starts to 

play. 

Normal size discs can be loaded 

into the compact disc player. 

However small, 8 cm (3-inch) discs 

can only be played with specially 

designed adaptors. 

NOTICE 

Do not add paper labels to CDs, 

they could get caught in the CD 

player. 






slot. 

When playing a CD-R, the sound 

quality might be reduced due to 

CD-R quality, the method of 

recording, the quality of the music 

that has been recorded and the 

way the CD-R has been handled. 

You may experience an increase in 

skipping, difficulty in finding tracks 

and/or difficulty in loading and 

ejecting. 




See "Disc Error" later in this section 


Use the volume, tone, and speaker 

controls just as you do for the 

radio. Other controls may have 

different functions when a disc is 

inserted. 

Press (F1) to go to the first 

track in the previous folder. 

Press and hold (F1) to move 

quickly back within a track. Release 

it to return to playing speed. 

REV and the elapsed time will 


Press (F2) to go to the first 

track in the next folder. 

Press and hold (F2) to move 

quickly ahead within a track. 

Release it to return to playing 

speed. 

FWD and the elapsed time will 


. . . 130


Section 1 

Pressing RDM (F3) repeatedly will 

cycle the system through the 

following play modes: 

• RDM TRCK (random all tracks) 

The system will play the tracks 

on the disc in random, rather 

than sequential, order. 

Once all the tracks in the current 

folder or playlist have been 

played, the tracks from the 

next folder or playlist will begin 

to play in random order. 

• RDM FLDR (random within 

folder) 

The system will play the tracks 

in the current folder in random, 

rather than sequential, order. 

If you press (F1) while this 

feature is active, the system will 

go to the previous folder and 

randomize the tracks in that 

folder. 

If you press (F2) while this 

feature is active, the system will 

go to the next folder and randomize 

the tracks in that folder. 

• NORMAL 

Select this setting to turn off 

random playback. 

While in random mode, press | 

or | to go to the next or previous 

randomly selected track. 

Pressing RPT (F4) repeatedly will 

cycle the system through the 

following play modes: 

• RPT TRCK 

The current track will repeat. 

• RPT FLDR 

The tracks in the current folder 

will repeat. 

• NORMAL 

Select this setting to turn off 

repeat playback. 

Press DISP (F6) to switch between 

the track elapsed time or MP3 

playback information display. 

To move ahead to the beginning 

of the next track, press the | 

button. To play the previous track, 

press the | button. 

– 

131 . . .



If you hold the button down, the 

player will continue moving rearward 

or forward through the disc. 

The system will advance or reverse 

at a rate of two tracks per second. 

Release the button to play a track. 

Press the | | button to sample 

about 10 seconds of the beginning 

of each track. Press it again to stop 

the scanning function. 

Rotate the knob to quickly 

reverse or advance through the 

tracks sequentially. When in 

random mode, turning this knob 

will still reverse or advance 

through the tracks in sequential 

order. 

The track number and file name 


Select the radio main menu item 

while an MP3 disc is loaded to 

view the title, artist, album, or 

folder names. 

To view this information, do the 

following: 



2. Turn the knob until INFO 



this option. 

The display will change to 

show the additional MP3 

information. 

4. Press one of the following buttons 

to view specific 

information: 

- Press TTLE (F1) to display the 

title name. 

- Press ATST (artist) (F2) to display 

the artist name. 

- Press ALBM (F3) to display 

the album name. 

- Press FLDR (folder) (F4) to 

display the folder name. 







. . . 132


Section 1 

Press SRCE to toggle between 

playing a disc or the radio. 

A disc must be loaded to select the 

source. When a disc is loaded in 

the player, a compact disc symbol 


Press and release to eject the 

disc that is currently playing. 

Press and hold this eject button if 

you would like to eject all the discs 

in the changer. 

You will hear a beep. 

Eject may be activated with either 

the ignition or radio off. 

Disc Error 

NOTICE 

Do not add paper labels to CDs, 

they could get caught in the CD 

player. 






slot. 

If an error occurs while trying to 

play a disc, the cause may be 

extreme heat, rough road, moisture 

or a damaged or improperly 

loaded disc. The disc may not play 

or it may eject. Unless the disc is 

damaged, it will play when conditions 

are back to normal. 

An error may occur if the playlist, 

compressed audio, or data file has 

a format that is not supported by 

the player. 

When playing a CD-R, the sound 

quality might be reduced due to 

CD-R quality, the method of 

recording, the quality of the music 

that has been recorded and the 

way the CD-R has been handled. 

You may experience an increase in 

skipping, difficulty in finding tracks 

and/or difficulty in loading and 

ejecting. 




Do not add paper labels to discs. 

They could get caught in the 

compact disc player. 

– 

133 . . .



If any error occurs repeatedly or if 

an error can't be corrected, please 

contact your dealer. 

Provide your dealer with any 

displayed error codes. 

Care of Your Compact Disc 

Player 

The use of CD lens cleaner discs is 

not advised. The use of lens cleaner 

discs may result in contamination 

of the CD optics lens. 

Care of Your Compact Discs 

Handle discs carefully. Store them 

in their original cases or other 

protective cases and away from 

direct sunlight and dust. If the 

surface of a disc is soiled, dampen 

a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral 

detergent solution mixed with 

water and clean it, wiping from 

the center to the edge. 

Be sure never to touch the signal 

surface when handling discs. Pick 

up discs by grasping the outer 

edges or the edge of the hole and 

the outer edge. 

Reconfigurable Radio 

Display Buttons 

. . . 134


Section 1 

This feature allows you to customize 

the sound system's reconfigurable 

buttons. 

There are two reconfigurable 

buttons on each side of the radio 

display. 

Non-radio features are also available 

for customization. 

To program the radio display 

buttons: 



2. Rotate the knob to highlight 

SETUP. Press the knob to 

access the SETUP menu. 


CONFIGURE DISPLAY 

KEYS. Press the knob to access 

the menu. 


the radio display button 

you wish to program. The currently 

assigned feature will be 

displayed. Press the knob to 

select it. 


a new function for the 

button. Press the knob to 

select it. 

6. Repeat the steps for each 

radio display button. 

RADIO PERSONALIZATION 


navigation system, then the radio 

– 

135 . . .



is integrated into that system's 

control panel. See the separate 

manual for the navigation system 

and its radio for further 

information. 

Also, see "Vehicle Programming 

and Personalization Features" later 

in this section. 

RADIO MAIN MENU (BASE 

SOUND SYSTEM) 

With the base sound system, press 

the CNFG button or press the 

knob to bring up the main menu. 

Scroll through menu items by 

rotating the knob and select items 

by pressing the knob. 







set. 

Main Menu Items (Base 

Sound System) 

or BASS - MID - TREBLE 

With this menu item you can 

adjust your treble, midrange, bass, 

balance and fader features. 

See "Radio Controls" earlier in this 


BALANCE--FADER 

With this menu item you can 

adjust your treble, midrange, bass, 

balance and fader features. 



. . . 136


Section 1 

EQ or EQUALIZER 

This feature allows you to choose 

one of several preset bass, 

midrange and treble equalization 

settings that suit different kinds of 

music or radio stations. 



H/A or PRESETS HOME/AWAY 

This feature allows you to program 

two sets of stations on the preset 

push-buttons. You can program 

one "home" set (radio stations that 

are within your normal operating 

range) and one "away" set (radio 

stations that are outside of your 

normal operating range). That 

way, you will not need to reprogram 

your presets every time you 

travel. 



AUTOSTORE PRESETS 

This feature allows you to store the 

radio stations with the strongest 

signals as presets. 



– 

137 . . .



PROGRAM TYPE MODE 

While in the PTY (program type) 

mode the radio will tune to any 

station based on a preset program 

type. 






TA or TRAFFIC ANNOUNCE 

This feature allows your audio 

system to receive traffic 

announcements. 






RECALL RDS MESSAGE 

This feature allows you to set the 

system to display RDS messages 

on the screen if the current station 

has a message. 






. . . 138


Section 1 

AF or ALTERNATE FREQ. 

This feature allows you to set the 

system to automatically tune to a 

stronger station with the same 

programming. 






or SEEK LOCAL/DISTANT 

With this feature, you can set the 

radio to search for only local 

stations with the strongest signals 

or for all stations with a strong 

signal within a broader area, if you 

would prefer a larger selection of 

stations. 



or SET CLOCK 

Use this menu item to set the time. 

See "Setting the Clock and Date" 


information. 

or SET DATE 

Use this menu item to set the date. 

See "Setting the Clock and Date" 


information. 

or INFO 

Select the radio main menu item 

while an MP3 disc is loaded to 

view the title, artist, album, or 

folder names. 

See "Playing MP3 format CDs" 


information. 

– 

139 . . .



LANG or LANGUAGE 

If you wish to change the 

language from what the system is 

currently set for, do the following: 

1. Select the "language" menu 

item. 

2. Rotate the knob to 

choose the language. 

Once your choice is highlighted, 

press the knob once to select 

it. 







SETUP 

When you select this item the 

following menu appears: 

• PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU 

In this menu, you can program 

your vehicle's personalization 

features to suit your 

preferences. 

For more information, see 

"Vehicle Programming and Personalization 

Features" later in 

this section. 

• DRIVER SELECTION Menu 

This menu allows two different 

drivers to store or recall their 

own memory settings. 



- DRIVER 1 

- DRIVER 2 

- RECALL DRIVER SETTINGS 

- STORE DRIVER SETTINGS 




this section. 

. . . 140


Section 1 

• DRIVER EXIT SETTINGS Menu 

This menu allows you to store 

or recall your memory exit 

settings. 



- RECALL EXIT SETTINGS 

- STORE EXIT SETTINGS 




this section. 

• CONFIGURE DISPLAY KEYS 


the sound system's 

reconfigurable buttons. 

There are two reconfigurable 

buttons on each side of the 

radio display. 


information: 

- Reconfigurable Radio Display 

Buttons 

– 

141 . . .



A 

AUDIO STEERING WHEEL 

CONTROLS 

Your vehicle has radio controls 

mounted on the steering wheel. 

Button is available in vehicles 

not equipped with the Adaptive 

Cruise Control feature. 

Press the top or bottom of the seek 

button to tune the radio to 

either a higher or lower station. 

B 

C 

This feature will only seek through 

stations that are in the selected 

band. 



When a compact disc is playing, 

press the top or bottom of the seek 

button to select the next or previous 

track on the disc. 

Press to switch between the 

available audio sources: 

• AM Band 

• FM1 Band 

• FM2 Band 

• Compact Disc Changer 

In vehicles equipped with the navigation 

system, pressing may 

also allow you to access the following 

sources: 

• DVD Player 

• Television System 

Button is available in vehicles 

not equipped with the heated 

steering wheel feature. 

. . . 142


Section 1 

A 

Press and hold for two seconds 

to scan stations in the selected 

band. 

The radio will go to the next or 

previous station, play for a few 

seconds, then go on to the next 

station. 

Press the button again to stop 

scanning. 



band. 



B 

C 

D 

Press to hear the radio stations 

that are programmed on your 

push-buttons. 



band. 



When a compact disc is playing 

from the CD changer, press the 

top or bottom of this button to 

select the next or previous disc in 

the changer. 

E 

F 

Note: 

More than one disc must be 

loaded in the player for this 

feature to work. 

Press the top or bottom of the 

volume button to increase or 

decrease the volume. 

Press to silence the system. 

Press it again to turn the sound 

back on. 

With the navigation system, 

button controls the voice recognition 

and Bluetooth ® features. 


these systems, see the separate 


Voice recognition is only operable 

if a navigation system mapping 

data DVD is loaded. 

– 

143 . . .



ANTI-THEFT FEATURE 

The theft deterrent feature is automatically 

enabled and therefore no 

programming is necessary. 

When the ignition is turned off, 

the system will automatically arm 

itself. 

If the radio is moved to a different 

vehicle, THEFTLOCK will appear 


Your radio will not operate if it is 

stolen. 

ANTENNA 

The antenna is integrated into the 

rear windshield with the rear 

defogger lines. 

For optimal reception, the antenna 

connector must be securely 

attached to the post on the glass. 

NOTICE 

Do not apply aftermarket glass 

tinting. The metallic film in 

some tinting materials will 

interfere with or distort the 

incoming radio reception. 

You could damage the antenna 

and interfere with the radio's 

ability to pick up stations clearly. 



. . . 144


Section 1 

If you choose to add an aftermarket 

cellular phone to your vehicle, 

and the antenna needs to be 

attached to the glass, be sure not 

to damage the existing grid lines. 

Do not place the cellular phone 

antenna over the existing grid 

lines. 

NOTICE 

Make sure not to scratch the 

inside of the rear window and 

not to damage the lines. 

You could damage the antenna 

and interfere with the radio's 

ability to pick up stations clearly. 



■ NAVIGATION SYSTEM 

(IF EQUIPPED) 

The navigation system is located at 

the center of the instrument panel. 

The system consists of control 

buttons and a touch-sensitive 

screen and is equipped with a 

navigation guidance system with 

route planning. 

It may also come with the following 

tools or information: 

• a programmable address book 

• points of interest 

• a list of restaurants 

• a list of hotels and motels 

• emergency phone numbers 

The navigation system may also 

interact with the radio to receive 

broadcast announcements on traffic 

and weather and to receive 

emergency alert communications. 

For information on how to use this 

system, see the separate navigation 

system manual. 

Also, see "Vehicle Programming 

and Personalization Features" later 


– 

145 . . .



■ CONTROLS MOUNTED 

ON STEERING WHEEL/ 

COLUMN 

You will find the following controls 

mounted on the steering wheel or 

steering column. 

A 

E 

Multifunction Lever 

Use this lever to control the 

following features: 

• Headlights and Other Exterior 

Lights 

See "Lights" earlier in this 

section. 

• Turn Signals 

See "Multifunction Lever" later 

in this section for additional 

information. 

B C 11 D B 

• Cruise Control 

See "Cruise Control" later in 


information. 

• Forward Collision Alert System 

(If equipped) 

See "Forward Collision Alert 

System" later in this section for 


. . . 146


Section 1 

Audio Steering Wheel 

Controls 

Your vehicle is equipped with 

steering wheel-mounted radio 

controls . See "Sound System 

and Clock" earlier in this section 


The controls shown in this manual 

are typical. The actual controls in 



in your vehicle. 

Other possible controls may 

include: 

• Cruise Control Cancel Button 

See "Cruise Control" later in 


information. 

• Adaptive Cruise Control Button 

See "Adaptive Cruise Control" 


information. 

• Heated Steering Wheel Control 

See "Heated Steering Wheel 

Control" for more information. 

Heated Steering Wheel 

Control (If equipped) 


with a heated steering wheel. 

The control is located on the steering 

wheel. 

– 

Press the control to heat the steering 

wheel. The indicator light on 

the button will glow when the 

system is on. 

The steering wheel will take a few 

minutes to begin heating. 

147 . . .



Telescopic Power Tilt Wheel 

Control 

You can change the angle and 

depth of the steering wheel to 

your desired position. 

Move the switch in the direction 

you want the wheel to move. Press 

the switch up or down to tilt the 

wheel up or down. Press the 

switch toward the front of the 

vehicle to move the steering wheel 

farther into the instrument panel 

and away from you. Pull the switch 

toward the rear of the vehicle to 

move the steering wheel farther 

out of the instrument panel and 

closer to you. 


information: 


Features 

Horn 

Sound the horn by pressing the 

horn symbols on your steering 

wheel. 

. . . 148


Section 1 

NOTICE 

Clear any ice or snow from the 

wiper blades before using them 

to prevent damage to the 

blades and overloading the 

wiper motor. 

Windshield Wipers/Washer 

Stalk 

WINDSHIELD WIPERS 

To control the windshield wipers, 

push the large stalk on the right 

side of the steering column up or 

down. 

For a single wiper cycle, push the 

stalk downward to , then 

release it. For more cycles, hold 

the stalk in this position. 

For delayed wiper cycles, push the 

stalk up to the first position. You 

can adjust the interval between 

cycles by rotating the band 

upward or downward. 

For steady wiper cycles, push the 

stalk upward to the second or third 

position, depending on the wiper 

speed you want. 

To turn off the wipers, push the 

stalk to the "off" setting . 

The wipers are protected by a 

circuit breaker. If there is an electrical 

overload, the wiper system will 

stop until the motor cools. 

Wiper blades will eventually wear 

out and not wipe properly, reducing 

forward vision. Replace worn 

wiper blades. 

– 

149 . . .



Rain Sensitive Wipers 

A sensor is mounted on the inside 

of the windshield behind the rearview 

mirror. 

The sensor monitors the amount 

of moisture on the windshield and 

automatically operates the wipers 

accordingly. 

NOTICE 

Do not place stickers or other 

items on the exterior glass 

surface in front of the moisture 

sensor. Doing so could cause 

the sensor to malfunction. 

The rain sensitive wiper system can 

be activated by moving the stalk 

up to the first position and rotating 

the band to one of the four 

sensitivity levels. Turn the band 

towards you for minimum sensitivity 

and away from you for maximum 

sensitivity. 

A single wipe will occur each time 

the band is rotated upward to a 

higher sensitivity position to indicate 

the sensitivity level has been 

increased. 

The wipers will operate in a delay 

mode as well as a continuous low 

or high speed, depending on the 

sensitivity level and amount of 

moisture. 

To override this feature and operate 

the wipers manually, move the 

stalk up to the low or high speed 

position. 

Your vehicle's headlights will turn 

on automatically when the rain 

sensitive wipers are activated if the 

exterior lights control is in the 

AUTO position. 

. . . 150


Section 1 

The wiper-activated headlights will 

turn off if the automatic lights 

control or the wipers are turned 


If the system is left on for a long 

period of time, occasional wipes 

may occur without any moisture 

on the windshield. This is normal. 

It indicates that the system is 

activated. 

NOTICE 

Turn the wipers off before 

going through a car wash to 

avoid damage. 

Wiper Disable Feature (STS-V 

Model Only) 


wiper system disable feature. 

The wiper system will be disabled 

any time the vehicle is stopped 

and the hood is open. 

The wipers will move to a preset 

position. 

This prevents the wipers from 

interfering with hood operation. 

The system will return to normal 

operation once the hood is closed. 

Note: 

Make sure to keep the hood 

closed while changing wiper 

blades, or any time the wipers 

are out of their preset, parked 

position. 

WIPER ACTIVATED HEADLIGHTS 

See "Lights" earlier in this section. 

– 

The washer feature operates as 

normal. It is not affected by the 

Rain Sensitive Wipers feature. 

151 . . .



WINDSHIELD WASHER 

To spray washer fluid on the windshield, 

push in the button at the 

end of the stalk. The washer will 

spray until you release the button. 

The wipers will clear the window 

and then either stop or return to 

your preset speed. 

CAUTION 

Don't use the washer fluid in 

freezing weather until your 

windshield is warmed so that 

ice doesn't form and block your 

vision. 

If the washer fluid reservoir is low 

on fluid, CHECK WASHER FLUID 

will appear on the Driver Information 

Center display. 



HEADLIGHT WASHERS 

To wash your headlights, activate 

the windshield washer while the 

headlights are on. 

The windshield and headlights will 

be washed. 

After the first cycle, the headlight 

washers will cycle once every fifth 

time the windshield washer is 

activated. 

If the washer fluid is low, the headlight 

washers will not work. 



. . . 152


Section 1 

If a bulb is burned out, replace it to 

help avoid an accident. 

If the arrows don't turn on at all 

when you signal a turn or lane 

change, check for burned out 

bulbs and check the fuse. 

See "Fuses and Circuit Breakers" in 

Section 4 for additional 

information. 

■ MULTIFUNCTION 

LEVER 

Turn Signal 

To signal a turn, move the lever all 

the way up (right) or down (left). 

When the turn is over, the lever 

will return automatically. To signal 

a lane change, press the lever for 

less than one second and the turn 

signal will automatically flash three 

times. If more flashes are desired, 

hold it there until you complete 

your lane change. An arrow on the 

instrument cluster will flash in the 

direction of the turn or lane 

change. 

If a turn signal is left on for more 

than 1.6 km (1 mile), a chime will 

sound and the TURN SIGNAL ON 


Information Center display to 

remind you to turn it off. If you 

need it on longer, turn the signal 

off, then back on. 

If the arrows flash at a faster rate 

than normal when you signal a 

turn or lane change, a signal bulb 

may be burned out. Check the 

front and rear turn signal lights. 

153 . . . 

–



Lane Departure Warning System 

(If equipped) 

The Lane Departure Warning 

System helps you maintain proper 

vehicle position within your driving 

lane by alerting you if you 

begin to change lanes without 

using the vehicle turn signal. 

See the separate navigation 

system manual for more 

information. 

Main Light Controls 

See "Lights" earlier in this section 


Cruise Control 



Forward Collision Alert 

System (If equipped) 

See "Forward Collision Alert 

System" later in this section for 


■ FORWARD COLLISION 

ALERT SYSTEM (IF 

EQUIPPED) 

Read through all of the following 

information before using this 

feature. 

Modifications made to this system 

by anyone other than an authorized 

service facility may void 

authorization to use the system. 

The forward collision alert system 

provides an audible and visual 

warning if you approach a vehicle 

too quickly. 

. . . 154


Section 1 

If you are following another vehicle 

too closely, the system will 

provide the visual warning without 

the audible warning. 


uses the adaptive cruise control 

radar to detect a vehicle directly 

ahead in your path, within a 

distance of 100 m. 

This feature only works if the vehicle 

speed is greater than 32 km/h. 

CAUTION 

The forward collision alert 

system is only a warning 

system. It does not apply the 

brakes. 

The system is not designed to 

warn the driver of pedestrians 

or animals. 

When you are approaching a 

vehicle or object, the system 

may not provide you with 

enough time to avoid a 

collision. 



You should always be ready to 

take action and apply the 

brakes. 

Use the adaptive cruise control 

switch at the end of the multifunction 

lever to turn the forward collision 

alert system on or off. 

To turn the alert system on, move 

the cruise control switch to the 

center, "on" position. 

Keep the head-up display on and 

properly adjusted when using the 

forward collision alert system. 

Otherwise, the alert system will 

not be enabled and you will not be 

provided with the audible or visual 

warnings. 

– 

155 . . .



See "Head-Up Display" earlier in 

this section for more information. 

To turn the alert system off, move 

the cruise control switch to the 

left, "off" position. 

CAUTION 

On winding roads, the forward 

collision alert system may not 

detect a vehicle ahead in your 

lane. Do not rely on the alert 

system when driving on winding 

roads. 

When visibility is low (such as 

when driving in fog, rain or 

snow), system performance is 

limited. There may not be 

enough warning distance to the 

vehicle in front of you. Do not 

rely on the alert system when 

driving in low visibility 

conditions. 

CAUTION 

When the forward collision alert 

system is enabled, the adaptive 

cruise control switch is on. 

Be careful not to press cruise 

control buttons unless you 

want to use cruise control. 

If you accidentally activate 

cruise control, you could be 

startled by the cruise control 

response. 



be injured. 

Alerting the Driver 

A driver warning may activate if 

the alert system detects that you 

are approaching a vehicle too 

quickly or following a vehicle too 

closely. 

If the alert system detects that 

driver action may be required, the 

"alert" symbol will flash on the 

head-up display and a warning 

beep may sound. 

. . . 156


Section 1 

Vehicle Detection 

If a vehicle is detected in your 

path, the "vehicle ahead" symbol 

will appear in the head-up display. 

If the "vehicle ahead" symbol does 

not appear, or disappears briefly, 

the alert system will not respond 

to vehicles you may see ahead. 

The "vehicle ahead" symbol may 

disappear when you drive on 

curves, highway exit ramps or hills. 

If another vehicle enters your lane, 

the alert system will not detect the 

vehicle until it is completely in the 

lane. 

CAUTION 

If the radar is blocked by snow, 

ice or dirt, it may not detect a 

vehicle ahead. 

The alert system may not help 

you avoid a collision. 

Always keep the radar clean. 

Do not use the alert system if 

the radar is blocked. 

See "Cleaning the System" 

under "Adaptive Cruise 

Control" later in this section. 

CAUTION 

The alert system may not detect 

(or it may not warn you early 

enough about) stationary or 

slow-moving vehicles or other 

objects ahead of you. 

Do not rely on the forward collision 

alert system when 

approaching stationary or slowmoving 

vehicles or objects. 

You could have an accident. 




may occasionally provide an 

unnecessary alert. This is normal. 

Your vehicle does not need service. 

– 

157 . . .



Alert System Messages 

The following messages may 

appear in the Driver Information 

Center display: 







■ CRUISE CONTROL 


with a traditional cruise control 

system or with an adaptive cruise 

control system. Each of these 

systems is described in this section. 

TRADITIONAL CRUISE 

CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED) 

CAUTION 

It is dangerous to use cruise 

control in heavy traffic, or on 

slippery or winding roads. 

With cruise control, you can maintain 

a speed of about 40 km/h (25 

mph) or more without keeping 

your foot on the accelerator pedal. 

When the cruise control is set, the 

Cruise Control Light on the instrument 

cluster will come on. 

Note: 


control when the traction 

control system begins to limit 

wheel spin or if the Stabilitrak ® 



disengage. 


information: 

•Traction Control System 

• Stabilitrak ® System 




. . . 158


Section 1 

To Get Out of Cruise Control 

To temporarily turn off cruise 

control without erasing the set 

speed memory, do the following: 

• Step on the brake pedal. 

or 

To Set Your Cruise Control 

1. Move the cruise control switch 

to the center, "on" position. 

2. Accelerate to the speed you 

want. 

3. Push in the button at the end 

of the lever and release it. 

4. Take your foot off the accelerator 

pedal. 

The Cruise Control Light on the 

instrument cluster should turn on. 

• Press the cruise control cancel 

button on the steering 

wheel. 

The indicator light will turn off. 

– 

CAUTION 

Don't leave your cruise control 

switch on when you're not 

using it. 

159 . . .



To turn off cruise control and erase 

the set speed memory, do the 

following: 

• Move the cruise control switch 

to the left, "off" position. 

or 

• Turn off the ignition. 

To Go Back to Your Set Speed 

If you have temporarily turned off 

cruise control without erasing the 

set speed memory, do the following 

to re-engage cruise control: 

• Once you're going about 40 

km/h (25 mph) or more, you 

can move the cruise switch 

briefly to the right, resume/ 

accelerate position. You'll go 

right back up to your chosen 

speed and stay there. 

CAUTION 

When you move the switch to 

the resume/accelerate position 

to return to your chosen speed, 

don't hold the switch there. If 

you hold it longer than one 

second, the vehicle will accelerate 

and continue to gain speed. 

It will keep going faster until 

you release the switch or apply 

the brake. 

. . . 160


Section 1 

– 

To Go to a Higher Speed 

To go to a higher speed, do any of 

the following: 

• Use the accelerator pedal to 

get to the higher speed. 

Press in the button at the end 

of the lever. 

Release the button and the 

accelerator pedal. You'll now 

cruise at the higher speed. 

The new set speed must be at 

least 8 km/h (5 mph) faster 

than the original set speed for 

this method to work. 

• Move the switch to the 

resume/accelerate position. 

You can hold it there while the 

vehicle accelerates to the new 

speed. When the vehicle has 

reached the chosen speed, 

release the switch. The vehicle 

will now maintain the higher 

speed. 

• Tapping the switch will 

increase your vehicle's speed by 

1.6 km/h (1 mph) for each tap. 

To Go to a Slower Speed 

• Push in the button at the end 

of the lever and hold it in. 

Your vehicle will slow down. 

When it gets to the lower 

speed you want, let go of the 

button. The vehicle will maintain 

the lower speed. 

• Tapping the button will lower 

your vehicle's speed by 

1.6 km/h (1 mph) for each tap. 

161 . . .



To Pass Another Vehicle When 

You're in Cruise Control 

Just use the accelerator pedal 

when you need more speed. When 

you take your foot off the pedal, 

the vehicle will go back down to 

your previously chosen cruise 

control speed and stay there. 

Using Cruise Control on Hills 

How well the cruise control system 

will work on hills depends on 

several factors: 

• vehicle speed 

• vehicle load 

• steepness of the hill 

When going up steep hills, you 

may need to use the accelerator 

pedal to maintain your speed. 

When going downhill, you may 

need to use the brake pedal to 

control the vehicle's speed. 

Applying the brakes disengages 

cruise control. 

Many drivers find using cruise 

control on hills to be too much 

trouble. 

ADAPTIVE CRUISE 

CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED) 

Read through all of the following 

information before operating this 

feature. 





CAUTION 

Adaptive cruise control is an 

enhancement to traditional 

cruise control. It is not a safety 

system. 





brakes. 

. . . 162


Section 1 

With adaptive cruise control, your 

vehicle will automatically regulate 

a set speed so that you can keep 

cruise control engaged in moderate 

traffic conditions. 

Cruise control can be engaged at 

speeds above 48 km/h. 

Adaptive cruise control uses radar 

to detect a vehicle directly ahead 

in your path, within a distance of 

100 m. 


path, the system will increase (to a 

maximum of your set speed) or 

decrease vehicle speed to maintain 

a selected follow distance from the 

vehicle ahead of you. 

Adaptive cruise control automatic 

brake application is comparable to 

moderate application of the vehicle's 

brakes. 

CAUTION 


apply hard braking or bring the 

vehicle to a complete stop. 


respond to the following: 

• pedestrians 

• animals 

• stationary vehicles 

• stationary objects 



vehicle or object, adaptive 

cruise control may not have 

time to slow your vehicle 

enough to avoid a collision. 





brakes. 

– 

163 . . .



CAUTION 

It is dangerous to use cruise 

control in heavy stop-and-go 

traffic, on slippery or winding 

roads, or when visibility is low 

(such as when driving in fog, 

rain or snow). 

Failure to follow these precautions 

can result in injuries or 

even death in the case of a 

collision. 

If adaptive cruise control is 

engaged and no vehicle is detected 

in your path, the system will 

operate like traditional cruise 

control systems. 

Operation 

Some of the controls are on the 

multifunction lever. 

CAUTION 

Don't leave your cruise control 

switch on when you're not 

using it. 

Note: 


control when the traction 

control system begins to limit 

wheel spin or if the Stabilitrak ® 



disengage. 


information: 

•Traction Control System 

• Stabilitrak ® System 




. . . 164


Section 1 

TO SET YOUR CRUISE CONTROL 

1. Make sure the head-up display 

is on and properly adjusted. 

You cannot engage the adaptive 

cruise control system unless 

the head-up display is on. 

See "Head-Up Display" earlier 


information. 

CAUTION 

Keep the head-up display properly 

adjusted when using the 

adaptive cruise control system. 

Otherwise, your adaptive cruise 

control settings may not be 

visible. 

You could forget your cruise 

control settings and could be 

startled by adaptive cruise 

control response. 



be injured. 

2. Move the cruise control switch 

to the center, "on" position. 

3. Accelerate to the speed you 

want. 

Be sure to consider the legal 

speed limit, surrounding traffic 

speeds and weather conditions 

when adjusting your set speed. 

– 

165 . . .



4. Push in the button at the end 

of the lever and release it. 

5. Take your foot off the accelerator 

pedal. 

The speed you have selected is the 

speed your vehicle will travel if no 

vehicle is detected in your path. 

The adaptive cruise control symbol 


The set speed will also appear in 

the display. 

Once the cruise control system is 

set, it may immediately apply the 

brakes if it detects a vehicle ahead 

that is too close or moving slower 

than your vehicle. 

To Select the Follow Distance 







Use the GAP button, located on 

the steering wheel, to view or 

adjust the set follow distance. 

. . . 166


Section 1 

The actual distance maintained 

varies based on vehicle speed. 

The faster the vehicle speed, the 

greater the actual follow distance. 

Be sure to consider traffic and 

weather conditions when selecting 

a follow distance. 

The range of selectable distances 

may not be appropriate for all drivers 

and driving conditions. 

The first press of the button will 

display a graphic in the head-up 

display to show the current follow 

distance setting. 

You may then press the top or 

bottom of the button to increase 

or decrease the follow distance. 

There are six different follow 

distances to choose from, ranging 

from one second to two seconds 

follow time. 

TO GO TO A HIGHER SPEED 

To go to a higher speed, do any of 


• Use the accelerator pedal to 

get to the higher speed. 

Press in the button at the end 

of the lever. 

Release the button and the 

accelerator pedal. You'll now 

cruise at the higher speed. 

– 

167 . . .



• Tapping the switch will 

increase your vehicle's set 

speed by 1.6 km/h for each 

tap. 

Your vehicle will not accelerate to 

the new set speed until the system 

determines that there is no vehicle 

in your path. 

• Move the switch to the right, 

resume/accelerate position. 

Hold it there until the desired 

set speed is displayed in the 

head-up display. Then, release 

the switch. The vehicle will 

now maintain the higher 

speed. 

TO GO TO A SLOWER SPEED 

• Push in the button at the end 

of the lever and hold it in. 

Your vehicle will slow down. 

When it gets to the lower 

speed you want, let go of the 

button. The vehicle will maintain 

the lower speed. 

• Tapping the button will lower 

your vehicle's speed by 1.6 km/ 

h for each tap. 

. . . 168


Section 1 

TO GET OUT OF CRUISE 

CONTROL 

To temporarily turn off cruise 

control without erasing the set 

speed memory, do the following: 

• Step on the brake pedal. 

or 

• Press the cruise control cancel 

button on the steering 

wheel. 

To turn off cruise control and erase 

the set speed memory, do the 

following: 

• Move the cruise control switch 

to the left, "off" position. 

or 

• Turn off the ignition. 

Adaptive cruise control information 

will not appear in the head-up 

display when cruise control is not 

engaged. 

TO GO BACK TO YOUR SET 

SPEED 

If you have temporarily turned off 

cruise control without erasing the 

set speed memory, do the following 

to re-engage cruise control: 

• Once you're going about 48 

km/h or more, you can move 

the cruise switch briefly to the 

right, resume/accelerate position. 

Cruise control will reengage 

with the previously 

selected settings. 

– 

169 . . .



ALERTING THE DRIVER 

When the adaptive cruise control 

system is active and it detects that 

driver action is required, the "alert" 

symbol will flash on the head-up 

display and a warning beep will 

sound. 

Driver action is required when: 

• Adaptive cruise control cannot 

apply sufficient braking 

because you are approaching a 

vehicle too rapidly. 

• Vehicle speed drops below 40 

km/h. 

• A temporary condition prohibits 

the adaptive cruise control 

system from operating. 


Messages" earlier in this section 


• A problem is detected within 

the system. 


Messages" earlier in this section 


CAUTION 


vehicle or object, adaptive 

cruise control may not have 

time to slow your vehicle 

enough to avoid a collision. 



brakes. 

. . . 170


Section 1 

APPROACHING AND 

FOLLOWING A VEHICLE 


path, the "vehicle ahead" symbol 


If the "vehicle ahead" symbol does 

not appear, or disappears briefly, 

the cruise control system will not 

respond to vehicles you may see 

ahead. 

CAUTION 






Do not use the adaptive cruise 

control system if the radar is 

blocked. 







– 

171 . . .



STATIONARY OR SLOW- 

MOVING OBJECTS 

CAUTION 

Adaptive cruise control may not 

detect and react to stationary or 

slow-moving vehicles or other 

objects in your lane. 


control system when approaching 

stationary or slow-moving 

vehicles or objects. 






brakes. 

AUTOMATIC SYSTEM 

DEACTIVATION CAUSED BY 

LOW-SPEED DRIVING 

If your vehicle speed drops below 

40 km/h while following a vehicle 

ahead, adaptive cruise control will 

begin to disengage. 

Driver action is required. 


slow the vehicle to a stop. 

When the adaptive cruise control 

system detects that driver action is 

required, the "alert" symbol will 

flash on the head-up display and a 

warning beep will sound. 

TURNING OFF THE HEAD-UP 

DISPLAY SYSTEM 

If the head-up display system is 

turned off while adaptive cruise 

control is engaged, the adaptive 

cruise control system will begin to 

disengage. 

A warning beep will sound. 


in the driver information center 

display: 





If the adaptive cruise control 

system is applying the brakes to 

slow the vehicle when the head-up 

display is turned off, braking will 

continue briefly. 

. . . 172


Section 1 

TO PASS ANOTHER VEHICLE 

WHEN YOU'RE IN CRUISE 

CONTROL - ADAPTIVE CRUISE 

CONTROL OVERRIDE 

Just use the accelerator pedal 

when you need more speed. 

Pressing the accelerator pedal 

overrides the adaptive cruise 

control system. Adaptive cruise 

control will not automatically 

apply the brakes. 


in the head-up display: 

• PEDAL APPLIED ACC 

OVERRIDE 

See "Head-Up Display Adaptive 

Cruise Control Message" earlier in 


When you take your foot off the 

pedal, the vehicle will go back 

down to your previously chosen 

cruise control speed and the adaptive 

cruise control system will 

return to normal operation. 

CAUTION 

Do not rest your foot on the 

accelerator pedal while using 


Pressing the accelerator pedal 

overrides the adaptive cruise 

control system. Adaptive cruise 

control will not automatically 

apply the brakes. 


– 

173 . . .



CURVES IN THE ROAD 

CAUTION 

While entering or driving 

through curves in the road, 

adaptive cruise control may 

respond to a vehicle in another 

lane, or may not have time to 

react to a vehicle in your lane. 



be injured. 

The driver should pay extra 

attention while entering and 

driving through curves. 



brakes. 

Select an appropriate speed for 

driving in curves. 

Adaptive cruise control may 

reduce your vehicle speed in a 

curve if the curve is too sharp. 

When following a vehicle and 

entering a curve, the adaptive 

cruise control system could lose 

track of the vehicle ahead in your 

lane. 

When the system loses track of a 

vehicle in your lane, the "vehicle 

ahead" symbol will disappear from 

the head-up display and the cruise 

control system will adjust vehicle 

speed as if no vehicle is in your 

lane. 

. . . 174


Section 1 

In addition, when following a vehicle 

and entering a curve the adaptive 

cruise control system could 

detect and respond to a vehicle in 

a different lane and may apply the 

brakes. 

If the system slows your vehicle in 

this situation, you may use the 

accelerator pedal to regain the set 

speed. 

The adaptive cruise control system 

may occasionally provide a driver 

alert and/or automatic brake application 

that you consider to be 

unnecessary. This is normal. Your 

vehicle does not need service. 

HIGHWAY EXIT RAMPS 

CAUTION 

When following a vehicle and 

entering or driving on a highway 

exit ramp, the adaptive 

cruise control system could lose 

track of the vehicle ahead in 

your lane. 

When the system loses track of 

a vehicle in your lane, the "vehicle 

ahead" symbol will disappear 

from the head-up display 

and the adaptive cruise control 

system will adjust vehicle speed 

as if no vehicle is in your lane. 

– 

175 . . .




You could be startled by 

sudden changes in vehicle 

speed. 



be injured. 

Turn the adaptive cruise control 

system off before entering a 

highway exit ramp. 

OTHER VEHICLE LANE CHANGES 

If another vehicle enters your lane, 

adaptive cruise control will not 

detect the vehicle until it is 

completely in the lane. 

You should always be ready to take 

action and apply the brakes. 

. . . 176


Section 1 

USING ADAPTIVE CRUISE 

CONTROL ON HILLS AND WHEN 

TOWING A TRAILER 

How well the adaptive cruise 

control system will work on hills 

and when towing a trailer depends 

on several factors: 

• vehicle speed 

• vehicle load 

• traffic conditions 

• steepness of the hill 

While driving on hills, the adaptive 

cruise control system may not 

detect a vehicle ahead in your 

lane. 

When going up steep hills, you 

may need to use the accelerator 

pedal to maintain your speed. 

When going downhill when 

towing a trailer, you may need to 

use the brake pedal to control the 

vehicle's speed. 

Applying the brakes disengages 


You may choose not to use cruise 

control on steep hills when towing 

a trailer. 

– 

177 . . .



CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM 

MESSAGES 

Cruise control must be active for 

system-related messages to 

appear. 

The following messages may 


Center display: 







Cleaning the System 

CAUTION 







control system if the radar is 

blocked. 

To clean the system, first turn off 

the engine. 

The lens is located at the center of 

the grille. 

Using a soft cloth, wipe the lens 

gently. 

After cleaning the outside of the 

lens, try to engage the adaptive 

cruise control system. 

If the adaptive cruise control 

system still has problems, see your 


. . . 178


Section 1 

■ MIRRORS 

Outside Mirrors 

Adjust the outside mirrors with the 

control on the door so that you 

just see the side of your vehicle 

when you are sitting in a comfortable 

driving position. 

The passenger's side mirror is 

convex. A convex mirror's surface 

is curved so you can see more from 

the driver's seat. 

CAUTION 

A convex mirror makes objects 

appear to be farther away than 

they really are. Check your 

inside mirror or glance over 

your shoulder before changing 

lanes. 

Power Mirrors 

The controls are located on the 

driver's door panel. 

Choose the left or right mirror by 

moving the mirror selector switch 

to the left or right. 

To adjust the mirror, push the 

arrows on the control in the direction 

you want the mirror to move. 

When you are not adjusting the 

mirrors, be sure to leave the left/ 

right select switch in the center 

position to prevent accidental 

mirror movement. 

If the automatic dimming feature 

on the inside day/night mirror is 

turned on, the driver's side mirror 

automatically dims to minimize 

glare and improve rearview visibility. 

When the glare decreases, the 

mirror returns to its normal state. 

See "Inside Day/Night Mirror" later 

in this section for information on 

operating the auto-dimming 

feature. 

For information on programming 

power rearview mirror positions 

into memory, see the following: 


Features 

– 

179 . . .



Heated Mirrors 

The power mirrors are heated 

every time the rear defogger is 

activated. 

See "Rear Window Defogger" 

under "Heating and Air Conditioning 

System" earlier in this section 


Power Folding Mirrors 


power folding outside mirrors. You 

should fold the mirrors inward to 

prevent damage when going 

through a car wash or narrow 

streets. 




active. 

To fold the mirrors inward, press 

the button located on the driver's 

door armrest. 

To return the mirrors to their 

normal positions, press the button 

again. 

Do not fold or unfold the mirrors 

manually. 

Otherwise, the mirrors may 

become disengaged. 

A disengaged mirror may shake or 

flutter at normal driving speeds 

and may not stay in position. 

If a mirror ever becomes disengaged, 

it will need to be reset. 

To reset a mirror, fold and unfold it 

using the power controls. 

. . . 180


Section 1 

Curb View Assist Mirrors 

This feature makes it easier to 

detect rear obstacles and allows 

you to view the curb while you 

parallel park. 

Choose the left or right mirror by 

moving the mirror selector switch 

to the left or right. 

The selected outside rearview 

mirror will tilt down to a curb view 

position when the vehicle is shifted 

into R (Reverse). 

If further adjustment is needed, 

use the power mirror control. 

If the mirror selector switch is in 

the center position, neither 

outside mirror will move. 

Five seconds after you shift back 

out of R (Reverse), the mirror will 

return to its original position. 

Inside Day/Night Mirror 

NOTICE 

Do not spray glass cleaner 

directly onto the mirror. Use a 

dampened cloth or paper towel 

to clean the mirror. 

The mirror pivots so that you can 

adjust it up and down or side to 

side. 

– 

181 . . .



AUTOMATIC INSIDE DAY/ 

NIGHT MIRROR 

Your vehicle is equipped with the 

fully automatic inside rearview 

mirror which has an on/off button 

at the base of the mirror. 

During the day the mirror reflects 

all the light from behind your vehicle. 

At night, when the glare is too 

high, it darkens to reflect only part 

of the light behind you. 

To turn the automatic mirror 

feature on or off, press and hold 

for six seconds. 

The indicator light next to the on/ 

off button will turn on when autodimming 

is activated. 

This feature comes on automatically 

with each ignition cycle. 

This also activates the autodimming 

outside rearview mirror. 

ULTRASONIC REAR PARKING 

ASSIST 

The display for this system can be 

seen when looking in the rearview 

mirror or by turning around. For 

information about this system, see 

"Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist" 


Vanity Mirrors 

There are vanity mirrors located on 

the sun visors. When you lift the 

cover, the lights around the mirror 

will come on, and they will go off 

when you close the cover. Adjust 

the light intensity by sliding the 

switch. 

. . . 182


Section 1 

■ WINDOWS 

CAUTION 

Leaving children, helpless 

adults, or pets in a vehicle with 

the windows closed is dangerous. 

They could be overcome 

by extreme heat and could 

suffer permanent injuries or 

even death from heat stroke. 

Never leave a child, a helpless 

adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle, 

especially with the windows 

closed in warm or hot weather. 

CAUTION 


vehicle with the keyless access 

transmitter. 

The key is located inside the 

keyless access transmitter. 

Vehicle ignition and starting 

functions could be activated if 

the transmitter is in the vehicle. 

The children could operate the 

power windows or other 

controls and could even start 

the vehicle and make the vehicle 

move. 

A child or others could be 

injured or even killed. 


Children can be seriously 

injured or killed if caught in the 

path of a closing window. 

When children are riding in the 

vehicle, use the window lockout 

feature to prevent them from 

operating the power windows. 

– 

183 . . .



Power Windows 

Switches on the door armrests 

control the windows in the 

vehicle. 

Each passenger door has a control 

switch for its own window. 

Press the front part of a switch to 

the first position to open the 

window as desired. 

To activate the express open mode 

and open the window all the way, 

press the front of the switch all the 

way down to the second position 

and release. 

To stop the window while it is 

lowering, pull up on the front of 

the switch. 

To raise the window, pull the front 

of the switch up to the first position 

and hold it. 

To activate the express close mode 

to fully close the window, lift the 

front of the switch to the second 

position, then release it. 

To stop the window while it is closing, 

tap the switch. 

The switches continue to work 

even after the ignition has been 

turned off, until either a front door 

is opened or until ten minutes 

have passed. 

See "Retained Accessory Power" 


The power windows are protected 

by a circuit breaker. If there is an 

electrical overload, the power 

window system will stop until the 

current load returns to normal or 

the problem is fixed. 

If electrical power to the windows 

is interrupted, you'll need to reprogram 

the express close feature for 

each power window. 

. . . 184


Section 1 

To reprogram a window once 

electrical power is restored: 

1. The ignition must be on or in 

accessory mode, or Retained 

Accessory Power must be 

active. 

2. Close all the doors. 

3. Press and hold the window 

switch to fully open the window 

and then keep holding 

the switch down for about 

two more seconds. 

4. Pull up on the front of the 

switch until the window is 

fully closed. 

Repeat the steps for each window. 

Anti-Pinch Feature 

If a head, hand or another object is 

in the way of the window as it is 

express-closing, the window will 

stop and open to a preset position. 

The window will function normally 

once the obstruction is removed. 

The anti-pinch feature may also be 

activated by certain weather 

conditions such as severe icing. 

To override the anti-pinch feature, 

lift and hold the power window 

switch in the express close position. 

The window will rise for as 

long as the switch is held. In this 

mode, the window will close on an 

object in its path. Use care when 

overriding the anti-pinch feature. 

CAUTION 

Lifting and holding the power 

window control will override 

the anti-pinch feature. If this 

happens, a power window will 

not stop if something gets in 

the way. You or others could be 

injured, and your window could 

be damaged. Be careful not to 

unintentionally lift and hold the 

power window control. 

Before overriding the anti-pinch 

feature, make sure that all 

people and obstructions are 

clear of the window's path. 

– 

185 . . .



Window Lockout 

This button is located on the driver's 

door armrest, near the power 

window switches. 

Press the lock-out button to 

disable the passengers' window 

controls. Press it again to turn 

them back on. 

The indicator light in the button 

will glow when the lockout feature 

is activated. 

This feature can be programmed 

to disable all passenger windows 

or only the rear passenger 

windows. 


information: 


Features 

Secure Car Feature 

If you press and hold the lock 

button on the keyless entry transmitter 

for more than 2 seconds, 

any open vehicle window(s) will 

close. 

The engine must be off in order for 

this feature to work. 

See "Keyless Access System" in 


If a window is unable to close 

completely, it will reverse and the 

horn will chirp. 

See "Anti-Pinch Feature" earlier in 


. . . 186


Section 1 

■ DOORS 

CAUTION 

Unlocked doors can be 

dangerous. 

• Passengers - especially children 

- can easily open the 

doors and fall out of a moving 

vehicle if the doors are left 

unlocked. When a door is 

locked, the handle won't 

open it. 

•Young children who get into 

unlocked vehicles may be 

unable to get out. A child 

could be overcome by 

extreme heat and could suffer 

permanent injuries or even 

death from heat stroke. 

Always lock your vehicle 

whenever you leave it. 


If the doors are unlocked, your 

chances of being thrown out of 

the vehicle in a crash are 

increased. Wear your seat belts 

properly and lock the doors 

whenever you drive. 

Locking your doors when you 

drive can help prevent unwanted 

outsiders from entering your 

vehicle when you slow down or 

stop the vehicle. 

Door Locks 

Power Door Locks 

From the outside, use your keyless 

access transmitter to lock or 

unlock the doors. 



The door will also unlock automatically 

when you pull the door 

handle, as long as the remote 

keyless access transmitter is with 

you. 

This is called passive entry. 

– 

187 . . .



The door locks can be 

programmed to choose various 

automatic lock and unlock 

settings. 


information: 


Features 

To lock or unlock the doors from 

inside the vehicle, use the power 

door lock controls. 

Press to lock all the doors. 

Press to unlock all the doors. 

Note: 

The rear doors do not have 

power door lock switches. 

Manual Door Locks 

Each rear door has its own manual 

lock. 

The locks are located at the top of 

the door panel, near the window. 

Push the lock down to lock the 

door. 

Pull the lock up to unlock the door. 

PROGRAMMABLE AUTOMATIC 

DOOR LOCKS 

Your vehicle is programmed so 

that the doors will lock after you 

close them, turn on the ignition 

and shift out of P (Park). 

All doors automatically unlock 

when you shift into P (Park). 

The door locks can be 

programmed to choose various 

automatic lock and unlock 

settings. 


information: 


Features 

The front doors can still be opened 

from inside while the doors are 

locked. 

. . . 188


Section 1 

The rear inside door handles will 

not operate when the rear doors 

are locked. 

If a rear passenger needs to exit 

the vehicle, unlock the door 

manually or use a front power 

door lock switch to unlock all the 

doors. 

When the door is closed again, it 

will not automatically lock. 

Lock the door manually, or use a 

power door lock control. 

ANTI-LOCKOUT FEATURE 

With this feature activated, the 

horn will sound three times if you 

close the doors while the vehicle is 

off and the remote keyless access 

transmitter is still inside the 

vehicle. 

The driver's door automatically 

unlocks. 

When the driver's door is 

reopened, a chime will sound 

continuously to remind you to 

remove the transmitter from the 

vehicle. 

The vehicle will not remain locked 

unless a transmitter is removed 

from the vehicle and the door is 

closed. 


information: 


Features 

Rear Door Security Lock 

The rear doors are equipped with 

locks that help prevent passengers, 

especially children, from 

opening the rear doors from 

inside. 

The locks are located on the edge 

of each rear door. 

You must open the rear doors to 

access the locks. 

– 

189 . . .



When the security lock is engaged, 

you can lock and unlock the rear 

doors using the remote keyless 

access, the front power door lock 

switch or by lifting the rear door 

lock manually. But the door can 

only be opened from the outside. 

Security Lock Activation 

To activate this feature, use the 

ignition key to turn the rear door 

security lock to the horizontal position, 

and then close the door. To 

open the door, unlock it and open 

it from the outside. 

To deactivate this feature, use the 

ignition key to turn the rear door 

security lock to the vertical 

position. 

■ TRUNK AREA 

CAUTION 

It can be very dangerous to 

drive with the trunk open. 

Carbon monoxide (CO) gas can 

come into your vehicle. You 

cannot see or smell CO. It can 

cause unconsciousness and 

even death. 

If you must drive with it open or 

with the seal between the body 

and the trunk lid broken, make 

sure all windows are closed and 

turn the fan on to the highest 

speed using any setting that 

brings in outside air. Doing this 

will force outside air into the 

vehicle. 

Make sure that the air outlets 

on or under the instrument 

panel are fully open. 

. . . 190


Section 1 

Trunk Release 

There are two ways to open the 

trunk from outside the vehicle: 

• Squeeze the release button 

located on the rear of the trunk 

lid, above the license plate. 

The transmission must be in P 

(Park). 


must be with you and the passive 

entry feature must be 

enabled in order for this feature 

to work. 

If the vehicle is locked, passive 

functions operate when the 

transmitter is within 1 meter 

(3 ft) of the trunk. 



• Press the trunk release button 

on the keyless access 

transmitter. 

The release button only works 

when the transmission is in P 

(Park) or N (Neutral). 



You can also open the trunk from 

inside your vehicle: 

• Press the trunk release button 

located on the driver's door. 

The release button only works 

when the transmission is in P 


The valet lockout switch must be 

off for a trunk release to work. 

For more information, see "Valet 

Lockout Switch" earlier in this 

section. 

– 

191 . . .



If electrical power is lost, you can 

manually open the trunk using the 

emergency trunk release handle. 

See "Emergency Trunk Release 

Handle" later in this section for 


To access the handle, unlock and 

lower the rear seat pass-through 

door. 

Rear Seat Pass-Through 

Door 

The rear seat pass-through door 

allows you to access the trunk 

without opening the trunk lid. 

To open the rear seat pass-through 

door, do the following: 

1. Pull down the rear seat 

armrest. 

2. If the pass-through door is 

locked, unlock it using the key. 

3. Press the button above the 

lock. 

4. Lower the pass-through door. 

. . . 192


Section 1 

Emergency Trunk Release 

Handle 

NOTICE 

The trunk release handle should 

not be used to tie down the 

trunk lid or as an anchor point 

when securing items in the 

trunk. Improper use of the 

trunk release handle could 

damage it. 

The trunk release handle is located 

inside the trunk, near the back of 

the rear seats. 

The handle will glow in the dark 

following exposure to light. 

Pull the handle to open the trunk 

from inside your vehicle. 

Convenience Net 

This net, which should be installed 

in the rear area, is designed to 

prevent small things, such as 

grocery bags, from falling over 

during sharp turns or quick stops 

and starts. 

The net is not designed to hold 

larger, heavier items. 

Load heavier cargo in the trunk as 

far forward as possible. 

– 

193 . . .



■ OVERHEAD AREA AND 

ROOF 

Sun Visors 

To block out glare, pull the sun 

visor down or to the side. 

You can also slide the visor along 

the rod as necessary. 

Vanity Mirrors 

There are vanity mirrors located on 

the sun visors. When you lift the 

cover, the lights around the mirror 

will come on, and they will go off 

when you close the cover. Adjust 

the light intensity by sliding the 

switch. 

Sunroof (If equipped) 

NOTICE 

Make sure not to leave the 

sunroof open for long periods 

of time. Debris may collect in 

the tracks. 

. . . 194


Section 1 

A 

The sunroof has two switches: one 

for the retract function and the 

other for the vent function. 

The switches are located on the 

overhead console. 




active. 

B 

Sunroof Operation 

To activate the express open mode 

and open the sunroof to the fullopen 

position, press the back of 

the switch all the way down to 

the second position. 

To stop the glass panel in a partially 

open position while it is moving, 

press the switch in either direction. 

The sunshade opens automatically 

when the sunroof is opened. 

To close the sunroof, press and 

hold the front of the switch. 

Release the switch when the 

sunroof reaches the desired 

position. 

To activate the express close mode 

to fully close the sunroof, press the 

front of the switch all the way 

down to the second position and 

release it. 

To stop the glass panel in a partially 

open position while it is moving, 

press the switch in either direction. 

The sunshade will remain open 

until you close it manually. 

Vent Position 

To open (raise) the roof at the rear 

to a vent position, slide the shade 

open by hand and press and hold 

the front of switch . To return 

the sunroof to a closed position, 

press and hold the rear of the 

switch. 

The sunshade will remain open 

until you close it manually. 

– 

195 . . .



Anti-Pinch Feature 

If a head, hand or another object is 

in the way of the sunroof as it is 

closing, the glass panel will stop 

and open to the fully open or vent 

position. Once the obstruction is 

removed, the glass panel can be 

closed. 

Reading Lights 

See "Lights" earlier in this section. 

■ STORAGE 

Center Console Armrest 

The armrest between the front 

seats opens into a storage area. 

There may be a power outlet located 

in the center console storage 

compartment. 

There may also be rear power 

outlets located on the rear of the 

center console. 

. . . 196


Section 1 

Map Pockets 

There are map pockets located on 

each front door and on each front 

seatback. 

– 

Glove Box 

The glove box can be used to store 

small items. 

Use your master key to lock or 

unlock the glove box. 

The light will come on when you 

open the glovebox, and will go 

out when the glovebox is closed. 

Cupholders 

There are two cupholders located 

on the center console. 

To access the cupholders, slide 

back the cover. 

197 . . .



There is also a dual-cupholder in 

the end of the rear seat armrest. 

Convenience Net 

See "Trunk Area" earlier in this 

section. 

■ ASHTRAYS AND 

LIGHTER 

The front ashtray and the cigarette 

lighter are at the lower center of 

the instrument panel. 

Press and release the ashtray cover 

to open the ashtray. 

To remove the ashtray, do the 

following: 

1. Open the ashtray. 

2. Slide the release (located on 

the right side of the ashtray) 

to the right to unlock the tray. 

3. Remove the tray. 

To reinstall, place the tray into 

position and push down firmly 

until it locks into place. 

. . . 198


Section 1 

CAUTION 

NOTICE 

There may also be an ashtray and 

a lighter for the rear seat passengers 

located on the rear of the 

console. 

Press and release the ashtray cover 

to open the ashtray. 

Do not put papers and other 

things that burn into the 

ashtrays. If you do, cigarettes 

placed in the ashtrays could 

start them on fire. 

To use a cigarette lighter, push it in 

and wait for it to pop out. 

Do not hold the cigarette lighter 

in with your hand while it is 

heating. If you do, it could 

damage the heater element 

and the mechanism which 

allows the lighter to pop out. 

It can also blow the fuse. 

NOTICE 

If you ever plug accessories into 

your cigarette lighter, they 

should have a rated current of 

less than 15 amps to avoid 

damaging the fuse. 

– 

199 . . .



■ RETAINED ACCESSORY 

POWER 

Your vehicle has retained accessory 

power, which allows you to 

operate your electrical accessories 

such as power windows or radio 

for up to 10 minutes after you turn 

the engine off, unless a front door 

is opened. 


(Park) for this feature to work. 

If, after the 10 minutes have 

passed, you still have a need for 

accessory power, you may do one 

of the following: 

• Press the keyless ignition off/ 

accessory button once to place 

the ignition in accessory mode. 

• Close all the doors and press 

the keyless ignition off/accessory 

button twice to activate 

retained accessory power for 

another 10 minutes. 

■ ULTRASONIC REAR 

PARKING ASSIST 

CAUTION 

Use care when parking your 

vehicle. Always check for 

people, other vehicles and 

obstructions. Also check for 

blind spots. 

The system is only able to 

detect objects according to the 

parameters specified in this 

section. 

The system is not designed to 

detect children, pedestrians, 

bicyclists or pets. 

Failure to follow these precautions 

can result in injuries or 

even death. 

. . . 200


Section 1 


The system will not detect 

objects that are below the 

bumper or under the vehicle, or 

some objects that are very close 

to the vehicle. 

The maximum distance at 

which the system can detect 

objects may be reduced when 

the weather is warm or the 

humidity is high. 


NOTICE 

If the rear bumper is damaged, 

the parking assist system may 

not work properly. 

This feature is designed to make 

rear and parallel parking easier by 

assisting you in determining how 

close the rear of your vehicle is to 

an object. 

The system's sensors, located on 

the rear bumper, are used to 

detect the distance to an object 

behind the vehicle. 

In order for the sensors to detect 

an object, the following conditions 

must be met: 

• The object must be at least 

25.4 cm (10 inches) above 

ground level. 

• The object must be below 

trunk level. 

• Vehicle speed must be less than 

5 km/h (3 mph). 

In order for a rear sensor to detect 

an object behind of the vehicle, 

the object must within 1.5 m (5 ft) 

of the rear bumper. 

The system's display, located 

inside the dome light, can be seen 

by looking in the inside rearview 

mirror or by turning around. 

When the vehicle speed is less than 

5 km/h (3 mph) and you shift into 

reverse gear, the system will turn 

on automatically. Three lights on 

the display will turn on to let you 

know that it is working. 

The system uses a combination of 

the display lights and chimes to 

warn you as the rear of the vehicle 

approaches an object. 

– 

201 . . .



A chime will sound when an object 

is first detected. 

Note: 

If the vehicle is traveling in R 

(Reverse) at a speed greater 

than 5 km/h (3 mph), the red 

light in the system's rear display 

will flash to alert you. 

Use the following chart to interpret 

the display warnings and 

determine the distance between 

the vehicle and an object. 

. . . 202 

Warning (Lights 

and Chimes) 

Distance 

• one amber light 1.0 m (3 

ft) to 1.5 

m (5 ft) 

• two amber lights 0.5 m (1.6 

ft) to 1.0 

m (3 ft) 

• two amber lights & 

one red light 

• continuous chime 

• two flashing amber 

lights & one flashing 

red light 

• continuous chime 

0.3 m (1 

ft) to 0.5 

m (1.6 ft) 

0.3 m (1 

ft) or less 

Ultrasonic Rear Parking 

Assist System Problems 

If a temporary condition exists that 

prevents the system from turning 

on automatically, the red light in 

the rear display will come on or 

flash when you shift to R (Reverse). 

The light may appear under the 

following conditions: 

• The system sensors or the rear 

bumper are damaged. 

• The sensors are not clean. 

• A bicycle or other object is 

attached to the rear of the 

vehicle. 

• An object is hanging out of the 

trunk. 

• The system receives vibrations 

from a large nearby vehicle or 

from heavy equipment such as 

a jackhammer. 

• A trailer hitch or a trailer hitch 

with a trailer is attached to the 

vehicle.


Section 1 

The red light will stay on or flash 

until conditions are back to 

normal. 

If the light does not turn off when 

conditions are back to normal, the 

vehicle must be driven forward 

at a minimum speed of 25 km/h 

(15 mph). 

Otherwise, if the red light stays on 

or continues to flash, there may be 

a problem with the system. The 

sensors may need to be cleaned. 

If, after cleaning the rear bumper 

and sensors and driving forward at 

a minimum speed of 25 km/h (15 

mph), the red light still appears, 


■ BATTERY LOAD 

MANAGEMENT 

This system monitors the electrical 

load of the vehicle's battery and 

automatically increases the idle 

speed of the engine to compensate 

for heavy electrical load 

conditions. 

Heavy electrical loads may occur 

when several of the following 

systems are on simultaneously: 

• Headlight High/Low Beams 

• Fog Lights 

• Climate Controls/Rear Window 

Defogger 

• Heated Seats 

• Engine Cooling Fan 

If the battery continues to 

discharge while the engine idle 

speed is elevated, some electrical 

loads will automatically be 

reduced. 

For example, the rear window 

defogger may take longer to clear 

the glass or the fan speed for the 

climate control system may 

decrease. 

To help reduce electrical load, turn 

off all unneeded accessories, such 

as the radio and air conditioner. 



• Driver Information Center 

Messages 

- BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE 

– 

203 . . .



■ ELECTRIC POWER 

MANAGEMENT 

This system monitors the temperature 

and charge status of the vehicle's 

battery and automatically 

adjusts the voltage to enhance 

performance and extend battery 

life. 

In vehicles that are equipped with 

a voltmeter gage or voltage 

display, you may see the reading 

fluctuate. This is normal. 

If the system senses a problem, a 



The Charging System Light may 

also appear on the instrument 

cluster. 



• Charging System Light 


-Vehicle Information Displays 


Messages 

■ VEHICLE 

PROGRAMMING AND 

PERSONALIZATION 

FEATURES 


features that can be individually 

programmed, memorized or 

personalized for up to two drivers. 

The number of programmable 

features varies depending on 

which vehicle options are 

purchased. 

On all vehicles, features such as 

climate control settings, radio 

preset settings, exterior lighting at 

unlock, remote lock and unlock 

confirmation and automatic door 

locks have already been 

programmed for your 

convenience. 

. . . 204


Section 1 

Note: 

The automatic door locking 

feature cannot be turned off. 

See "Programmable Automatic 

Door Locks" earlier in this 


The memory feature allows two 

different drivers (Driver 1 and Driver 

2) to store and recall their own 

memory positions for the following 

features: 

• driver's seat 

• outside rearview mirrors 

• telescopic steering column 

Depending on how the vehicle is 

programmed, a driver's settings 

are recalled either when a button 

is pressed on the driver's transmitter 

or when Driver 1 or Driver 2 is 

selected on the radio display. 

If more than one valid keyless 

access transmitter is detected 

upon opening the driver's door, 

the settings for the lowest driver 

number will be recalled. 

If your vehicle is equipped with the 

navigation system, you may also 

be able to recall memory settings 

using the system's voice recognition 

feature. 


system manual for information. 

Some features are automatically 

recalled for the identified driver. 

Certain features can be 

programmed not to recall until the 

ignition is turned off. 

Features are programmed using 

menus that are viewable on the 

sound system display. 

See "Entering Programming 

Mode" later in this section for 


Note: 

The following settings are automatically 

recalled for the identified 

driver: 

• sound system display 

language 

• radio presets 

• audio tone 

• audio volume 

• audio source (radio or CD) 

• last tuned radio station 

• CD position 

• climate control settings 

• head-up display position (if 

equipped) 

• other personalization settings 

– 

205 . . .



Any changes that are made to 

the head-up display position, 

the climate control system or 

the sound system while driving 

are automatically stored when 

the ignition is turned off. 

ENTERING PROGRAMMING 

MODE (BASE SOUND SYSTEM) 

To enter the programming mode, 

start with the ignition on or in 

accessory mode, or with retained 

accessory power active. 

The vehicle must be in P (Park) or 

the vehicle speed must be less 

than 9 km/h (6 mph). 

Do not leave the lights on with the 

engine off to keep your battery 

from draining. 

1. To identify driver 1 or driver 2, 

press any button on that 

driver's transmitter. 

The number on the back of 

each remote keyless access 

transmitter corresponds to 

driver 1 or driver 2. 

2. Press the power/volume knob 

to turn the system on. 

3. Press CNFG or press the tune/ 

select knob to enter the audio 

system's main menu. 

4. Rotate the tune/select knob to 

scroll to SETUP. 

Press the knob to enter the 

menu. 

. . . 206


Section 1 

Once you are in this menu, you 

may select one of the following 

submenus: 

• PERSONAL SETTINGS MENU 

• DRIVER SELECTION Menu 

• DRIVER EXIT SETTINGS Menu 

These menus are described in this 

section. 

See "Feature Customization (Base 

Sound System)" later in this 








set. 

ENTERING PROGRAMMING 

MODE (NAVIGATION SYSTEM) 

To enter the programming mode, 

start with the ignition on or in 

accessory mode, or with retained 

accessory power active. 


(Park) or the vehicle must be 

stopped. 

Do not leave the lights on with the 

engine off to keep your battery 

from draining. 





each remote keyless access 

transmitter corresponds to 

driver 1 or driver 2. 

2. Press the CONFIG hard key. 

The Configure menu will be 

displayed. 

3. Touch the VEHICLE soft 

button. 

The Vehicle Settings menu will 

be displayed. 

– 

207 . . .



Once you are in this menu, you 

may select one of the following 

submenus: 

• (language settings) 

• PERSONAL SETTINGS 

To select the desired menu, touch 

the soft button. 

These menus are described in this 

section. 

See "Feature Customization (Navigation 

System)" later in this 








set. 

FEATURE CUSTOMIZATION 

(BASE SOUND SYSTEM) 




To access these menus, see "Entering 

Programming Mode" earlier in 

this section. 

PERSONAL SETTINGS 

MENU 

In this menu, you can program 

your vehicle's personalization 

features to suit your preferences. 

To enter this menu, see "Entering 

Programming Mode" earlier in this 

section. 

A mark must appear next to the 

personal settings menu item to 

show that it has been selected. If it 

has not been properly selected, 

press the tune/select knob until 

the mark appears. 

When the mark appears, the entire 

list of personalization features will 

be available for programming. 

. . . 208


Section 1 

Rotate the tune/select knob to 

scroll to the feature you wish to 

change. 

Press the knob to turn the feature 

on or off. 

If a feature is on, a mark will 

appear next to the feature name. 

You can scroll through and 

customize the following features: 

Driver Greeting 

This feature allows you to type in a 

name or greeting that will appear 

on the display whenever the corresponding 

remote keyless access 

transmitter (1 or 2) is used or 

when Driver 1 or Driver 2 is selected 

on the radio display. 

If a customized name or greeting is 

not programmed, the system will 

show DRIVER 1 or DRIVER 2 

depending on which transmitter 

was used to enter the vehicle. 

Note: 

The default factory setting is 

"off". 

To enter a name, do the following: 

1. Enter the PERSONAL SET- 

TINGS MENU. 


Mode" earlier in this section. 


highlight the following item: 

- DRIVER GREETING 

Press the knob to turn this feature 

on. 

You will see a cursor on the 

screen. 

3. You can scroll through the list 

of letters, numbers and symbols 

by turning the tune/select 

knob. Press the knob once to 

make a selection. 

– 

209 . . .



4. Repeat the previous step until 

the name or greeting is 

complete. 

The names can consist of up to 

16 alpha and/or numeric 

characters. 

If you select a wrong character, 

press the F5 button, located 

on the radio, repeatedly to 

cycle through all the characters 

until you reach the character 

you wish to change. 

5. You may now either exit programming 

mode or program 

the next available feature. 

To exit programming mode, 

see "Exiting the Personal Settings 

Menu" later in this 

section. 

If you would prefer to program 

additional features rather than 

exiting programming mode, 

just press F6, or BACK, to go 

back to the personal settings 

menu. 

Once you are back in the personal 

settings menu, you will see a mark 

next to this menu item, indicating 

that this feature is on and 

programmed. 

To correct a programmed greeting 

after you have exited the input 

screen, you must turn the driver 

greeting feature off and then back 

on. 

. . . 210


Section 1 

To turn this feature off so that the 

display shows DRIVER 1 or DRIV- 

ER 2 again, do the following: 


TINGS MENU. 





- DRIVER GREETING 

Press the knob to turn this feature 


The mark next to the feature 

name will be cleared. 

Key Fob Reminder 


horn will sound three times if you 

close the driver's door while the 

vehicle is off and the remote 

keyless access transmitter is still 


To program this feature on or off: 

Note: 


"on". 


TINGS MENU. 





- KEY FOB REMINDER 

Press the tune/select knob to 

toggle this feature on and off. 

A mark will appear next to the 

feature name when this feature 

is turned on. 







section. 






menu. 

– 

211 . . .



Feature Activation by Remote- 

Start 



activate certain systems when you 

use the vehicle's remote-starter. 


Note: 


"on". 


TINGS MENU. 





- REMOTE START 





is turned on. 

With this feature turned on, 

you may activate any of the 

following systems using the 

tune/select knob: 

- CLIMATE CONTROL 

- REAR WINDOW DEFOG 

- SEAT TEMP CONTROL (If 

equipped) 

If climate control activation is 

turned on, the climate control 

settings will automatically adjust 

to where they were last set 

by the identified driver. 







section. 






menu. 

See "Vehicle Remote-Start" under 

"Keyless Access System" in Section 


. . . 212


Section 1 

Keyless Access Seat and Mirror 

Recall 

Note: This feature may not be 



memory seat and mirror positions 

will be automatically recalled 

when you unlock the vehicle using 

the unlock button on the remote 



Note: 

With the exception of the driver's 

seat position recall, which is 

on, the default factory setting is 



TINGS MENU. 





- REMOTE RECALL MEMORY 





is turned on. 







section. 






menu. 

Note: 

If this feature is on, the following 

feature cannot be selected: 

• START BUTTON RECALL 

– 

213 . . .



Keyless Ignition Start Button 

Recall 




memory seat, mirror and steering 

column positions will be automatically 

recalled when the keyless 

ignition start button is pressed. 


Note: 




TINGS MENU. 





- START BUTTON RECALL 





is turned on. 







section. 






menu. 

Note: 

If this feature is on, the following 

feature cannot be selected: 

• REMOTE RECALL MEMORY 

. . . 214


Section 1 

Seat Automatic Exit Position 



With this feature turned on, the 

driver's seat will automatically 

move to the exit position when the 

driver's door is opened while the 

vehicle is off and the shift lever is in 

P (Park). 


Note: 




TINGS MENU. 





- AUTO EXIT SEAT 





is turned on. 







section. 






menu. 

– 

215 . . .



Steering Column Automatic Exit 

Position 




steering column will automatically 

move to the exit position when the 

driver's door is opened while the 

vehicle is off and the shift lever is in 

P (Park). 


Note: 




TINGS MENU. 





- AUTO EXIT COLUMN 





is turned on. 







section. 






menu. 

. . . 216


Section 1 

Lights Flash at Unlock 

This feature allows the exterior 

lights to flash when you use the 

keyless access transmitter to 

unlock your vehicle. 

All the doors must be closed and 

the headlights and parking lights 

must be off for this feature to 

work. 

If this feature is on and either of 

the following features is also on, 

the exterior lights will also flash 

when the vehicle is unlocked 

passively: 

• Front Door Passive Unlock 

• All Doors Passive Unlock 

See "Front Door Passive Unlock" 

and "All Doors Passive Unlock" 


information. 


Note: 


"on". 


TINGS MENU. 





- LIGHTS FLASH AT UNLOCK 





is turned on. 







section. 






menu. 

– 

217 . . .



Lights Flash at Lock 


the exterior lights to flash once 

when you use the keyless access 

transmitter to lock your vehicle. 

The horn will also sound if the 

horn chirp feature is enabled. See 

"Horn Sounds at Lock" later in this 


All the doors must be closed and 

the headlights and parking lights 

must be off for this feature to 

work. 


the following features is also on, 

the exterior lights will also flash 

when the vehicle is unlocked 

passively: 

• Front Door Passive Unlock 

• All Doors Passive Unlock 

See "Front Door Passive Unlock" 

and "All Doors Passive Unlock" 


information. 


Note: 


"on". 


TINGS MENU. 





- LIGHTS FLASH AT LOCK 





is turned on. 







section. 






menu. 

. . . 218


Section 1 

Exterior Lights at Unlock 

With this setting activated, some 

exterior lights will turn on for 

about 20 seconds when you press 

the unlock button on the keyless 

access transmitter while the vehicle 

doors are closed and the vehicle 

is off or in retained accessory 

power. 

The lights will turn off before 20 

seconds have passed if a door is 

opened, the ignition is turned on 

or the lock button on the transmitter 

is pressed. 


Note: 


"on". 


TINGS MENU. 





- EXT LIGHTS AT UNLOCK 





is turned on. 







section. 






menu. 

– 

219 . . .



Horn Sounds at Lock 

If this feature is enabled, the horn 

will sound to let you know that a 

keyless access lock command has 

been received. 

All the doors must be closed for 



Note: 




TINGS MENU. 





- HORN CHIRPS AT LOCK 





is turned on. 







section. 






menu. 

. . . 220


Section 1 

Headlight Delay 

This feature allows you to designate 

the length of time that the 

exterior lights stay on after you 

exit the vehicle. 

To program this feature: 


TINGS MENU. 





- TWILIGHT DELAY 

3. Press the tune/select knob 

repeatedly to select one of the 

following time delays. 

-0 seconds 

-5 seconds 

- 15 seconds 

- 30 seconds 

- 1:30 minutes 




The default factory setting is 5 

seconds. 







section. 






menu. 

– 

221 . . .



Driver Unlock at Off 


driver's door will automatically 

unlock when the ignition is turned 



Note: 




TINGS MENU. 





- DRIVER UNLOCK AT OFF 





is turned on. 







section. 






menu. 

. . . 222


Section 1 

Doors Unlock at Off 

With this feature activated, all of 

the doors will automatically unlock 

when the ignition is turned off. 


Note: 




TINGS MENU. 





- DOORS UNLOCK AT OFF 





is turned on. 







section. 






menu. 

– 

223 . . .



Driver Unlock in Park 


driver's door automatically unlocks 



Note: 




TINGS MENU. 





- DRIVER UNLOCK IN PARK 





is turned on. 







section. 






menu. 

. . . 224


Section 1 

Doors Unlock in Park 


the doors automatically unlock 



Note: 


"on". 


TINGS MENU. 





- DOORS UNLOCK IN PARK 





is turned on. 







section. 






menu. 

– 

225 . . .



Front Door Passive Unlock 


driver's door will automatically 

unlock when you pull the driver's 

door handle. All other doors will 

remain locked. 


must be with you in order for this 


See "Door Locks" earlier in this 



Note: 




TINGS MENU. 





- KEYLESS FT DOOR UNLOCK 





is turned on. 







section. 






menu. 

. . . 226


Section 1 

All Doors Passive Unlock 


the doors will automatically unlock 

when you pull either front door 

handle. 

The remote keyless access transmitter 

must be with you in order 

for this feature to work. 




Note: 


"on". 


TINGS MENU. 





- KEYLESS DOORS UNLOCK 





is turned on. 







section. 






menu. 

– 

227 . . .



Delayed Locking 

You can program your power door 

locks to delay locking until everyone 

has gotten out of the vehicle 

and closed their doors. 

When you press the power door 

lock switch or the keyless access 

transmitter lock button the doors 

will not lock. Eight seconds after 

the last door is closed, all the doors 

will lock. 

The doors will not lock if the transmitter 

is left inside the vehicle. 


Note: 


"on". 


TINGS MENU. 





- LOCK DELAY 





is turned on. 







section. 






menu. 

. . . 228


Section 1 

Keyless Delayed Locking 

You can program your power door 

locks to delay locking until everyone 

has gotten out of the vehicle 

and closed their doors. 

Ten seconds after the last door is 

closed, all the doors will lock if at 

least one keyless access transmitter 

has been removed from the 

vehicle. 

The ignition must be off for this 


Note: 

To temporarily disable this 

feature, open a door and then 

press and hold the unlock 

button on the power door lock 

switch for three seconds. 

Passive door locking will be 

disabled until you press the lock 

button on the power door lock 

switch or the ignition is turned 

on. 


Note: 




TINGS MENU. 





- KEYLESS LOCK DELAY 





is turned on. 







section. 






menu. 

– 

229 . . .



Lock Passenger Window 

This feature allows the driver to 

customize the window lockout 

feature. With this feature activated, 

the window lockout feature 

will disable all passenger window 

controls. With this feature deactivated, 

the window lockout feature 

will disable only the rear passenger 

window controls. 

See "Windows" earlier in this 



Note: 




TINGS MENU. 





- FRONT PASS WINDOW 

LOCK 





is turned on. 







section. 






menu. 

. . . 230


Section 1 

Chime Volume Adjustment 

This feature allows you to change 

the chime volume level. The chime 

cannot be turned off completely. 

The system has two chime volume 

levels, normal and high. 


"normal". 

To program this feature to the 

desired setting: 


TINGS MENU. 





- CHIME VOLUME HIGH 

3. Press the tune/select knob to 

toggle between the two volume 

levels. 

A mark next to the feature 

name indicates that the volume 

level is set to "high". 







section. 






menu. 

– 

231 . . .



Suspension Mode 



This feature allows you to select 

between performance and touring 

suspension modes. 

Performance mode is used when 

road conditions or personal preference 

demand more control. 

This setting provides a tight, firm 

ride and precise response to road 

conditions. 

Touring mode is used for normal 

city and highway driving. It 

provides a smooth, soft ride. 


TOURING. 

To program this feature to the 

desired setting: 


TINGS MENU. 





- SUSPENSION MODE 


enter the submenu. 


highlight one of the following 

settings: 

- TOURING 

- PERFORMANCE 


select the highlighted setting. 







section. 






menu. 

. . . 232


Section 1 

EXITING THE PERSONAL 

SETTINGS MENU (BASE SOUND 

SYSTEM) 

To exit programming mode, just 

wait for the current display to time 

out. 

The audio system's main menu will 

appear after about 15 seconds. 

You can also return to the main 

menu by pressing F6, or BACK, 

repeatedly. 

DRIVER SELECTION Menu 



This menu allows two different 

drivers to store or recall their own 

memory settings. 



section. 

The following submenu will 

appear: 

The settings recalled by the 

memory system are determined by 

which keyless access transmitter (1 

or 2) is used to enter the vehicle, or 

by which driver (DRIVER 1 or 

DRIVER 2) is selected in the DRIV- 

ER SELECTION menu. 

The number on the back of each 

remote keyless access transmitter 

corresponds to driver 1 or driver 2. 

– 

• DRIVER 1 

• DRIVER 2 

• RECALL DRIVER SETTINGS 

• STORE DRIVER SETTINGS 

233 . . .



To change the selected driver 

using the DRIVER SELECTION 

menu, do the following: 

1. Enter the DRIVER SELEC- 

TION menu. 




highlight one of the following 

settings: 

- DRIVER 1 

- DRIVER 2 


select the highlighted setting. 

To store or recall settings for the 

selected driver, see the following 

later in this section: 

• RECALL DRIVER SETTINGS 

• STORE DRIVER SETTINGS 

• RECALL EXIT SETTINGS 

• STORE EXIT SETTINGS 

RECALL DRIVER SETTINGS 

To recall the selected driver's 

memory driving position, do the 

following: 


TION menu. 





- RECALL DRIVER SETTINGS 

3. Press the tune/select knob. 

If the vehicle is in P (Park), you 

will hear a beep and the memory 

position will be recalled. 

If the vehicle is not in P (Park), 

three beeps will sound and the 

memory position will not be 

recalled. 

. . . 234


Section 1 

Memory recall can be stopped by 

pressing any memory seat or 

mirror control. 

See the following under "PERSON- 

AL SETTINGS MENU" earlier in 

this section for more information: 

• Keyless Access Seat and Mirror 

Recall 

• Keyless Ignition Start Button 

Recall 

STORE DRIVER SETTINGS 

To store the selected driver's 

memory driving position, do the 

following: 

1. Adjust the driver's seat, outside 

mirrors and steering column 

to your desired settings. 


TION menu. 





- STORE DRIVER SETTINGS 


You will hear two beeps to 

confirm that your settings 

have been saved. 

5. Adjust the following features 

to suit your preference: 

- head-up display position (if 

equipped) 

- climate control settings 

- radio presets 

- audio tone 

- audio volume 

- audio source (radio or CD) 

- last tuned radio station 

- CD position 

The memory settings are now 

programmed. 

Any changes that are made to the 

head-up display position, the 

climate control system or the 

sound system while driving are 

automatically stored when the 


– 

235 . . .



DRIVER EXIT SETTINGS 

Menu 

This menu allows you to store or 

recall your memory exit settings. 



section. 

The following submenu will 

appear: 

• RECALL EXIT SETTINGS 

• STORE EXIT SETTINGS 

RECALL EXIT SETTINGS 

To recall the selected driver's 

memory exit position, do the 

following: 

1. Enter the DRIVER EXIT SET- 

TINGS menu. 





- RECALL EXIT SETTINGS 


If the vehicle is in P (Park), you 

will hear a beep and the memory 

position will be recalled. 




recalled. 




See the following under "PERSON- 

AL SETTINGS MENU" earlier in 

this section for more information: 

• Seat Automatic Exit Position 

• Steering Column Automatic 

Exit Position 

. . . 236


Section 1 

STORE EXIT SETTINGS 

To store the selected driver's 

memory exit position, do the 

following: 




2. Enter the DRIVER EXIT SET- 

TINGS menu. 





- STORE EXIT SETTINGS 


You will hear two beeps to 

confirm that your settings 

have been saved. 

FEATURE CUSTOMIZATION 

(NAVIGATION SYSTEM) 




To access these menus, see "Entering 

Programming Mode" earlier in 

this section. 

Language Selection Menu 



section. 

Use this menu to select the 

language that you would like your 

vehicle to use for information 

displays. 

– 

237 . . .



Available languages are as follows: 

• US ENGLISH 

Select US ENGLISH (FEMALE) 

to hear voice prompts in a 

female voice. 

Select US ENGLISH (MALE) to 

hear voice prompts in a male 

voice. 

• UK ENGLISH 

• FRANÇAIS (French Language) 

• DEUTSCH (German Language) 

• ITALIANO (Italian Language) 

• ESPAÑOL (Spanish Language) 

Touch the soft button next to the 

desired language. 

All information on the display will 

appear in the selected language. 

If the mapping data DVD is loaded 

in the player, system voice 

prompts will also change to the 

selected language. 

If you accidentally select a 

language that you do not understand, 

you can change the 

language by doing the following: 

1. Turn off the ignition. 

2. Open and close the door. 

3. Wait about 30 seconds. 

4. Start the vehicle. 

5. Press the hard key. 

6. Touch the (language settings) 

soft button on the system 

start-up screen. 

7. The LANGUAGE SETTINGS 

menu will be displayed. 

8. Touch the soft button next to 

the desired language. 

. . . 238


Section 1 

PERSONAL SETTINGS 

Menu (Navigation System) 



section. 

When you first enter this menu, 

the DRIVER soft button for the 

current driver (driver 1 or driver 2) 

should be highlighted. 

In order to change personal 

settings, the soft button must 

be highlighted. 

If the soft button is not highlighted, 

touch it to make the personal 

settings sub-menus accessible. 

You may select one of the following 

submenus: 

• LOCK/UNLOCK 

To select the desired menu, touch 

the soft button. 

If the page up and down arrows 

appear on a menu screen, touch 

the down arrow to display the 

menu's next page. 

To return to the previous page in 

the menu, touch the up arrow. 

Note: 

– 

This indicates that the changes 

you make in the system will be 

stored for that driver. 

Note: 

If you need to change settings 

for the other driver, touch the 

other DRIVER button. 

• LIGHTS/HORNS 

• OCCUPANT INFORMATION 

• OCCUPANT POSITION 

• REMOTE START 

If you choose not to use the 

Personal Settings menu, certain 

default settings will be active on 

your vehicle. 

The feature descriptions, 

following, will indicate your 

vehicle's default settings. 

The system start-up screen will 

appear. 

239 . . .



LOCK/UNLOCK 


your automatic door locks to 

suit your needs. 



• AUTOMATIC DOOR UNLOCK 

Touch the button to turn 

this feature on or off. 

When the button is highlighted, 

this feature is on. 

The following options are available 

when this feature is on: 

- DRIVER UNLOCK AT OFF 

With this feature activated, 

the driver's door will automatically 

unlock when the 


- ALL DOORS UNLOCK AT 

OFF 

With this feature activated, all 

of the doors will automatically 

unlock when the ignition 

is turned off. 

- DRIVER UNLOCK IN PARK 


the driver's door automatically 

unlocks when you shift 

into P (Park). 

- ALL DOORS UNLOCK IN 

PARK 


of the doors automatically 

unlock when you shift into P 

(Park). 

This is the default setting. 

Touch the soft button next to 

the desired option. 

When a feature is on, its soft 

button is highlighted. 

. . . 240


Section 1 

• KEYLESS ACCESS UNLOCK 





The following options are available 

when this feature is on: 

- ALL DOORS UNLOCK WHEN 

PULLING FRONT DOOR 

HANDLE 


of the doors will automatically 

unlock when you pull 

either front door handle. 


must be with you in order for 



- FRONT DOOR UNLOCKS 

WHEN PULLING FRONT 

DOOR HANDLE 


the driver's door will automatically 

unlock when you 

pull the driver's door handle. 

All other doors will remain 

locked. 


must be with you in order for 








– 

241 . . .



• KEYLESS ACCESS ALL DOORS 

LOCK 10 SEC AFTER LAST 

DOOR CLOSED 

You can program your power 

door locks to delay locking 

until everyone has gotten out 

of the vehicle and closed their 

doors. 

When at least one keyless 

access transmitter is removed 

from the vehicle, 10 seconds 

after the last door is closed, all 

the doors will lock. 

The ignition must be off for this 


The doors will lock even if 

another transmitter is left inside 

the vehicle. 

Note: 

-To temporarily override this 

feature, open a door and 

press and hold the power 

door lock switch for three 

seconds. 

This feature will remain disabled 

until a power door lock 

switch is pressed. 







• DELAY LOCKING 8 SEC AFTER 

LOCK IS PRESSED AND LAST 

DOOR CLOSED 

You can program your power 

door locks to delay locking 

until everyone has gotten out 

of the vehicle and closed their 

doors. 

When you press the power 

door lock switch or the remote 

keyless entry transmitter lock 

button the doors will not lock. 

Eight seconds after the last 

door is closed, all the doors will 

lock. 

. . . 242


Section 1 

The doors will not lock if the 

transmitter is left inside the 

vehicle. 






"on". 

LIGHTS/HORNS 

This feature allows you to select 

feedback options for keyless access 

transmitter functions. 

This feature also allows you to 

designate the length of time that 

the exterior lights stay on after you 

exit the vehicle. 



• LIGHTS FLASH AT UNLOCK 

This feature allows the exterior 

lights to flash when you use the 


unlock your vehicle. 

All the doors must be closed 

and the headlights and parking 

lights must be off for this feature 

to work. 

– 

243 . . .




the following features is also 

on, the exterior lights will also 

flash when the vehicle is 

unlocked passively: 



HANDLE 



DOOR HANDLE 


information: 

- PERSONAL SETTINGS Menu 

LOCK/UNLOCK 






"on". 

• LIGHTS FLASH AT LOCK 


the exterior lights to flash 

once when you use the keyless 

access transmitter to lock your 

vehicle. 

All the doors must be closed 

and the headlights and parking 

lights must be off for this feature 

to work. 


the following features is also 

on, the exterior lights will also 

flash when the vehicle is 

unlocked passively: 



HANDLE 

. . . 244


Section 1 



DOOR HANDLE 


information: 

- PERSONAL SETTINGS Menu 

LOCK/UNLOCK 






"on". 

• EXTERIOR LIGHTING AT 

UNLOCK 

With this setting activated, 

some exterior lights will turn 

on for about 20 seconds when 

you press the unlock button on 

the keyless access transmitter 

while the vehicle doors are 

closed and the vehicle is off or 

in retained accessory power. 

The lights will turn off before 

20 seconds have passed if a 

door is opened, the ignition is 

turned on or the lock button 

on the transmitter is pressed. 






"on". 

• HORN CHIRPS AT LOCK 

If this feature is enabled, the 

horn will sound to let you know 

that a keyless access lock command 

has been received. 









– 

245 . . .



• EXTERNAL AUDIBLE KEYLESS 

ACCESS TRANSMITTER IN 

VEHICLE REMINDER 


horn will sound three times if 

you close the driver's door 

while the vehicle is off and the 

keyless access transmitter is still 







"on". 

• TWILIGHT DELAY 

This feature allows you to designate 

the length of time that 

the exterior lights stay on after 

you exit the vehicle. 





Touch one of the buttons to 

select the desired setting. 

The default factory setting is 5 

seconds. 

OCCUPANT INFORMATION 



• DRIVER GREETING 

This feature allows you to 

choose between the following 

options: 

. . . 246


Section 1 

- PERSONAL GREETING 

Select this option to have a 

personal greeting appear on 

the instrument cluster when 

you turn on the vehicle. 

If you select this option, you 

must touch the EDIT button 

to display the alpha keypad. 

The names can consist of up 

to 16 alpha and/or numeric 

characters. 

Type in the desired greeting. 

When you are finished, touch 

OK. 

- STANDARD GREETING 

Select this option to have a 

standard greeting appear on 

the instrument cluster when 

you turn on the vehicle. 


display will show DRIVER 

1 or DRIVER 2 depending on 

which transmitter was used 

to enter the vehicle. 






• CHIME VOLUME 

This feature allows you to 

change the chime volume 

level. The chime cannot be 

turned off completely. 

The system has two chime volume 

levels: 

- NORMAL 


- HIGH 





– 

247 . . .



• PASSENGER WINDOW LOCK 

OUT 


window lockout feature will 

disable all passenger window 

controls. With this feature 

deactivated, the window lockout 

feature will disable only the 

rear passenger window 

controls. 







See "Windows" earlier in this 


OCCUPANT POSITION 



• RECALL MEMORY WITH 

START BUTTON ACTIVATION 


memory seat, mirror and steering 

column positions will be 

automatically recalled when 

the keyless ignition start button 

is pressed. 







• REMOTE RECALL MEMORY 


memory seat and mirror positions 

will be automatically 

recalled when you unlock the 

vehicle using the unlock button 

on the keyless access 

transmitter. 







. . . 248


Section 1 

• AUTO EXIT SEAT RECALL 


driver's seat will automatically 

move to the exit position when 

the driver's door is opened 

while the vehicle is off and the 

shift lever is in P (Park). 







• AUTO EXIT STEERING COL- 

UMN RECALL 


steering column will automatically 

move to the exit position 

when the driver's door is 

opened while the vehicle is off 

and the shift lever is in P (Park). 







REMOTE START 



activate certain systems when you 

use the vehicle's remote-starter. 

Touch the button to turn this 

feature on or off. 



The default factory setting is "off". 

– 

249 . . .



With this feature turned on, you 

may activate any of the following 

systems: 

• CLIMATE CONTROL 

If this feature is turned on, the 

climate control settings will 

automatically adjust to where 

they were last set by the identified 

driver. 

• REAR DEFOG 

• SEAT TEMPERATURE CON- 

TROL (If equipped) 

If this feature is turned on, the 

settings for the heated seats or 

the heated and ventilated seats 

(if equipped) will automatically 

adjust to where they were last 

set by the identified driver. 

Touch the soft buttons next to the 

desired options. 



. . . 250


Section 1 

MEMORY Menu 

The memory feature allows two 

different drivers (Driver 1 and Driver 

2) to store and recall their own 

memory positions for the following 

features: 

• driver's seat 

• outside rearview mirrors 

• telescopic steering column 

Note: 

Any changes that are made to 

the head-up display position (if 

equipped), audio settings, the 

climate control system or the 

navigation system while driving 

are automatically stored when 

the ignition is turned off. 

Memory settings can be stored 

and recalled directly from the 

main Setup menu. The DRIVER 1, 

DRIVER 2 and SET EXIT buttons 

will appear along the right side of 

the main Setup menu. 

To store the memory settings, 

do the following: 

1. Enter programming mode. 






- To store the position as a 

driving position, touch and 

hold either DRIVER 1 or 

DRIVER 2 to store the position 

for driver 1 or driver 2. 

- To store the position as an 

exit position for the selected 

driver, touch and hold SET 

EXIT. 

Two beeps will sound to confirm 

that the positions have been 

stored. 

– 

251 . . .



To recall a selected driver's 

memory position, do the 

following: 

1. The ignition must be on or in 

accessory mode, or Retained 

Accessory Power must be 

active. 


(Park) or the vehicle must be 

stopped. 





each keyless access transmitter 

corresponds to driver 1 or driver 

2. 

3. Press the CONFIG hard key to 

display the Setup menu. 

4. Tap DRIVER 1, DRIVER 2 or 

SET EXIT to recall the desired 

position. 

If the vehicle is in P (Park), you will 

hear a beep and the memory position 

will be recalled. 




Note: 


(Park). 




recalled. 

You can also program the memory 

features to adjust to your chosen 

positions either when you unlock 

the vehicle using the keyless access 

transmitter or when you start the 

vehicle. 


information: 

• PERSONAL SETTINGS Menu 

- OCCUPANT POSITION 

. . . 252


–– 

2 

Seat 

s 

and 

Rest 

raint 

s 

Seat Controls .................................................254 

Power Seat Controls......................................254 

Heated Front Seats .......................................255 

Heated and Ventilated Seats .........................256 

Heated Rear Seats ........................................257 

Head Restraints .............................................258 

Rear Seat Pass-Through Door ........................259 

Removable Rear Seat Cushion .......................259 

Safety Belts ....................................................260 

Lap/Shoulder Belt .........................................262 

Safety Belt Extension .....................................268 

Replacing Safety Belts ...................................268 

Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy .................269 

Safety Belt Reminder Light ............................270 

Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light ............271 

Section 2 - Seats and Restraints 

Supplemental Restraints ...............................271 

Safety Belt Pretensioners ...............................272 

Air Bag System ..............................................272 

Passenger Sensing System .............................279 

Child Restraints .............................................287 

Anchors for Child Restraints with Lower 

Attaching Points and Top Strap ...................295 

253 . . .


Seats and Restraints 

■ SEAT CONTROLS 

Power Seat Controls 

The power seat controls are located 

on the outboard sides of the 

front seats. 

The front part of the switch makes 

the front of the seat go up and 

down. 

The rear part of the switch makes 

the rear of the seat go up or down. 

Move the switch forward or back 

to move the seat forward or 

rearward. 

Front Seatback Power Reclining 

Control 

Push the top of the switch forward 

or rearward to adjust the angle of 

the seatback. 

CAUTION 

Sitting in a reclined position 

when your vehicle is in motion 

can be dangerous. Even if you 

buckle up, your safety belts 

can't do their job when the 

seatback is excessively reclined. 

For proper protection when the 

vehicle is in motion, have the 

seatback in the upright 

position. 

Then, sit well back in the seat 

and wear your safety belt 

properly. 

. . . 254


Section 2 

MEMORY SEAT, MIRRORS AND 

STEERING COLUMN (IF 

EQUIPPED) 

This feature allows two different 

drivers (driver number 1 or driver 

number 2) to store and recall their 

own driver's seat (including recliner 

and lumbar), outside mirror and 

steering wheel positions. 

– 

Power Lumbar Control 

Use the four sides of the control to 

adjust the lumbar support as 

desired. 

• Press and hold the front of the 

control to increase support. 

Press and hold the rear of the 

control to decrease support. 

• Press and hold the top of the 

control to raise the height of 

the lumbar support. 


information: 


Features 

Heated Front Seats (If 

equipped) 

Use this feature to warm the seatback 

and seat cushion. 

The buttons are located on the 

Heating and Air Conditioning 

System control panel. 

The button closest to the driver is 

for the driver's seating position. 

– 

To lower the height of the lumbar 

support, press and hold the 

bottom of the control. 

255 . . .



The button closest to the passenger 

is for the front passenger's 

seating position. 

To turn on a heated seat to the 

highest heat setting, press the top 

of the switch. 

To turn on a heated seat to the 

lowest heat setting, press the 

bottom of the switch. 

Increase or decrease the heat 

setting by pressing the top or 

bottom of the switch. 

When this feature is turned on, the 

climate control display will show 

the heated seat icon and will indicate 

the selected heat setting. 

Indicator bar(s) located next to the 

heated seat symbol will illuminate 

to show the selected temperature 

setting. 

• 3 lights (high heat) 

• 2 lights (medium heat) 

• 1 light (low heat) 

To turn off a heated seat, press the 

bottom of the switch repeatedly 

until the heated seat icon disappears 

from the climate control 

display. 

This feature will turn off automatically 

when the vehicle is turned 


Heated and Ventilated 

Seats (If equipped) 

Use this feature to heat the seatback 

and seat cushion, or to ventilate 

the seat. 

This feature will turn off automatically 

when the vehicle is turned 


The buttons are located on the 

Heating and Air Conditioning 

System control panel. 

. . . 256


Section 2 

B 

A 

The button closest to the driver is 

for the driver's seating position. 

The button closest to the passenger 

is for the front passenger's 

seating position. 

Press to turn the heated seat 

feature on and off, and to switch 

between the high, medium and 

low heat settings. 



the heated seat icon and will indicate 

the selected heat setting. 

Press to turn the ventilated seat 

feature on and off, and to switch 

between the high, medium and 

low ventilation settings. 



the ventilated seat icon and will 

indicate the selected ventilation 

setting. 

Heated Rear Seats (If 

equipped) 

The controls are located on the 

rear of the center console. 

– 

– 

257 . . .



A 


feature for the left rear passenger 

position. 


feature for the right rear passenger 

position. 

The engine must be running in 

order for the heated seat feature to 

work. 

B 

Press the desired button repeatedly 

to switch between the following 

settings: 

• 3 (high heat) 

• 2 (medium heat) 

• 1 (low heat) 

• off 

The heated seat feature will turn 

off automatically when the ignition 

is turned off. 

Head Restraints 

The front and rear head restraints 

are adjustable. 

Adjust the head restraint so that 

the top of the restraint is closest to 

the top of your head. 

Pull the head restraint up to raise 

it. 

The head restraints lock into place 

when raised. To release and lower 

a restraint, press the tab located at 

the top of the seatback. 

Front seat head restraints can also 

be tilted forward or rearward. 

. . . 258


Section 2 

Rear Seat Pass-Through 

Door 

Removable Rear Seat 

Cushion 

This feature allows you to access 

the trunk compartment from the 

rear seats. 

See "Rear Seat Pass-Through Door" 

under "Trunk Area" in Section 1. 

NOTICE 

There are exposed wires below 

the rear seat cushion. 

Do not let the metal on the seat 

cushion touch the exposed 

wires. 

Touching the exposed wires 

with metal could cause a short 

that could damage the battery 

and/or wires. 

Avoid contact between the rear 

seat and the fuse center when 

removing or installing the 

cushion. 

To remove the rear seat cushion: 

• Pull up on the front of the 

cushion to release the front 

hooks, then pull the cushion up 

and out toward the front of the 

vehicle. 

– 

– 

Do not remove covers from 

covered parts. 

Do not store anything under 

the seat. 

259 . . .



To reinstall the rear seat 

cushion: 

1. Buckle the center passenger 

position safety belt, then route 

the safety belts through the 

proper slots in the cushion. 

Don't let them get twisted. 

2. Slide the rear of the cushion 

up and under the seatback so 

the rear-locating guides hook 

into the wire loops on the 

back frame. 

3. With the seat cushion lowered, 

push rearward and then 

press down on the cushion 

until the spring locks on both 

ends engage. 

4. Check to make sure the safety 

belts are properly routed and 

that no portion of any safety 

belt is trapped under the seat. 

Also make sure that the cushion 

is secured. 

CAUTION 

If a safety belt is twisted or is not 

properly routed through the 

seat cushion, it will not provide 

the protection that is needed in 

a crash. If it hasn't been routed 

through the seat cushion at all, 

it won't be there for the next 

passenger to use. After reinstalling 

the seat cushion, check to 

be sure that the safety belts are 

properly routed and are not 

twisted. 

■ SAFETY BELTS 

CAUTION 

Do not let anyone ride where 

they cannot wear a safety belt 

properly. If you are in a crash 

and you are not wearing a safety 

belt, you can be seriously 

injured or killed. 

In a crash, a vehicle occupant 

who is not restrained properly 

could become airborne and 

strike and injure another person 

in the vehicle, or could be ejected 

from the vehicle. 

. . . 260


Section 2 


In the same crash, you might 

not be injured if you are buckled 

up. Always fasten your safety 

belt, and check that your 

passengers' belts are fastened 

properly, too. 

CAUTION 

It is extremely dangerous to 

ride in a cargo area, inside or 

outside of a vehicle. In a collision, 

people riding in these 

areas are more likely to be seriously 

injured or killed. Be sure 

everyone in your vehicle is in a 

seat and using a safety belt 

properly. 


Do not allow anyone to ride in 

any area of the vehicle that is 

not equipped with seats and 

safety belts. 

NOTICE 

Before you close the door, make 

sure the safety belt is out of the 

way. Otherwise, the belt and/or 

the vehicle body could be 

damaged. 

The safety belt information included 

here is intended for vehicle 

occupants of adult size and for 

older children who have outgrown 

booster seats. 

Older children who have 

outgrown booster seats should sit 

in a rear seat, restrained by a properly 

fastened safety belt. 

To determine whether a child is 

ready to transition out of a booster, 

into a rear seat, see "Older Children" 

under "Child Restraints" later 



small to be well restrained by the 

safety belt system, that they are 

secured in an appropriate child 

restraint. See "Child Restraints" 


CAUTION 





– 

– 

261 . . .



2. Pick up the latch plate. 

3. Pull the belt across you. Do 

not let it get twisted. 

The shoulder belt may lock if 

you pull it out very quickly. To 

unlock it, let the belt go back 

slightly then pull it across you 

more slowly. 

Lap/Shoulder Belt 

All seating positions are equipped 

with lap/shoulder belts. 

The lap/shoulder belt should be 

worn properly, as described 

below. 

To fasten the belt: 

1. Adjust the seat and sit up 

straight. 

4. Push the latch plate into the 

buckle until it clicks. Make 

sure the release button on the 

buckle faces upward or 

outward. 

Pull up on the latch plate to 

make sure it is secure. 

CAUTION 

You could be seriously injured if 

your belt is buckled in the 

wrong place. Always buckle 

your belt into the buckle nearest 

you. 

. . . 262


Section 2 

5. If your seating position is 

equipped with a shoulder belt 

height adjuster, adjust the 

shoulder belt height. 

Maladjustment of the safety 

belt height could reduce the 

effectiveness of the safety belt 

in a crash. 



- Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster 

- Shoulder Belt Comfort 

Guides 

6. Pull on the shoulder section to 

adjust the lap fit. 

You may need to pull the 

stitching on the belt through 

the latch plate to fully tighten 

the belt on smaller occupants. 

7. The driver and front passenger 

safety belts have a feature that 

will reduce the tension of the 

safety belt on the occupant's 

shoulder. 

The ignition has to be on for 


To adjust the tension of the 

shoulder belt, pull it slightly 

out away from your body, 

then release it. 

The tension reducer will turn 

off automatically when the 

belt is unbuckled or when the 

vehicle is turned off. 

– 

– 

263 . . .



The safety belt locks if there is a 

sudden stop or crash. 

When you pull the shoulder 

portion of some passenger lap/ 

shoulder belts all the way out, the 

child restraint locking feature is 

engaged. The belt can no longer 

be pulled out until it is fully retracted. 

If this happens unintentionally, 

let the belt go back in all the way 

and start again. 

To unlatch the belt: 

• Push the button on the buckle. 

The lap/shoulder belt should be 

worn as shown above. 

CAUTION 

Wear your belt fitted closely 

against the body. Do not wear 

your shoulder belt under your 

arm or behind your back. 

Make sure the belt is not twisted 

across your body, and never 

secure a safety belt over an 

armrest (if equipped). 

. . . 264


Section 2 

When using a seat belt, sit up 

straight and keep your feet on the 

floor in front of you. 

The shoulder belt should go over 

the shoulder and across the chest. 

These parts of the body are best 

able to take belt restraining forces. 

The shoulder belt should not cross 

the face or neck. 

The lap part of the belt should be 

worn low and snug on the hips, 

just touching the thighs. In a 

crash, this applies force to the 

strong pelvic bones, and you 

would be less likely to slide under 

the lap belt. If you slid under it, the 

belt would apply force to your 

abdomen. This could cause serious 

or even fatal injuries. 

Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster 

This adjusts the height of the front 

shoulder belt. You should adjust it 

so the belt goes above your shoulder 

and away from your face and 

neck. 

Maladjustment of the safety belt 

height could reduce the effectiveness 

of the safety belt in a crash. 

– 

– 

265 . . .



To move the height adjuster 

down, press the release button 

and slide it down to the proper 

height. 

To move the height adjuster up, 

just push up on the shoulder belt 

guide. 

After setting the adjuster at the 

proper height, pull it slightly down 

to make sure it is locked in place. 

A 

Shoulder Belt Comfort Guides 

Your vehicle is equipped with rear 

shoulder belt guides which 

provide comfort and support for 

some adults and children who 

have outgrown booster seats. 

These guides work by pulling the 

regular belt away from the neck 

and head. 

There is one guide for each of the 

rear outside passenger positions. 

To install the comfort guide: 

1. Pull the elastic cord out from 

between the seat and the 

inside body of the vehicle to 

remove the guide from the 

clip. 

. . . 266


Section 2 

4. Buckle, position and release 

the safety belt. 

For more information on using 

lap/shoulder belts, see "Lap/ 

Shoulder Belt" earlier in this 

section. 

– 

2. Place the guide over the belt, 

inserting the belt edges into 

the slots of the guide. 

3. Be sure the belt is not twisted 

and that the elastic cord is 

under the belt and the guide 

is on top. 

CAUTION 

The shoulder belt should go 

over the shoulder and across 

the chest. These parts of the 

body are best able to take belt 

restraining forces. 

Wearing a safety belt improperly 

could cause serious injury. 

– 

267 . . .



To remove the comfort guide: 

1. Squeeze the belt edges 

together and remove the belt 

from the comfort guide. 

2. Pull the comfort guide upward 

to expose the storage clip. 

3. Slide the comfort guide back 

onto its storage clip. 

4. Tuck the storage clip between 

the seatback and the interior 

body. 

Be sure to leave the loop of the 

elastic cord exposed. 

Safety Belt Extension 

If the safety belt is not long 

enough to fasten around you, your 

dealer will order you an extender. 

When you go in to order it, take 

the heaviest coat you will wear, so 

the extender will be long enough 

for you. 

Use the extender only for the seat 

it is made to fit. Do not let someone 

else use the extender. To wear 

it, just attach it to the regular safety 

belt. 

Follow the manufacturer's 

instructions. 

Never use a belt extender when 

securing a child restraint. 

Replacing Safety Belts 

CAUTION 

A crash can damage the 

restraint systems so that they 

do not provide proper protection. 

This could result in serious 

injury or even death in a collision. 

To help make sure your 

restraint systems are working 

properly after a crash, have 

them inspected and replaced, 

as necessary, as soon as 

possible. 

. . . 268


Section 2 

If you have been in a collision 

where the belts may have been 

stretched, or if the safety belt is cut 

or damaged, the belt needs to be 

replaced. Repairs may be necessary 

even if the safety belt was not 

used at the time of the collision. 

Have the restraint system inspected 

after a collision. 

Your vehicle is equipped with safety 

belt pretensioners for the driver 

and front passenger. Pretensioners 

work only once. If the pretensioners 

were activated in a collision, 

they will need to be replaced. If 

the air bag light stays on or comes 

on while you are driving, have the 

safety belt pretensioners checked. 

See "Safety Belt Pretensioners" 

under "Supplemental Restraints" 

later in this section for more information 

about this feature. 

CAUTION 

Safety procedures must always 

be observed when disposing of 

the vehicle or vehicle parts. 

Disposal should only be 

performed by an authorized 

service center, to help protect 

the environment and your 

health. 

Safety Belt Use During 

Pregnancy 

Safety belts work for everyone, 

including pregnant women. Like 

all occupants, they are more likely 

to be seriously injured if they do 

not wear safety belts. 

A pregnant woman should wear a 

lap/shoulder belt, and the lap 

portion should be worn as low as 

possible throughout the 

pregnancy. 

– 

– 

269 . . .



The best way to protect the fetus is 

to protect the mother. When a 

safety belt is worn properly, it is 

more likely that the fetus will not 

be hurt in a crash. For pregnant 

women, as for anyone, the key to 

making safety belts effective is 

wearing them properly. 

The safety belt reminder light is 

located in the instrument cluster. 

The chime and light may repeat if 

the driver remains unbuckled and 

the vehicle is in motion. 

If the driver's belt is already buckled, 

neither the chime nor the light 

will come on. 

Safety Belt Reminder Light 

When the ignition is first turned 

on, a chime will come on for several 

seconds to remind you to fasten 

your safety belts. 

The safety belt light will also come 

on and stay on for several seconds. 

Then it will flash for several more. 

. . . 270


Section 2 

Passenger Safety Belt 

Reminder Light 

The passenger safety belt reminder 

light is located on the overhead 

console, in the passenger sensing 

system status bar. 

If the passenger air bag is enabled 

when you start the vehicle, after 

several seconds, a chime will come 

on for several seconds to remind 

the front passenger to fasten their 

safety belt. The passenger safety 

belt light will also come on and 

stay on for several seconds, and 

then it will flash for several seconds 

more. If the passenger's belt is 

buckled, neither the chime nor the 

light will come on. 

The chime and light will repeat if 

the passenger remains unbuckled 

and the vehicle is in motion. 

See "Passenger Sensing System" 


■ SUPPLEMENTAL 

RESTRAINTS 

CAUTION 

A crash can damage the 

restraint systems in your vehicle. 

A damaged restraint system 

may not properly protect the 

person using it, resulting in serious 

injury or even death in a 

crash. 

Have the restraint systems 

inspected after a collision. 

Make any necessary replacements 


– 

– 

271 . . .



SAFETY BELT 

PRETENSIONERS 

Your vehicle is equipped with safety 

belt pretensioners. Pretensioners 

help tighten the safety belts 

during the early stages of a moderate 

to severe frontal or near frontal 

collision if the threshold conditions 

for the pretensioners are met. 

The pretensioners will also help 

tighten the safety belts during a 

side collision. 

The pretensioners are located in 

the driver and front passenger 

safety belt assemblies. 

Pretensioners work only once. If 

the pretensioners are activated in a 

collision, they will need to be 

replaced. 

CAUTION 








health. 

AIR BAG SYSTEM 

Your vehicle is equipped with two 

air bags that may inflate from the 

center of the steering wheel and 

from the passenger side of the 

instrument panel during a frontal 

collision. 

These are dual-stage frontal air 

bags which adjust the amount of 

restraint according to crash severity. 

For moderate frontal impacts, 

the air bags inflate at a level less 

than full deployment. For more 

severe frontal impacts, full deployment 

occurs. 

. . . 272


Section 2 

If battery power is available, the 

doors may automatically unlock 

and the interior lights will come on 

when an air bag inflates. 

The hazard warning flashers will 

also turn on when an air bag 

inflates. 

You can lock the doors, turn the 

interior lights off and turn the 

hazard warning flashers off by 

using the controls for those 

features. 

Vehicles equipped with dual-stage 

air bags also have electronic frontal 

sensors which help the system 

distinguish between a moderate 

and more severe frontal impact. 

Your vehicle is also equipped with 

two side impact air bags that may 

inflate from the outboard sides of 

the front seatbacks during a side 

collision. 

Your vehicle is also equipped with 

two roof-mounted side impact air 

bags that may inflate during a side 

collision to protect the driver, the 

front passenger and the two 

passengers directly behind them. 

– 

– 

273 . . .



CAUTION 

Air bags are designed to be 

used with the safety belts. 







Everyone in your vehicle who 

has outgrown child restraints 

should wear a safety belt properly, 

whether or not there is an 

air bag for that person. 


Both the safety belt restraint 

system and the air bag restraint 

system are designed to best 

protect adults. 

Anyone who is up against, or 

very close to, an inflating air 

bag could be seriously injured 

or killed. 


small to be well restrained by 

the safety belt system, that they 

are secured in an appropriate 

child restraint. See "Child 

Restraints" later in this section. 

CAUTION 



injure you. Safety belts help 

keep you in position in case an 

air bag inflates in a collision. 

The driver should sit as far back 

as possible while still able to 

maintain control of the vehicle. 

Accident statistics show that children 

are safer if they are restrained 

in the rear seat. 

It is therefore recommended that 

children in child restraints and 

older children who are large 

enough to wear a safety belt be 

secured in a rear seat position. 

. . . 274


Section 2 

CAUTION 

CAUTION 

CAUTION 


restraint in the front passenger 

seating position could be seriously 

injured or killed if the 

passenger's air bag inflates. This 

is because the back of the 

restraint would be very close to 

the inflating air bag. 

A child in a forward-facing child 




passenger's air bag inflates and 

the passenger seat is in a 

forward position. 






Although some vehicles are 

equipped with a passenger air 

bag deactivation feature which 

is designed to turn off the 

passenger's frontal air bag 

under certain conditions, no 

system is fail-safe. No one can 

guarantee that an air bag will 

not deploy under some unusual 

circumstance, even though the 

system is deactivated. 

In fact, because the risk to a 

rear-facing child is so great if 

the air bag deploys, there is a 

label on your vehicle's sun visor 

that cautions you never to put a 

rear-facing child seat in the 

front. 

It is therefore recommended 

that child restraints be secured 

in a rear seat position even if the 

front passenger's air bag is 


Frontal air bags are not 

designed to inflate at all in rollovers, 

rear collisions, or in many 

side crashes. 

Seat- and roof-mounted side 

impact air bags are not 

designed to inflate in rollovers, 

or in rear or frontal crashes. 

– 

– 

275 . . .



CAUTION 

Do not attach anything to the 

area from where the air bag 

inflates. 

If something is between an 

occupant and an air bag, the air 

bag might not inflate properly 

or it might force the object into 

the occupant, causing severe 

injury or even death. 

The path of an inflating air bag 

must be kept clear of any 

objects at all times. 

Changing or moving any parts of 

the front seats, safety belts, the air 

bag sensing and diagnostic 

module, steering wheel, instrument 

panel, roof-rail air bag 

modules, ceiling headliner or pillar 

garnish trim, front sensors, side 

impact sensors, rollover sensor 

module, or air bag wiring can 

affect the operation of the air bag 

system. 

Adding equipment to the front or 

sides of your vehicle may keep the 

air bags from working properly. 

Check with your dealer before 

adding equipment to the outside 

of your vehicle. 

CAUTION 

Do not secure anything to the 

roof of your vehicle by routing 

rope or tiedowns through any 

door or window opening. This 

will block the inflation path of a 

roof-mounted side impact air 

bag. 

Do not use seat accessories that 

block the path of a seat-mounted 

side impact air bag. 

Vehicle occupants should not 

lean or sleep against the doors 

or side windows. 

. . . 276


Section 2 

CAUTION 

When an air bag inflates, it 

leaves dust in the air. This dust 

could cause breathing problems 

for people with a history of 

asthma or other breathing trouble. 

To avoid this, everyone in 

the vehicle should get out as 

soon as it is safe to do so. If you 

are unable to get out of the 

vehicle, then open a window or 

door. 

If you experience breathing 

problems following air bag 

deployment, you should seek 

medical attention. 

In many severe crashes, windshields 

are broken by vehicle 

deformation. Additional windshield 

breakage may also occur 

from the inflation of the front 

passenger air bag. 

The air bag only inflates once. It 

must be replaced after a collision. 

Let only qualified technicians work 

on the air bag system. 

Your vehicle has computer 

modules that may record information 

after a collision. 

During a crash, your vehicle may 

record information about the 

condition of the vehicle and how it 

was operated. 

See "Data Collection and Event 

Data Recorders" in Section 5 for 


CAUTION 

After an air bag inflates, the air 

bag components may be hot. 

Do not touch the air bag 

components. 

NOTICE 

Do not damage the air bag 

covers. 

If you damage the coverings, 

the air bag may not work 

properly. 

If an air bag cover is damaged, 

you may have to replace the air 

bag module or both the 

module and the air bag cover. 

Do not open or break the air 

bag coverings. 

– 

– 

277 . . .



CAUTION 

For up to ten seconds after the 

ignition is turned off and the 

battery is disconnected, an air 

bag can still inflate during 

improper service. 



injure you. 

Avoid yellow connectors. 

Be sure that you or the person 

performing work is qualified 

and follows proper procedures. 

CAUTION 








health. 

AIR BAG LIGHT 

The air bag light on your instrument 

cluster flashes when you 

start the vehicle to indicate that 

the restraint is in good working 

order. 

See "Air Bag Light" in Section 1 for 


CAUTION 

Have your vehicle serviced right 

away if the air bag light doesn't 

come on, or stays on, or comes 

on when you are driving. 

. . . 278


Section 2 

PASSENGER SENSING 

SYSTEM 


Passenger Sensing System. 

The passenger sensing system 

turns off the front passenger's 

frontal air bag under certain 

conditions. 

NOTE: 

The driver's frontal and seatmounted 

side-impact air bags 

and the roof-mounted sideimpact 

air bags are not part of 

this system. 

When you start the vehicle, the 

system will perform a self-check. 

The air bag "on" and "off" indicators 

will appear briefly in the 

passenger sensing system status 

bar (located on the overhead 

console). 

When the system self-check is 

complete, one of the indicators 

will stay on to indicate whether the 

front passenger's frontal air bag is 


Note: 

You may not see the system 

self-check when using the vehicle 

remote-start feature to start 

the engine. 

See "Vehicle Remote-Start" in 


Sensors in the front passenger seat 

detect the presence of an occupant 

to determine if the passenger's 

frontal air bag should be on 

or off. 

– 

– 

279 . . .



The passenger sensing system will 

turn off the passenger frontal air 

bag under the following 

conditions: 

• The front passenger seat has no 

weight placed on it for a period 

of time. 

• The system detects a child in a 

rear-facing infant seat. 


forward-facing child restraint. 


booster seat. 

• The front passenger seat is 

occupied by a smaller person, 

such as a child who has outgrown 

child restraints or a very 

small adult. 

It is important to note that for 

some children who have outgrown 

child restraints and for 

very small adults, the system 

may or may not turn off the air 

bag, depending upon the person's 

seating posture and body 

build. 

Everyone in your vehicle who 

has outgrown child restraints 

should wear a safety belt properly, 

whether or not there is an 

air bag for that person. 

The passenger air bag is also 

turned off if there is a critical problem 

with the frontal air bag system 

or with the passenger sensing 

system. 







console). 

The "off" indicator will stay on if 

the front passenger's air bag is 

deactivated. 

. . . 280


Section 2 

When the system senses that a 

person of adult size is sitting in the 

front passenger seat, the front 

passenger's frontal air bag will be 

reactivated and the "on" indicator 

will appear in the passenger air 

bag on/off indicator. 



• System Operation with a Child 

Restraint 

• System Operation with Adult 

Passengers 

Aftermarket equipment, such as 

seat covers, seat heaters and seat 

massagers can affect the performance 

of the passenger sensing 

system. Avoid using aftermarket 

equipment if your vehicle is 

equipped with this system. 

CAUTION 

Keep the area under the 

passenger seat or between the 

passenger seat cushion and 

seatback clear of objects to 

allow for the proper operation 

of the passenger sensing 

system. 

CAUTION 




this system. 

The adult-sized passenger may 

not have the protection of the 

air bag system. Have the vehicle 

serviced right away. 

See "Air Bag Light" in Section 1 


– 

– 

281 . . .



SYSTEM OPERATION WITH A 

CHILD RESTRAINT 









CAUTION 





















CAUTION 

Although your vehicle is 




passenger's air bag under 

certain conditions, no system is 

fail-safe. No one can guarantee 

that an air bag will not deploy 

under some unusual circumstance, 

even though the system 

is deactivated. 







front. 






. . . 282


Section 2 

When the vehicle is started with a 

child restraint installed in the front 

passenger seat, the "off" indicator 

should appear in the passenger 

sensing system status bar (located 

on the overhead console) after the 

system has completed its selfcheck. 

If a child restraint has been 

installed and the Passenger Sensing 

System has not deactivated the 

air bag, turn the vehicle off. 

Remove and then reinstall the 

child restraint. 


instructions. 

A thick layer of material (such as a 

blanket) or aftermarket equipment 

(such as seat covers, heaters or 

massagers) located between the 

seat cushion and the child restraint 

or small occupant can affect how 

the passenger sensing system 

operates. Remove any additional 

material from the seat cushion 

before reinstalling or securing the 

child restraint or small occupant. 

If, after you restart the vehicle, the 

"on" indicator still appears, check 

that the vehicle's seatback is not 

pressing the child restraint into the 

seat cushion. If it is, slightly recline 

the vehicle's seatback and adjust 

the seat cushion if possible. 

Also make sure that the child 

restraint is not trapped under the 

vehicle's head restraint. If this 

happens, adjust the head restraint. 

– 

– 

283 . . .



CAUTION 

If the "on" indicator still 

appears, secure the restraint in 

a rear seat position and have 

your vehicle serviced as soon as 

possible. 

See "Child Restraints" later in this 

section. 

SYSTEM OPERATION WITH 

ADULT PASSENGERS 

When the system senses that a 

person of adult size is sitting in the 

front passenger seat, the front 

passenger's frontal air bag will be 

reactivated and the "on" indicator 

will appear in the passenger air 

bag on/off indicator. 

In order for the system to correctly 

assess the status of the front 

passenger's air bag, the passenger 

must sit properly in the seat. 

To maintain the correct seating 

position, especially during vehicle 

maneuvers and braking, the 

passenger should wear the safety 

belt. Be sure the safety belt is 

adjusted properly at all times. 

See "Safety Belts" earlier in this 

section for additional safety belt 

instructions and safety 

information. 

Note: 


portion of the front passenger 

lap-shoulder belt all the way 

out, the child restraint locking 

feature is engaged. The belt can 

no longer be pulled out until it 

is fully retracted. 

If the passenger sensing system 

does not recognize that a person 

of adult size is sitting in the seat, 

turn the vehicle off. 

. . . 284


Section 2 

A thick layer of material (such as a 

blanket) or aftermarket equipment 

(such as seat covers, heaters or 

massagers) can affect how the 

passenger sensing system operates. 

Remove any additional material 

from the seat. 

Move the seatback to the upright 

position. 

Make sure the passenger sits in an 

upright position, centered on the 

seat cushion with his/her legs 

comfortably extended. 

Restart the vehicle. This should 

allow the system to detect the 

person and enable the passenger's 

air bag. 

It may take about two to three 

minutes for the system to detect 

the passenger and enable the air 

bags. 

PASSENGER AIR BAG ON/OFF 

INDICATOR 







console). 

When the system self-check is 

complete, one of the indicators 

will stay on to indicate whether the 

front passenger's frontal air bag is 


Note: 

You may not see the system 

self-check when using the vehicle 

remote-start feature to start 

the engine. 

See "Vehicle Remote-Start" in 


If the two indicators never appear 

when the vehicle is first started, or 

if after several seconds both indicators 

remain lit, there may be a 

problem with the system. See your 


– 

– 

285 . . .



CAUTION 




this system. 

The adult-sized passenger may 

not have the protection of the 

air bag system. Have the vehicle 

serviced right away. 

See "Air Bag Light" in Section 1 


CAUTION 

When the vehicle is started with 

a child restraint installed in the 

front passenger seat, the "off" 

indicator should appear in the 



console) after the system has 

completed its self-check. 

If the "on" indicator appears 

when you have installed a child 


seat, it means that the front 

passenger's air bag system is 

still active. 






















. . . 286


Section 2 

CAUTION 

Although your vehicle is 




passenger's air bags under 

certain conditions, no system is 

fail-safe. No one can guarantee 

that an air bag will not deploy 

under some unusual circumstance, 

even though the system 

is deactivated. 






See "System Operation with a 

Child Restraint" earlier in this 


Also, see "Passenger Safety Belt 

Reminder Light", earlier in this 

section. 

CHILD RESTRAINTS 

CAUTION 

Do not leave children unattended 

in the vehicle. 

Children left unattended could 

play with the safety belts. The 

belt could become wrapped 

around the child's neck and 

continue to tighten. The child 

could be injured or killed. 

Never allow children to play 



After installing a child restraint, 

pull the shoulder belt all the 

way out of the retractor to set 

the lock (if equipped). 

Secure any unused safety belts 

behind the child restraint so 

children cannot reach them. 

CAUTION 

Never hold a baby in your arms 

while riding in a vehicle. During 

a crash a baby will become so 

heavy you can't hold it. For 

example, in a crash at only 

40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg 

(12 lbs) baby will suddenly 

become a 110 kg (240 lb) force 

on your arms. The baby would 

be almost impossible to hold. 

Secure the baby in an infant 

restraint. 

– 

– 

287 . . .



CAUTION 

An unsecured child restraint 

may be tossed about the vehicle 

in a collision or sudden stop. 

You or your passengers could 

be injured. Secure the child 

restraint properly even if a child 

is not using the restraint. 

For most types of child restraints, 

there are several different models 

available. 

When choosing a child restraint, 

take into consideration not only 

the child's weight, size and age, 

but also whether the restraint will 

be compatible with your vehicle. 

The restraint manufacturer's 

instructions should state the 

weight and height limitations for 

the particular restraint. 

. . . 288


Section 2 

CAUTION 

CAUTION 

CAUTION 

Infants need complete support, 

including support for the head 

and neck. In a crash, an infant 

in a rear-facing child seat settles 

into the restraint, so the crash 

forces can be distributed across 

the strongest parts of an infant's 

body, the back and shoulders. 

Infants should always be 

secured in appropriate infant 

restraints. 

A young child's hip bones are 

still so small that the vehicle's 

regular safety belt may not 

remain low on the hip bones, as 

it should. Instead, it may settle 

up around the child's abdomen. 

In a crash, the belt would apply 

force on a body area that is 

unprotected by any bony structure. 

This alone could cause 

serious or fatal injuries. 

To reduce the risk of serious or 

fatal injuries, young children 

should always be secured in 

appropriate child restraints. 

A child can be seriously injured 

or killed in a crash if the child is 

not properly secured in the 

child restraint. Follow the 

instructions that come with the 

restraint. 

These restraints use the safety belt 

system or anchoring system in 

your vehicle, but the child also has 

to be secured within the restraint 

to help reduce the chance of 

personal injury. Follow the instructions 

that come with the restraint. 

– 

– 

289 . . .



CAUTION 

If a child restraint is not properly 

secured in the vehicle, the 

restraint will not be able to 

protect a child sitting there. In a 

crash, the child could be seriously 

injured or killed. 

Before installing a child restraint in 

the front passenger position, 

remove any additional material 

from the seat such as blankets, 

cushions, seat covers, seat heaters 

or seat massagers. 



information. 


portion of some passenger lap/ 

shoulder belts all the way out, the 

child restraint locking feature is 

engaged. The belt can no longer 

be pulled out until it is fully 

retracted. 

If you are using a vehicle safety 

belt equipped with the child 

restraint locking feature to secure 

the restraint, be sure that after you 

have routed the belt through the 

restraint and have buckled the belt 

that you pull the shoulder portion 

all the way out of the retractor to 

engage the belt lock. Then, feed 

the shoulder belt back into the 

retractor while pushing down on 

the restraint. 

. . . 290


Section 2 


instructions. 

Push and pull the child restraint in 

different directions to make sure it 

is secure. 


child restraint anchors and the 

restraint that you need to secure is 

equipped with anchor attaching 

points, see "Anchors for Child 

Restraints with Lower Attaching 

Points and Top Strap" later in this 

section for information on securing 

the restraint. 

Child restraints that require the 

top strap to be anchored can only 

be used in rear seating positions. 

There are no anchor brackets available 

for front seating positions. 

See "Top Strap" later in this 

section. 









CAUTION 









– 

– 

291 . . .
















CAUTION 

Although some vehicles are 




passenger's frontal air bag 

under certain conditions, no 

system is fail-safe. No one can 

guarantee that an air bag will 

not deploy under some unusual 

circumstance, even though the 

system is deactivated. 







front. 






CAUTION 

When the vehicle is started with 

a child restraint installed in the 

front passenger seat, the "off" 

indicator should appear in the 



console) after the system has 

completed its self-check. 

If the "on" indicator appears 

when you have installed a child 


seat, it means that the front 

passenger's air bag system is 

still active. 



. . . 292


Section 2 

Use the following chart to determine which seats in the vehicle are suitable 

for the carriage of child restraint systems. 

Mass 

Group(Age 

Group) 

< 10 kg (0-9 

months) 



To determine whether a child is 

ready to transition out of a booster 

into a rear seat, check your local 

laws and check the following: 

• Have the child sit all the way 

back on the seat. Do the child's 

knees bend at the seat edge? 

If you answered "yes" to this 

question, proceed to the next 

question. 

If you answered "no" to this 

question, the child should continue 

to use a booster seat. 

• With the child sitting all the 

way back on the seat, with 

knees bent at the seat edge, 

buckle the safety belt around 

the child. 

Does the shoulder belt rest on 

the shoulder? 



question. 


question, try to use the rear 

shoulder belt comfort guide. 

See "Shoulder Belt Comfort 

Guides" earlier in this section. 

If the shoulder belt still does 

not rest on the shoulder, the 

child should continue to use a 

booster seat. 

• Does the lap belt fit low and 

snug on the hips, touching the 

thighs? 



question. 




• Can the proper safety belt fit 

be maintained for the duration 

of the trip? 





question, an older child should 

wear a lap/shoulder belt and 

get the additional restraint a 

shoulder belt can provide. 

. . . 294


Section 2 

The shoulder belt should not cross 

the face or neck. 

The lap part of the belt should be 

worn low and snug on the hips, 

just touching the thighs. In a 

crash, this applies force to the 

strong pelvic bones. 

Otherwise, in a crash, the belt 

would apply force to the child's 

abdomen. This could cause serious 

or even fatal injuries. 

CAUTION 







CAUTION 





See "Safety Belts" earlier in this 

section for additional safety belt 

instructions and safety 

information. 

A B A 

Anchors for Child 

Restraints with Lower 

Attaching Points and Top 

Strap 

This system is designed to make 

installation of child restraints 

easier. 

Use this system instead of the vehicle's 

safety belts to secure a child 

restraint. 

With this feature you will have 

anchors where the seatback 

meets the seat cushion in each rear 

seat. 

– 

– 

295 . . .



A B A 

To use the system, you need either 

a forward-facing child restraint 

that has attaching points at its 

base (and possibly a top strap), or 

a rear-facing child restraint that 

has attaching points at its base. 

CAUTION 

If a child restraint is not 

attached to its anchorage 

points, the restraint will not be 

able to protect a child sitting 

there. In a crash, the child could 

be seriously injured or killed. 

Make sure that the child 

restraint is properly installed 

using the anchorage points, or 

use the vehicle's safety belts to 

secure the restraint. Follow the 


restraint. 

See "Child Restraints" earlier in this 

section. 

Also, see "Securing a Child 

Restraint with Lower Attaching 

Points and Top Strap" later in this 

section. 

A 

B 

TOP STRAP 

A child restraint may have a single 

or a dual top strap. A single 

attachment at the end of the 

top strap connects the child 

restraint to the top strap anchor in 

your vehicle. 

If your child restraint requires that 

the top strap be anchored, do not 

use the restraint unless it is 

anchored properly. 

C 

B 

. . . 296


Section 2 

CAUTION 

Do not install a child restraint 

using only the top strap anchor. 

Make sure that the child 

restraint is properly installed 

using the anchorage points, or 

use the vehicle's safety belts to 

secure the restraint. Follow the 


restraint. 

See "Child Restraints" earlier in 

this section. 

Child restraints that require the 

top strap to be anchored can only 

be used in rear seating positions. 

There are no anchor brackets available 

for front seating positions. 

CAUTION 

Each bracket is designed to 

anchor only one child restraint. 

Attaching more than one child 

restraint to a single bracket 

could cause the anchor to come 

loose or even break during a 

collision. A child or others may 

be injured. To prevent injury to 

people and damage to the vehicle, 

attach only one child 

restraint per bracket. 

– 

– 

297 . . .



Anchor brackets for the rear seat 

positions are located behind the 

seats on the filler panel. To access 

a bracket, open the trim cover. 

Be sure to use an anchor point 

located on the same side of the 

vehicle as the seating position 

where the child restraint will be 

placed. 

Only attach one top strap to each 

anchor bracket. 

For a forward-facing child 

restraint, attach the top strap to 

the top strap anchor. 

• If the seat does not have a head 

restraint or a head rest, route 

the top strap directly over the 

seatback. 

• If the seat has an adjustable 

head restraint or head rest and 

the child restraint has a single 

or dual top strap, route the top 

strap under the head restraint 

or head rest and between the 

posts. 

Consult the manufacturer's 

instructions for the child restraint 

to determine when and how to 

tighten the top strap. 

. . . 298


Section 2 

SECURING A CHILD RESTRAINT 

WITH LOWER ATTACHING 

POINTS AND TOP STRAP 

CAUTION 



Children left unattended could 

play with the safety belts. The 

belt could become wrapped 

around the child's neck and 

continue to tighten. The child 

could be injured or killed. 

Never allow children to play 


After installing a child restraint, 

pull the shoulder belt all the 

way out of the retractor to set 

the lock (if equipped). 

Secure any unused safety belts 

behind the child restraint so 

children cannot reach them. 

NOTICE 

Contact between the child 

restraint's lower attachment 

parts and the vehicle's safety 

belt assembly may result in 

damage. 

If necessary, move the fastened 

safety belt so that the belt 

assembly and the lower attachment 

parts do not rub together. 

NOTICE 

Folding an empty rear seat with 

the safety belts secured may 

cause damage to the safety belt 

or the seat. 

Always remember to return the 

safety belts to their normal, 

stowed position before folding 

the rear seat. 

To secure a child restraint 

designed for this system, use the 

following procedure: 

1. Locate the anchors where the 

seatback meets the back of 

the seat cushion. 

2. Place the child restraint on the 

seat. 

– 

– 

299 . . .



3. Attach the child restraint's 

attachment points to the 

anchors in the vehicle, and 

tighten as necessary. Follow 

the instructions that come 

with the restraint. 

CAUTION 

Each top strap anchor or set of 

attaching points is designed to 

hold only one child restraint. 

Attaching more than one child 

restraint to a single anchor or 

attaching point could cause the 

anchor or attaching point to 

come loose or even break 

during a collision. A child or 

others may be injured. To 

prevent injury to people and 

damage to the vehicle, attach 

only one child restraint per 

anchor or attaching point. 

4. For a forward-facing child 

restraint, attach the top strap 

to the top strap anchor. 

See "Top Strap" earlier in this 

section. 

Consult the manufacturer's instructions 

for the child restraint 

to determine when and 

how to tighten the top strap. 

5. Push and pull the child 

restraint in different directions 

to make sure it is secure. 

To remove the child restraint, 

unhook the top strap (if equipped) 

from the top strap anchor and 

then disconnect the anchor 

points. 

If you have been in a collision, the 

anchoring system may have been 

damaged. Repairs may be necessary 

even if the anchoring system 

was not used at the time of the 

collision. Have the anchoring and 

restraint systems inspected after a 

collision. 

. . . 300


––– 

3 

Star 

ting 

and 

Operatin 

g 

New Vehicle Break-In Period.........................303 

Keys................................................................303 

Immobilizer...................................................305 

Theft Deterrent System.................................307 

Keyless Access System ...................................313 

Operation .....................................................314 

Transmitter Range.........................................318 

Battery Replacement .....................................319 

Matching Transmitters ..................................320 

Vehicle Remote-Start.....................................321 

Keyless Ignition .............................................324 

Retained Accessory Power .............................326 

Starting Instructions......................................327 

Engine Starting .............................................327 

Computer Controlled Cranking System.........328 

Engine Starting Problems ..............................328 

Section 3 - Starting and Operating Instructions 

Stopping the Engine .....................................330 

Engine Block Heater ......................................331 

Automatic Transmission................................332 

All-Wheel Drive .............................................336 

Vehicle Parking..............................................337 

Shifting Into P (Park).....................................337 

Shifting Out of P (Park) .................................338 

Torque Lock..................................................339 

Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist ........................339 

Traction .........................................................339 

Traction Control ...........................................339 

Stabilitrak ® System........................................340 

Limited-Slip Rear Axle ..................................340 

Steering .........................................................340 

Power Steering .............................................340 

Speed Sensitive Steering ...............................340 

301 . . .


Section 3 - Starting and Operating Instructions 

Brakes ............................................................340 

Disc Brake Wear Indicators ............................341 

Brake Adjustment..........................................341 

Brake Pedal Travel .........................................341 

Anti-Lock Brake System .................................342 

Parking Brake ................................................342 

Brake Assist ...................................................343 

Suspension.....................................................344 

Automatic Ride Control ................................344 

Vehicle Loading .............................................344 

Tire and Loading Information Label...............345 

Certification Label .........................................346 

Trailer Towing ...............................................346 

STS Models Only...........................................346 

Hitches .........................................................349 

Safety Chains ................................................350 

Trailer Brakes ................................................350 

Trailer Turn Signals .......................................350 

Parking on Hills .............................................351 

Maintenance When Trailer Towing ...............352 

Recreational Vehicle Towing.........................352 

. . . 302


Section 3 

■ NEW VEHICLE BREAK- 

IN PERIOD 

NOTICE 

Your vehicle doesn't need an 

elaborate "break-in". But it will 

perform better in the long run if 

you follow these guidelines: 

• Don't drive at a constant 

speed - fast or slow - for the 

first 800 km (500 miles). 

Don't make full-throttle starts. 

NOTICE (Continued) 

•Avoid making hard stops for 

the first 320 km (200 miles) 

or so. Hard stops with new 

brake linings can mean premature 

wear. Follow this 

"break-in" guideline every 

time you get new brake 

linings. 

•Avoid downshifting to brake 

or slow your vehicle. 

• Don't tow a trailer during 

break-in. 

Following break-in, engine 

speed and load can be gradually 

increased. 

■ KEYS 

CAUTION 



transmitter. 










move. 



– 

– 

– 



303 . . .


Starting and Operating Instructions 

The vehicle comes with a key 

which is used for the driver's door, 

glove box, and rear seat passthrough 

door. 

See "Rear Seat Pass-Through Door" 

under "Trunk Area" in Section 1. 

A 



To remove the key, press the 

button near the bottom of the 

transmitter and pull the key out. 

Always press the button before 

pulling the key out of the 

transmitter. 

Note that there is no lock cylinder 

for the trunk or for the passenger's 

door. 

Your vehicle also comes with a key 

that can be used to unlock the gas 

cap. 

Unlike more traditional vehicles, 

your vehicle is equipped with a 

keyless access system for both 

vehicle entry and vehicle ignition 

and starting functions. 

See "Keyless Access System", 

"Keyless Ignition" and "Starting 

Instructions" later in this section 

for information on the various 

functions of the keyless access 

system. 

NOTICE 

Theft prevention features can 

make it difficult to get into your 

vehicle if you lose your transmitters 

and/or key. To get in, 

you may even have to damage 

your vehicle. Be sure you have a 

spare transmitter and/or key. 

. . . 304


Section 3 

Immobilizer 


passive theft deterrent system. 





The system arms automatically 

whenever the ignition is in "off" 

mode. 


disarm when the ignition mode 

changes to Accessory or Start and 

a valid keyless access transmitter is 

detected in the vehicle. 

Only a keyless access transmitter 

that has been successfully 

matched to the vehicle will start 

the engine. 

If a damaged or incorrectly 

matched transmitter has been 

used, the system will not allow the 

engine to start. If the engine does 

not start and the Security System 

Light comes on, there may be a 

problem with the immobilizer 

system. Turn the ignition off. 

Place the transmitter in the 

console bin transmitter pocket 

with the buttons facing to the 

front of the vehicle. 

Then, try starting the engine 

again. 


Information Center Messages" in 

Section 1 for more information: 

• NO FOBS DETECTED 

– 

– 

– 

305 . . .



If the engine still does not start and 

the transmitter appears to be 

undamaged, try starting the vehicle 

with another keyless access 

transmitter. 

You may also want to check the 

fuse. See "Fuses and Circuit Breakers" 


If the engine still does not start, 

have the vehicle serviced. If the 

engine does start, the first transmitter 

may be faulty. 

See your dealer to have the immobilizer 

system serviced and to 

purchase a new transmitter that 

can be programmed to your 

vehicle. 


information: 

• Matching Transmitters 

Do not leave the key or the device 

that disarms the theft deterrent 

system in the vehicle. 

. . . 306


Section 3 

■ THEFT DETERRENT 

SYSTEM 

NOTICE 

Do not alter the Theft Deterrent 

System. Such tampering could 

affect the performance of the 

system. 


Theft Deterrent System. 

In addition to standard theft deterrent 

system capabilities, this 

system may also have these 

features: 

• power sounder 

• intrusion sensor 

• inclination sensor 

• deadbolt locking feature (if 

equipped) 

See "Intrusion Sensor" and "Keyless 

Access System" for more 

information. 

ARMING THE SYSTEM 

To arm the system, use one of the 

following methods: 

• Lock the vehicle with the keyless 

access system. 

If the door is closed when the 

lock button is pressed, the 

Security System Light will stay 

on for 30 seconds. 

When the light turns off, the 

system is armed. 

To override this delay and arm 

the system immediately, press 

the lock button on the remote 

keyless access transmitter 

twice. 

– 

– 

– 

307 . . .



• Open the door. 

Lock the door with the power 

door lock switch or the keyless 

access transmitter. 

The Security System Light 

should flash. 

Remove the keyless access 

transmitter from inside the 

vehicle and close the door. 

The Security System Light will 

shine steadily. 


turn off after about 30 seconds. 



• If activated, the vehicle's passive 

locking feature can automatically 

lock the vehicle and 

arm the theft deterrent system 

when you exit the vehicle. 



Features" in Section 

1. 

The Security System Light 

should turn on to indicate the 

theft deterrent system is 

arming. 


turn off after about 30 seconds. 



. . . 308


Section 3 

The intrusion sensor and the deadbolt 

locking feature (if equipped) 

will also be activated when you 

arm the theft deterrent system. 


information: 

• Intrusion Sensor 

• Keyless Access System 

The system will not arm if you lock 

the driver's door using the key or if 

you use the power door lock 

switch after the doors have been 

closed. 

If this theft deterrent system is 

armed, the alarm will go off any 

time a door, the trunk or the hood 

is opened without using the 


The alarm can also be triggered by 

a change in vehicle position (such 

as if the vehicle is lifted), or by an 

interruption of the vehicle's power 

supply. 

Your vehicle's lights will flash and 

the horn will sound for about 30 

seconds. 

This pattern may repeat ten times. 

If the alarm is set off by accident, 

you can shut it off by pressing the 

unlock button on the keyless 

access transmitter or by starting 

the vehicle. 

To test the system: 

1. Lower the window and open 

the door. 

2. Lock the doors using the 

power door lock switch or the 

remote keyless access 

transmitter. 

3. Close the door and wait about 

30 seconds until the Security 

System Light turns off. 

4. Then, reach through the open 

window and unlock the door 

using the manual lock. 

5. Open the door. The alarm 

should go off. 

– 

– 

– 

309 . . .



If the alarm does not sound, check 

if the horn works. 

If the horn does not work, the horn 

fuse may be blown. 

See "Fuses and Circuit Breakers" in 

Section 4 for additional 

information. 

If the problem is not fuse-related, 


Do not leave the key or the device 

that disarms the theft deterrent 

system in the vehicle. 

DISARMING THE SYSTEM 

To disarm the system upon your 

return to the vehicle: 

• Press the unlock button on the 


The deadbolt (if equipped) will 

also disengage. 

or 

• Use your key to unlock the 

driver's door. 

- Note: 

The deadbolt (if equipped) 

will not disengage if you 

unlock the vehicle with the 

key. 

With the passive feature activated, 

the system will automatically 

unlock the doors and disarm the 

system when you approach the 

vehicle with the transmitter. 


also disengage. 

For more information, see "Vehicle 

Programming and Personalization 

Features" in Section 1. 

. . . 310


Section 3 

INTRUSION SENSOR 

The vehicle's intrusion sensor, 

located in the front overhead 

console, monitors the vehicle interior 

and provides an alarm signal 

to the theft deterrent module in 

the event of an unauthorized entry 

into the vehicle's interior. 

Do not allow passengers or pets to 

remain in the vehicle when the 

intrusion sensor is activated. 

If you lock the doors using the 

keyless access transmitter, the 

theft deterrent system will be 

armed and any movement inside 

the vehicle will sound the alarm. 

See "Intrusion Sensor Override" 


information. 

Before pressing the lock button on 

the keyless access transmitter to 

arm the theft deterrent system and 

activate the intrusion sensor, do 


• Make sure all doors, windows 

and the sunroof are completely 

closed. 

• Turn off any fans or blowers. 

Moving air may trigger the 

alarm. 

• Be sure to secure any loose 

items such as the sunshade or 

window blinds. 

• Make sure there are no 

obstructions blocking the 

sensors. 

• Do not hang anything from the 

rearview mirror. 

Intrusion Sensor Override 

Button 

If any passengers must remain in 

the vehicle, they should lock the 

doors from inside using the power 

door lock switch after the doors 

have been closed. 

The intrusion sensor will not be 

activated. 

The Driver Information Center can 

also be used to arm the theft 

deterrent system without activating 

the intrusion sensor. 

– 

– 

– 

311 . . .



To arm the theft deterrent system 

without activating the intrusion 

sensor, do the following: 

1. Turn off the engine. 

DISABLE INTRUSION SYS? 



2. Press the (information) button 

for the Driver Information 

Center. 

INTRUSION SYS OFF will appear 

on the Driver Information 


The intrusion sensor will not be 

activated. 

Note: 

If INTRUSION SYS READY 

appears on the display, the 

intrusion sensor is enabled. 

Cleaning the System 

To clean the sensor, spray the 

cleaner on a soft, clean cloth and 

wipe gently. 

Make sure the cleaner does not 

leave any residue. 

NOTICE 

Do not spray cleaner directly 

onto the intrusion sensor. 

Do not uses brushes. The bristles 

will damage the sensor. 

Do not touch the sensor with 

pins or other sharp objects. 

KEYLESS ACCESS TRANSMITTER 

DEACTIVATION 


feature that deactivates any 

keyless access transmitter left 

inside the vehicle when the theft 

deterrent system is armed. 

When a transmitter is deactivated, 

the buttons on the transmitter will 

not operate. 

A deactivated transmitter will not 

start the vehicle. 

Unlock the driver's door with the 

vehicle key or press the unlock 

button on an active, programmed 


disarm the theft deterrent system 

and re-activate any transmitters 


. . . 312


Section 3 

■ KEYLESS ACCESS 

SYSTEM 





CAUTION 



transmitter. 










move. 





With this system you can press a 

transmitter button to lock and 

unlock your doors and release your 

trunk from up to 60 meters (195 

ft) away from the vehicle. 

The keyless access transmitter also 

allows you to activate a vehicle 

locator, or to sound the vehicle's 

alarm from a distance. 

The transmitter is part of your 

vehicle's keyless access system. 

The transmitter has an immobilizer 

pellet imbedded in it. See "Immobilizer" 



– 

– 

– 

313 . . .



The keyless access system also 

allows you to unlock your doors 

and access your trunk passively, 

without even removing the transmitter 

from your pocket, purse, 

etc. You do not need to use the 

transmitter buttons. 

This is called passive entry. 

Passive functions operate when 

the transmitter is within 1 meter 3 

ft) of the door or trunk. 

See "Doors" in Section 1 for more 

information. 

Also, see the following for more 

information: 


Features 

The keyless access system also 

replaces the more traditional vehicle 

ignition and starting systems. 


information: 

• Keyless Ignition 

• Starting Instructions 

• Stopping the Engine 

Operating the remote keyless 

access system may interact with 

the vehicle's theft deterrent 

system. 

See "Theft Deterrent System" earlier 


information. 

A 

Operation 

B 

E 

D 

C 

LOCK 

Press on the keyless access 

transmitter once to lock all the 

doors. Pressing the button again 

within five seconds will secure the 

deadbolt (if equipped). 

See "Deadbolt" later in this section 


Different feedback options may be 

chosen for keyless access 

functions. 

. . . 314


Section 3 


information: 


Features 

If you press and hold the lock 

button on the keyless access transmitter 

for more than 2 seconds, 

any open vehicle window(s) will 

close. 

The engine must be off in order for 


If a window is unable to close 

completely, it will reverse and the 

horn will chirp. 

See the following under "Power 

Windows" in Section 1: 

• Secure Car Feature 

• Anti-Pinch Feature 

UNLOCK 

Press once to disengage the 

deadbolt (if equipped) and unlock 

the driver's door. Pressing the 

button again within five seconds 

will unlock all the doors. 


also disengage if the vehicle is 

passively unlocked. 


must be with you and the passive 

entry feature must be enabled in 

order for this feature to work. 

Note: 

When the doors are secured 

with the deadbolt, the power 

door lock controls will not 

unlock the doors. 

See "Deadbolt" later in this section 


If it is dark enough outside, the 

interior lights will turn on. 

Different feedback options may be 

chosen for keyless access 

functions. 


information: 


Features 

– 

– 

– 

315 . . .



A 

TRUNK RELEASE 

Press and hold to open the 

trunk when the engine is off or the 

transmission is in P (Park). 

If the vehicle is locked, passive 

functions operate when the transmitter 

is within 1 meter 3 ft) of the 

trunk. 

When the vehicle is unlocked, 

passive functions operate at a 

greater range. 

B 

E 

D 

C 

VEHICLE LOCATOR/PANIC 

ALARM 

Press and release to locate your 

vehicle. 

The horn will chirp three times and 

the turn signal lights will flash 

three times. 

Press and hold for 3 seconds to 

activate an alarm. 

The horn will sound and the turn 

signal lights will flash for 30 

seconds. 

To turn the alarm off sooner, press 

the button again. 

REMOTE-START 

Press to operate the remotestart 

feature. 

For this function to work, it must 

be enabled. 


information: 


Features 

• Vehicle Remote-Start 

. . . 316


Section 3 

DEADBOLT (IF EQUIPPED) 


with a deadbolt locking feature in 

addition to the standard door 

locks. 

The deadbolt is engaged whenever 

you press the lock button on the 

keyless access transmitter twice 

within five seconds. 

See "Keyless Access System" for 


When the doors are secured with 

the deadbolt, the power door lock 

controls will not unlock the doors. 

When unlocking the driver's door 

from the outside with the keyless 

access transmitter, the deadbolt is 

disengaged for all doors. However, 

only the driver's door will be 

unlocked. 

– 

– 

– 

317 . . .



Transmitter Range 

At times you may notice a 

decrease in the transmitter range. 

This is normal. If the transmitter 

does not work, or you have to 

stand closer to your vehicle than 

normal for the transmitter to work: 

• You may be too far from your 

vehicle. Check your distance. 

You may have to stand closer 

to your vehicle in rain or snow. 

• Check the location. Other vehicles 

or objects may be blocking 

the signal. Take a few steps to 

the right or left. 

• You may have to replace the 

battery in your transmitter. See 

the instructions for battery 

replacement. 

• An electronic device such as a 

cellular phone or lap-top computer 

may be causing 

interference. 

• Your transmitter's range may 

be less while the vehicle is running. 

You may need to be 

closer to your vehicle to turn 

the vehicle off using the 

remote-starter than you were 

to turn it on. 

If none of the above apply, see 

your dealer or a qualified technician 

for service. 

When your vehicle is very close to 

a radio/TV tower, the transmitter 

may not be detected by the 

system and you may not be able to 

start the engine. 


may display NO FOBS DETECTED 

when you try to start the vehicle. 

If this happens, please see "Keyless 

Access Transmitter Not Detected" 

under "Engine Starting Problems" 


. . . 318


Section 3 

Battery Replacement 

If the system does not respond to 

the remote transmitter from any 

location within the normal range, 

you probably need to replace the 

battery in the transmitter. 

KEY FOB BATTERY LOW may 



When the transmitter battery is 

low, the Driver Information Center 

may also display NO FOBS 

DETECTED when you try to start 

the vehicle. 

If this happens, place the transmitter 

in the console bin transmitter 

pocket with the buttons facing to 

the front of the vehicle. 

Then, with the vehicle in P (Park) 

or N (Neutral), press the brake 

pedal and the keyless ignition start 

button to start the vehicle. 

See "Starting Instructions" later in 


It is recommended that you 

replace the transmitter battery as 


– 

– 

– 

319 . . .



To replace the battery: 

NOTICE 

When replacing the battery, use 

care not to touch any of the 

circuitry. Static from your body 

transferred to these surfaces 

may damage the transmitter. 

1. Insert a thin, flat non-metal 

object into the slot on the side 

of the transmitter to separate 

the bottom of the transmitter 

from the top. 

2. Use a pencil or a similar nonmetal 

object to remove the 

old battery. 

3. Replace the battery. 

Use battery type CR2032. 

Put the new battery in positive 

(+) side down. 

CAUTION 

Make sure that you dispose of 

old batteries in accordance with 

environmental protection regulations 

to help protect the environment 

and your health. 

4. Reassemble the transmitter. 

5. Test the operation of the 

transmitter with your vehicle. 

Matching Transmitters 

Matching transmitters to your 

vehicle may be necessary if you 

lose or replace a transmitter. 

Up to four transmitters can be 

matched to your vehicle. 

See your dealer to purchase a new 

transmitter and to have transmitters 

matched to your vehicle. 

. . . 320


Section 3 

Transmitter Frequency 

Approval Code 

Following is the European Remote 

Frequency Certification code for 

this system: 

• 

Vehicle Remote-Start 

If enabled, this feature allows you 

to start the engine from outside 

the vehicle. 


also be programmed to automatically 

activate certain systems when 

you use the vehicle's remote-starter. 


information: 


Features 

To start the vehicle using the 

remote-start feature, do the 

following: 

1. Aim the transmitter at the 

vehicle. 

A 

2. Press and release the lock button 

and then immediately 

press and hold the remotestart 

button for at least 3 

seconds or until the turn signal 

lights flash. 

The vehicle's doors will be 

locked. 

When the vehicle starts, the 

parking lights will turn on. The 

lights will stay on while the vehicle 

is running. 

B 

– 

– 

– 

321 . . .



If the vehicle is left running, it will 

automatically shut off after 10 

minutes unless you extend the 

time by repeating the remote-start 

procedure. 

The remote-start engine runtime 

can only be extended once. 

During remote-start engine runtime, 

do the following to transition 

the vehicle from remote-start 

operation to normal vehicle 

operation: 

1. Enter the vehicle. 

2. With your foot pressing the 

brake pedal, press the keyless 

ignition start button. 

See "Keyless Ignition" later in 

this section for information. 

If you do not transition the vehicle 

to normal vehicle operation during 

the engine runtime provided (up 

to two remote-starts with a maximum 

of 20 minutes of remotestart 

engine runtime), the engine 

will turn off. If this happens, the 

vehicle can only be started using 

the keyless ignition pushbutton 

start feature. 


information: 

• Keyless Ignition 

• Starting Instructions 

To end remote-start engine runtime 

without transitioning to 

normal vehicle operation, do any 


• Aim the transmitter at the vehicle 

and press the remote-start 

button until the parking lights 

turn off. 

Your transmitter's range may 

be less while the vehicle is running. 

You may need to be 

closer to your vehicle to turn 

the vehicle off using the 

remote-starter than you were 

to turn it on. 

• Turn on the hazard warning 

flashers. 

. . . 322


Section 3 


accessory button. 

See "Keyless Ignition" later in 

this section for information. 

• Turn on the valet lockout 

feature. 


"Valet Lockout Switch" in Section 

1. 

NOTE: 

• Laws in some regions may 

restrict the use of remotestarters. 

Check local and national regulations 

for any requirements. 

• Do not use the remote-start 

feature if your vehicle is low 

on fuel. 

The vehicle could run out of 

fuel. 

The remote-start feature will not 

operate under any of the following 

conditions: 

• The Malfunction Indicator 

Light is on. 

See the following in Section 1 


- Malfunction Indicator Light 

• The Valet Lockout switch is on. 


"Valet Lockout Switch" in Section 

1. 

• The transmitter is inside the 

vehicle. 

• The vehicle's hood is open. 

• The remote-start feature is not 

enabled. 

• An unauthorized vehicle entry 

or a vehicle theft was 

attempted. 

For information on other conditions 

which can affect the performance 

of the transmitter, see 

"Transmitter Range" earlier in this 

section. 

– 

– 

– 

323 . . .



■ KEYLESS IGNITION 

Your vehicle is equipped with an 

electronic keyless ignition with 

pushbutton start. 


must be in the vehicle for the ignition 

to work. 

CAUTION 




vehicle with the remote keyless 

access transmitter. 









move. 





ENGINE 

Acc. 

Press this button to start the 

engine. 



Be sure to hold the regular 

brake pedal down while starting 

the engine. 


must be in the vehicle for the 

ignition to work. 

. . . 324


Section 3 

When your vehicle is very close to 

a radio/TV tower, the transmitter 

may not be detected by the 

system and you may not be able to 

start the engine. 


may display NO FOBS DETECTED 

when you try to start the vehicle. 

If this happens, please see "Keyless 

Access Transmitter Not Detected" 

under "Engine Starting Problems" 


ENGINE 

Acc. 

• Press this button to turn the 

engine off and activate 

retained accessory power. 



See "Retained Accessory 

Power" for information about 

that feature. 

If the engine is already off, 

pressing this button places the 

ignition in accessory mode. 

The ACCESSORY ACTIVE message 

will appear on the Driver 


If the engine is running and the 

gear selector is not in P (Park), 

the engine will turn off and the 

vehicle will go into accessory 

mode. The Driver Information 

Center will display SHIFT TO 

PARK. 

Once the vehicle is shifted into 

P (Park), retained accessory 

power will activate if the front 

doors remain closed. 

In this mode, you can operate 

your electrical accessories while 

the engine is off. 

– 

– 

– 

325 . . .



Use this mode if you must have 

your vehicle in motion while 

the engine is off (for example, 

if your vehicle is being pushed 

or towed). 

See "Recreational Vehicle Towing" 

in Section 3 for more 

information. 

A warning chime will sound 

continuously if you open the 

door while in accessory mode. 

The chime is a reminder to 

remove the transmitter from 

the vehicle. 

If the transmission is in P 

(Park), after being in accessory 

mode for about 20 minutes, 

accessory mode will turn off 

and the vehicle may automatically 

activate retained accessory 

power, depending on 

whether the doors are open or 

closed. 

To turn this mode off without 

starting the engine, press the 

keyless ignition off/accessory 

button again. The ignition will 

turn off and the retained accessory 

power feature will turn on. 

Retained accessory power may 

be available, depending on 

whether the doors are open or 

closed. 

See "Retained Accessory 

Power" for more information. 

Retained Accessory Power 

After you turn the ignition off, you 

can still use your electrical accessories 

such as power windows and 

the radio. This power will not shut 

off until 10 minutes have passed or 

you open a front door. 


(Park) for this feature to work. 

If, after the 10 minutes have 

passed, you still have a need for 

accessory power, you may do one 



accessory button once to place 

the ignition in accessory mode. 

• Close all the doors and press 

the keyless ignition off/accessory 

button twice to activate 

retained accessory power for 

another 10 minutes. 

. . . 326


Section 3 

■ STARTING 

INSTRUCTIONS 

Engine Starting 

To start, the gear selector must be 

in P (Park) or N (Neutral). 

Use N (Neutral) to restart when 

the vehicle is already moving. 


must be in the vehicle for the ignition 

to work. 

NOTICE 

Do not shift into P (Park) while 

the vehicle is moving. 

Otherwise, the transmission 

could be damaged. 

With your foot on the brake pedal, 

press the keyless ignition start 

button. 

NOTE: 

If the keyless access transmitter 

is not detected in the vehicle, 


will display NO FOBS 

DETECTED. 


Messages" in Section 1 for more 

information. 

Let go of the button when the 

engine begins cranking. 

The engine will start automatically. 

Do not race the engine immediately 

after starting. 

Allow enough time for the engine 

to warm up and deliver oil to the 

various parts of the engine requiring 

lubrication. 

NOTICE 

Your engine is designed to work 

with the electronics in your 

vehicle. If you add electrical 

parts or accessories, you could 

change the way the engine 

operates. See your dealer 

before adding electrical 

equipment. 

Any resulting damage would 

not be covered by your 

warranty. 

– 

– 

– 

327 . . .



Vehicle Remote-Start 

This feature allows you to start the 

engine from outside the vehicle. 


information: 

• Keyless Access System 

-Vehicle Remote-Start 

Computer Controlled 

Cranking System 

This feature helps start the engine 

and protects components. Once 

cranking is initiated, the engine 

will continue to crank for a few 

seconds or until the vehicle starts. 

If the engine does not start within 

15 seconds, the system will stop 

cranking the engine to prevent 

starter motor gear damage. 

Engine Starting Problems 

Keyless Access Transmitter Not 

Detected 

When the transmitter battery is 

low, or if the system is not detecting 

the transmitter because the 

vehicle is very close to a radio/TV 

tower, you may not be able to start 

the vehicle. 

If the keyless access transmitter is 

not detected in the vehicle, the 

Driver Information Center will 

display NO FOBS DETECTED. 

NO FOBS DETECTED will also 

appear when a cell phone charger 

interferes with the operation of the 

keyless access system. Unplug any 

battery chargers when starting or 

turning off the engine. 

. . . 328


Section 3 

If this happens, place the transmitter 

in the console bin transmitter 

pocket with the buttons facing to 

the front of the vehicle. 

Then, with the vehicle in P (Park) 

or N (Neutral), press the brake 

pedal and the keyless ignition start 

button to start the vehicle. 

FOB BATTERY LOW may appear 


display when the transmitter 

battery is low. 


replace the transmitter battery as 


See "Keyless Access System" earlier 


information. 

Failure to Start 

If the engine does not start and no 

message is displayed in the Driver 

Information Center, wait 15 

seconds before trying again. 

– 

– 

– 

329 . . .



Engine Flooding 

If the engine is flooded with too 

much gasoline, slowly push the 

accelerator pedal all the way to the 

floor and hold it there as you start 

the engine. 

If the engine does not start within 

15 seconds, the system will stop 

cranking the engine to prevent 

starter motor gear damage. 

If the engine starts briefly but then 

stops again, repeat this procedure. 

NOTICE 

Pressing the keyless ignition 

start button immediately after 

cranking has ended can overheat 

and damage the starter 

motor and drain your battery. 

Wait about 15 seconds 

between each try to help avoid 

draining your battery or 

damaging your starter. 

■ STOPPING THE 

ENGINE 

To turn off the engine, press the 

off/accessory button when the 

gear selector is in P (Park). 

If the gear selector is not in P 

(Park), the engine will turn off, the 

vehicle will go into accessory 

mode and the Driver Information 

Center will display SHIFT TO 

PARK. 

Once the vehicle is shifted into P 

(Park), retained accessory power 

may be available. 

See "Retained Accessory Power" 


If the keyless access transmitter is 

not detected in the vehicle, the 

Driver Information Center will 

display NO FOB - OFF OR RUN?. 



information. 

. . . 330


Section 3 

■ ENGINE BLOCK 

HEATER 

Use this option if you have to park 

in very cold weather, -18°C (0°F) 

or colder. You'll get easier starting 

and better fuel economy during 

engine warm-up. 

Your vehicle may also have an 

internal thermostat in the plug 

end of the cord. This prevents 

operation of the engine block 

heater when the temperature is at 

or above -18°C (0°F). 

To use the block heater: 


2. Open the hood. 

- 3.6L V6 Engine: 

The cord is located on the 

right side of the engine compartment, 

near the front. 


The cord is located on the left 

side of the engine compartment, 

near the inner fender 

and above the strut. 


The cord is located on the 

passenger's side of the engine 

compartment, near the 

front. 

3. You must remove the plastic 

cap to access the plug. 

4. Unwrap the electrical cord 

and plug it in. It uses a normal, 

house voltage. 

CAUTION 

Plug the cord into a properly 

grounded outlet. You can use a 

heavy-duty extension cord 

(rated for at least 15 amps) 

connected to a properly 

grounded outlet. 

– 

– 

Ask a dealer in the area how long 

you should keep the heater 

plugged in. 

Be sure to unplug and restow the 

cord before starting the engine. 

Otherwise, it may be damaged by 

moving engine parts. 

– 

331 . . .



■ AUTOMATIC 

TRANSMISSION 

CAUTION 

Do not shift out of P (Park) or N 

(Neutral) with the engine 

racing. 



be injured. 

Shifting into a drive gear while 

the engine is racing is dangerous. 

Keep your foot on the 

brake pedal and off the accelerator 

pedal. After shifting, wait a 

while, then release the brake 

pedal slowly. This will prevent 

any unexpected rapid 

acceleration. 

NOTICE 

Damage to your transmission 

caused by shifting out of P 

(Park) or N (Neutral) with the 

engine racing is not covered by 


NOTICE 

Spinning the tires too fast or 

holding the vehicle in one place 

on a hill using only the accelerator 

pedal may damage the 

transmission. 

If the vehicle gets stuck do not 

spin the wheels too fast. 

When stopped during an uphill 

climb, hold the vehicle in place 

using the brakes. 

NOTICE 

Do not shift into P (Park) while 

the vehicle is moving. 

Otherwise, the transmission 


. . . 332


Section 3 

CAUTION 

CAUTION 

SHIFT POSITIONS 

There are several different shift 

positions for your gear lever. 

P (Park) 

This locks your rear wheels. Use 

this position to park the vehicle 

and when starting the engine. 

Your vehicle has an electronic shift 

lock release system. With the ignition 

on, you have to fully apply the 

regular brakes before you can shift 

out of P (Park). 

See "Vehicle Parking" later in this 


When you leave your vehicle, 

be sure the shift lever is fully in 

P (Park) and the parking brake 

is firmly applied. 

If you do not park your vehicle 

properly, it can roll. If you leave 

the engine running, it could 

move quickly. You or others 

could be injured. To be sure the 

vehicle does not move, follow 

the steps below. 

• Set the parking brake. 

• Shift into P (Park). 

See "Vehicle Parking" later in 


information. 



If you are not in an idling vehicle, 

the engine could overheat 

and even catch fire. You or 

others could be injured. Do not 

let the engine run when you are 

not in the vehicle. 

– 

– 

– 

333 . . .



R (Reverse) 

Use this to back up. 

At low vehicle speeds you can use 

R (Reverse) to rock your vehicle 

back and forth if your vehicle gets 

stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow. 

See "If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck" in 

Section 5. 

NOTICE 

Shift to R (Reverse) only after 

your vehicle is stopped. Shifting 

to Reverse while your vehicle is 

moving could damage your 

transmission. 



N (Neutral) 

In this position, the engine doesn't 

connect with the wheels. You can 

use N (Neutral) to restart a stalled 

engine while your vehicle is 

moving. Use N (Neutral) when 

your vehicle is being towed. 

CAUTION 

Do not shift out of P (Park) or N 

(Neutral) with the engine 

racing. 



be injured. 

NOTICE 

Damage to your transmission 

caused by shifting out of P 

(Park) or N (Neutral) with the 

engine racing is not covered by 


D (Automatic Overdrive) 

This position provides the best fuel 

economy for your vehicle. 

Use this position for normal driving 

in most street and highway 

situations. If you need more power 

and are: 

• going less than about 55 km/h 

(35 mph), push your accelerator 

pedal about halfway down. 

• going more than about 55 km/ 

h (35 mph), push the accelerator 

all the way down. 

When slippery road conditions 

exist, downshifting the transmission 

may cause skidding. 

. . . 334


Section 3 

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION 

DRIVER-CONTROLLED SHIFT 

MODE 

NOTICE 

While using the drivercontrolled 

shift mode, do not 

operate the engine at high 

rpms without upshifting. 

Otherwise, the vehicle could be 

damaged. 

Always upshift when necessary. 

This feature gives the driver more 

manual control over the operation 

of the transmission. 

Use the driver-controlled shift 

mode to remain in a gear longer 

for sport driving or climbing hills, 

or to downshift for more power or 

engine braking. 

To use this feature, move the shift 

lever from the automatic overdrive 

position to the right, into the driver-controlled 

shift mode gate. 

The Driver Information Center will 

display which mode the transmission 

is in. 

See "Driver Information Center" in 

Section 1. 

If you do not move the shift lever 

forward or rearward, the vehicle 

will be in sport mode. 

It is normal for the transmission to 

remain in a gear longer when 

sport mode is selected. 

To upshift, move the shift lever 

forward. 

To downshift, move the shift lever 

rearward. 

The vehicle will have firmer shifting 

and increased performance. 

– 

– 

– 

335 . . .



The gear number displayed in the 

Driver Information Center is the 

current gear for the transmission. 

To start driving the vehicle when it 

is stopped, you must use either 1 

(First) or 2 (Second) gear. 

The transmission will only allow 

you to shift into gears appropriate 

for the vehicle speed and rpm. 

The transmission will not automatically 

shift into the next higher 

gear if the engine rpm is too high. 

If your vehicle's transmission shift 

inhibitor is active, the indicator for 

the currently selected gear will 

flash. 

The transmission will downshift 

automatically when the vehicle 

comes to a stop. 

To stop using the automatic transmission 

manual shift mode and 

return to fully automatic transmission 

operation, move the shift 

lever from the manual shift mode 

gate to the left, back into the automatic 

overdrive position. 

■ ALL-WHEEL DRIVE (IF 

EQUIPPED) 

All-wheel drive transmits engine 

power to all four wheels. This is like 

four-wheel drive, but there is no 

separate lever or switch to engage 

or disengage the front axle. It is 

fully automatic, and adjusts itself 

as needed for road conditions. 

. . . 336


Section 3 

■ VEHICLE PARKING 

CAUTION 



If you are not in an idling vehicle, 

the engine could overheat 

and even catch fire. You or 

others could be injured. Do not 

let the engine run when you are 

not in the vehicle. 

Shifting Into P (Park) 

NOTICE 

If you do not park your vehicle 

properly, it can roll. If you leave 

the engine running, it could 

move quickly. You or others 

could be injured. To be sure the 

vehicle does not move, follow 

the steps below. 

In order to shift into P (Park), do 


1. Apply and hold the brake 

pedal. 

Press the button on the shift lever 

while pushing the shift lever 

all the way into P (Park). 

Release the button. 

Keep your foot on the brake 

pedal. 

2. Set the parking brake firmly. 

– 

– 

See "Parking Brake" later in this 


3. Turn off the ignition. 

– 

337 . . .



If you must leave your vehicle with 

the engine running, check that the 

shift lever is fully in P (Park). To do 

this, hold the regular brake pedal 

down after you have shifted into P 

(Park) and try to move the shift 

lever out of the Park position without 

first pushing the button. If you 

can, then the shift lever was not 

locked in Park. 

Be sure the shift lever is in P (Park) 

and the parking brake is firmly 

applied when you leave your 

vehicle. 

Shifting Out of P (Park) 

Your vehicle has an automatic 

transmission shift lock control 

system. With the engine running 

or the ignition in accessory mode, 

you have to fully apply the regular 

brakes before you can shift out of 

P (Park). 

The shift lock control system may 

not operate if your vehicle has a 

dead or low-voltage battery. 

If the vehicle's battery is dead, 

jump start the vehicle. See "Jump 

Starting" in Section 5. 

If you cannot shift out of P (Park), 

maintain brake application while 

you do the following: 

1. Release the button on the shift 

lever. 

2. Press the button on the shift 

lever again. 

3. Try to shift out of P (Park), into 

the gear you want. 

If the problem persists, see your 


If you need to have your vehicle 

towed, see "Towing" in Section 5 

for vehicle towing information. 

. . . 338


Section 3 

Torque Lock 

If you park your vehicle on a hill, 

make sure to apply the parking 

brake first before shifting into P 

(Park). Otherwise, there will be 

excessive pressure on the parking 

mechanism which will make it 

difficult to shift out of P (Park). 

If you cannot shift out of P (Park), 

you may need to have another 

vehicle push yours a little uphill. 

This takes some of the pressure 

from the parking mechanism in 

the transmission, so you can pull 

the shift lever out of P (Park). 

When you are ready to leave after 

parking on a hill, be sure to hold 

the regular brake pedal down 

while you start the engine, shift 

into gear and release the parking 

brake. 


Assist 

The display for this system can be 

seen when looking in the rearview 

mirror. For information about this 

system, see "Ultrasonic Rear Parking 

Assist" in Section 1. 

■ TRACTION 

There are three systems that 

control the vehicle: steering, 

brakes, and accelerator. To keep 

the vehicle under control, do not 

push any of these systems beyond 

their limits. 

Traction Control 

This system automatically limits 

wheel spin under slippery road 

conditions. 


on the traction control system. 

NOTICE 

Make sure to turn the system off 

if the vehicle is stuck in mud, 

sand or snow. 

– 

– 

– 

339 . . .



Stabilitrak ® System 

This system selectively applies any 

one of the brakes to help maintain 

directional control in difficult driving 

conditions. 


on the Stabilitrak ® system. 

Limited-Slip Rear Axle (If 

equipped) 

The locking rear axle can give 

added traction on snow, ice, etc. 

Normally, the locking axle unit 

works like a standard axle. However, 

when either drive wheel is on a 

slippery surface and the opposite 

wheel has better traction, the locking 

unit can continue to move the 

vehicle even though one of the 

wheels may initially be spinning. 

■ STEERING 

Power Steering 

If you lose power steering assist 

because the engine stops or the 

system is malfunctioning, you can 

still steer but it will take much 

more effort. 

Speed Sensitive Steering 

This system automatically varies 

the amount of steering effort in 

proportion to your vehicle speed. 

Compared to a car without speedsensitive 

steering, the required 

steering effort increases as your 

speed increases. 

■ BRAKES 

If the engine stops as you're driving, 

brake normally but don't 

pump your brakes. If the engine 

stops, you will have some power 

brake assist left, but it's used up as 

you brake. 

The brake pedal may be harder to 

push and it may take longer to 

stop. 

. . . 340


Section 3 

Disc Brake Wear Indicators 

Your vehicle has four-wheel disc 

brakes. 

Disc brake pads have built-in wear 

indicators that make a highpitched 

warning sound when the 

brake pads are worn and new ones 

are needed. 

Some conditions or climates may 

cause disc brakes to squeal when 

they are first or lightly applied. 

This does not indicate a problem 

with the brakes. 

Brake linings should always be 

replaced as complete axle sets. 

CAUTION 

NOTICE 

Continuing to drive with wornout 

brake pads could result in 

costly brake repairs. 

NOTICE 

Improperly tightened wheel 

nuts can lead to brake pulsation 

and rotor damage. To avoid 

expensive brake repairs, evenly 

tighten the wheel nuts in the 

proper sequence and to the 

proper torque specification. 

See "Specifications and Capacities" 

in Section 4 for the proper 

wheel nut torque. 

Brake Adjustment 

Every time you apply the brakes, 

whether or not the vehicle is 

moving, your brakes adjust for 

wear. 

Brake Pedal Travel 

See your dealer if the brake pedal 

does not return to normal height, 

or if there is a rapid increase in 

pedal travel. This could be a sign 

that service is required. 

– 

– 

– 

The brake wear warning sound 

means that soon your brakes 

won't work well. That could 

lead to an accident. When you 

hear the brake wear warning 

sound, have the vehicle 

serviced. 

341 . . .



Anti-Lock Brake System 

The antilock brake system helps 

you maintain directional stability 

on wet or slippery road surfaces. It 

automatically controls the brake 

operation when braking. 

As you brake, the system receives 

updates on wheel speed and 

controls braking pressure at each 

wheel separately, as necessary. 

This occurs only during a brake 

application which would have 

caused one or more wheels to 

lock. You don't have to 'pump' the 

brakes. Just hold the brake pedal 

down. You may feel or hear it 

pulsate, but this is normal. 

See "Antilock Brake System Warning 

Light" in Section 1 for more 

information. 

Parking Brake 

The parking brake pedal, located 

to the lower left side of the instrument 

panel, is used to set and 

release the parking brake. 

To set the parking brake, hold the 

regular brake pedal down with 

your right foot and then push 

down the parking brake pedal 

with your left foot. 

If the ignition is on, the Brake 

System Warning light should turn 

on. 

If the light does not come on when 

the parking brake is set, have your 

vehicle serviced. 

See "Brake System Warning Light" 

in Section 1. 

To release the parking brake, push 

the brake pedal down with your 

right foot and the parking brake 

pedal down with your left foot. 

When you lift your left foot up, the 

parking brake will release. 

. . . 342


Section 3 

CAUTION 

Do not drive with the parking 

brake set. 

Driving with the parking brake 

on could cause the brakes to 

overheat. The brakes, or other 

parts of the vehicle, could be 

damaged. 

Make sure the brake system 

warning light is off. 

If you begin to drive while the 

parking brake is not yet released, 

the brake system warning light will 

stay on to alert you. 

If you park your vehicle on a grade, 

set the parking brake before shifting 

the automatic transmission 

into P (Park). 

For more information, see "Parking 

On Hills" under "Trailer Towing" 


Brake Assist 


brake assist feature. During a hard 

brake application, the system 

automatically delivers extra braking 

pressure to the wheels and 

activates the antilock brake 

system. 

You may feel some vibration or 

hear a noise when the system is 

active. The brake pedal may move 

slightly. This is normal. 

Just hold the brake pedal down 

firmly and let the system work for 

you. 

The brakes will return to normal 

operation when the brake pedal is 

released. 

– 

– 

– 

343 . . .



■ SUSPENSION 

The suspension system in your 

vehicle is designed to keep the 

vehicle level and to provide a 

smooth and controlled ride. 

Automatic Ride Control (If 

equipped) 

This system automatically adjusts 

your ride and handling depending 

on speed and road conditions. 

If the system detects a problem 

with the ride control, the SERVICE 

SUSPENSION SYS message will 


Center display. See your dealer for 

service. 



information. 

■ VEHICLE LOADING 

CAUTION 

Things you put inside your vehicle 

can strike and injure people 

in a sudden stop or turn, or in a 

crash. Put things in the cargo 

area of your vehicle as far 

forward as possible and try to 

spread the weight evenly. 

Never stack things inside the 

vehicle any higher than the 

seatbacks. Do not leave unsecured 

child restraints inside the 

vehicle. Try to secure anything 

that is carried inside the vehicle. 

It is very important to know how 

much weight your vehicle can 

carry. 

This weight is called the Vehicle 

Capacity Weight. 

This figure includes the weight of 

all occupants, cargo and all 

nonfactory-installed options. 

See "Tire and Loading Information 

Label" later in this section for more 

information. 

. . . 344


Section 3 

NOTICE 

Your vehicle's warranty does 

not cover parts or components 

that fail because of overloading. 

CAUTION 

The components of your vehicle 

are designed to provide 

satisfactory service if the vehicle 

is not loaded in excess of the 

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. 

Also, do not exceed the front or 

rear Gross Axle Weight Ratings. 

Overloading can result in loss of 

vehicle control and personal 

injury. It can also shorten the 

service life of your vehicle. 

TIRE 

FRONT 

REAR 

SPARE 

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION 

SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL FRONT REAR 

The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs. 

ORIGINAL SIZE 

Tire and Loading 

Information Label 

COLD TIRE PRESSURE 

SEE OWNER’S 

MANUAL FOR 

ADDITIONAL 

INFORMATION 

This label shows the proper size 

and recommended inflation pressures 

for your vehicle's tires. 

See "Tires" in Section 4 for more 

information. 

The label is typically affixed to your 

vehicle at one of the following 

locations: 

• the rear pillar of the left front 

door frame 

• the rear edge of the left front 

door 

It also tells how many people can 

ride in your vehicle and gives you 

the Vehicle Capacity Weight. 

Do not exceed the maximum vehicle 

capacity when loading your 

vehicle. 

See "Certification Label" for additional 

loading information. 

– 

– 

– 

345 . . .



Certification Label 

This label, located either on the 

rear edge of the left front door or 

on the rear pillar of the left front 

door frame, shows the vehicle's 

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. 

Note that your vehicle may have 

two certification labels. One U.S. 

certification label, and one European 

certification label. Be sure to 

reference your European label for 

information. 

The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating is 

the maximum permissible loaded 

weight of the vehicle. It includes 

the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, 

fuel and cargo, as well as 

the weight of the trailer tongue if 

you are pulling a trailer. 

Maximum Front and Rear Axle 

Weights 

The label also shows the maximum 

weight that the front axle can 

carry (the front Gross Axle Weight 

Rating) and the maximum weight 

that the rear axle can carry (the 

rear Gross Axle Weight Rating). 

The weight of the cargo load must 

be properly distributed over both 

the front and rear axles. 

If you are unsure of your vehicle's 

front, rear or total weight, weigh 

the vehicle at a weigh station. Your 

dealer can assist you with this. 

■ TRAILER TOWING 

STS-V Models: Your vehicle is 

neither designed nor intended to 

tow a trailer. 

STS Models Only 

CAUTION 

If you don't use the correct 

equipment and drive properly, 

you could lose control when 

you pull a trailer behind your 

vehicle. You could have a serious 

accident. 

For example, if the trailer is too 

heavy, the brakes may not work 

well, or they may not even work 

at all. 

You and your passengers could 

be seriously injured. 

. . . 346


Section 3 

NOTICE 

Pulling a trailer improperly can 

damage your vehicle and result 

in costly repairs not covered by 

your warranty. To pull a trailer 

correctly, follow the advice in 

this section. 

If you think you want to pull a 

trailer, see your dealer for information 

on your vehicle's trailer 

towing ability. 

The maximum loaded trailer 

weight you can pull with your 

vehicle depends on your intended 

use and what special equipment 

has been installed on the vehicle. 

Information on trailer towing ability, 

special equipment required, 

and optional equipment available 

should be obtained from your 

dealer. 

Installation of towing equipment 

should be carried out only by your 

dealer. Your dealer has the proper 

installation specifications and is 

aware of any necessary vehicle 

modifications. 

If you do decide to pull a trailer, 

here are some important points: 

• The gross axle weight ratings 

and the gross vehicle weight 

rating must not be exceeded. 

Trailer tongue weight must be 

included in the total vehicle 

weight. 

See "Vehicle Loading" earlier in 


information. 

– 

– 

– 

347 . . .



• The Gross Combination Weight 

Rating is the maximum permissible 

total loaded weight of 

both the vehicle and the trailer. 

Remember to include the 

weights of the people that will 

ride inside the vehicle. 

The total of the vehicle weight 

and the trailer weight must not 

exceed the Gross Combination 

Weight Rating. 

Don't tow a trailer at all during 

the first 800 km (500 miles) 

your new vehicle is driven. The 

engine, axle or other parts 


• During the first 800 km (500 

miles) of trailer towing, don't 

drive over 80 km/h (50 mph) 

and don't make full-throttle 

starts. 

• When towing a trailer, do not 

drive faster than 90 km/h (55 

mph) or the legal maximum 

speed, whichever is lower to 

prevent premature wear of 

vehicle parts. 

• When towing a trailer with an 

automatic transmission, operate 

your vehicle in D (Drive). 

You may want to shift into a 

lower gear if the transmission 

shifts too often. 

• Be sure your vehicle's tires are 

inflated to the limit for cold 

tires. 

See the tire information label 

for your vehicle's tire inflation 

specifications. 

Also, see "Vehicle Loading" earlier 


information. 

• On a long uphill gradient, shift 

down and reduce your speed 

to around 70 km/h (45 mph) 

to reduce the possibility of 

engine and transmission 

overheating. 

• You should not park vehicles 

with trailers on a grade (hill). 

However, if you must park on a 

grade, have someone place 

wheel chocks under the trailer 

wheels. 


"Parking On Hills" later in this 

section. 

. . . 348


Section 3 

• Your vehicle may show signs of 

overheating if you turn your 

engine off immediately after 

towing at high altitudes on 

steep uphill grades. 

If possible, park on a level surface. 

Set the parking brake 

firmly. Shift the automatic 

transmission into P (Park). 

Allow the engine to idle for a 

few minutes before turning the 

engine off. 

If you do get an overheat warning, 

see "Engine Overheating" 

in Section 5 for instructions. 

CAUTION 

Trailer brakes of adequate size 

are required on trailers of more 

than 450 kilograms (1,000 lbs) 

loaded weight. 

CAUTION 

If you are using a weight-carrying 

or weight-distributing 

hitch, the trailer tongue weight 

should be 10 to 15 percent of 

the total loaded trailer weight. 

Do not exceed the maximum 

allowable tongue weight for 

your vehicle. 

Hitches 

It's important to have the correct 

hitch equipment. Sidewinds and 

rough roads are a few reasons why 

you'll need the right hitch. Here 

are some rules to follow: 

• The rear bumper on your vehicle 

is not intended for hitches. 

Do not attach rental hitches or 

other bumper-type hitches to 

it. Use only a frame-mounted 

hitch that does not attach to 

the bumper. 

• If you have to make any holes 

in the body of your vehicle in 

order to install the trailer hitch, 

be sure to seal them up once 

the hitch is removed. Otherwise, 

dirt, water and even 

deadly carbon monoxide could 

get into your vehicle. 

– 

– 

– 

349 . . .



Safety Chains 

You should always attach chains 

between your vehicle and your 

trailer. Cross the safety chains 

under the tongue of the trailer so 

that the tongue will not drop to 

the road if it becomes separated 

from the hitch. Instructions about 

safety chains may be provided by 

the hitch manufacturer or by the 

trailer manufacturer. 

Follow the manufacturer's recommendation 

for attaching safety 

chains. 

Do not attach safety chains to the 

bumper. 

Always leave just enough slack so 

you can turn with your rig. And, 

never allow safety chains to drag 

on the ground. 

Trailer Brakes 

Trailer brakes of adequate size are 

required on trailers of more than 

450 kilograms (1,000 lbs) loaded 

weight. 

Read and follow all instructions 

that come with the trailer brakes. 


Stabilitrak ® System. Do not tap 

into the vehicle's hydraulic brake 

system when installing trailer 

brakes. Otherwise, both systems 

may not work well. You could even 

lose your brakes. 

Trailer Turn Signals 

When you tow a trailer, your vehicle 

may need extra wiring. See 

your dealer. 

When towing a trailer, the arrows 

on your instrument cluster will 

flash for turns even if the bulbs on 

the trailer are burned out. You may 

think drivers behind you are seeing 

your signal, when actually they are 

not. It is important that you check 

occasionally to be sure that the 

trailer bulbs are still working. 

. . . 350


Section 3 

Parking on Hills 

CAUTION 

When towing a trailer, avoid 

parking your vehicle on a hill. If 

something were to go wrong, 

your rig could start to move. 

People could be injured and 

both your vehicle and the trailer 


You should not park vehicles with 

trailers on a grade (hill). However, 

if you must park on a grade, follow 

these steps: 

1. Apply your regular brakes, but 

don't shift into P (Park) yet. 

2. If the vehicle is facing downhill, 

turn the wheels toward 

the curb. If it is facing uphill, 

turn the wheels toward traffic. 

3. Have someone place chocks 

under the trailer wheels. 

4. When the wheel chocks are in 

place, release the regular 

brakes until the chocks absorb 

the load. 

5. Reapply the regular brakes. 

Then apply your parking 

brake, and then shift to P 

(Park). 

6. Release the regular brakes. 

When you are ready to leave after 

parking on a hill, be sure to hold 

the regular brake pedal down 

while you start the engine, shift 

into gear and release the parking 

brake. 

Drive slowly until the trailer is clear 

of the chocks. 

Stop and have someone pick up 

and store the chocks. 

– 

– 

– 

351 . . .



Maintenance When Trailer 

Towing 

Your vehicle will need service more 

often when you're pulling a trailer. 

See the Maintenance Schedule for 

more on this. 

Check periodically to see that all 

hitch nuts and bolts are tight. 

When towing a trailer, the engine 

cooling system may temporarily 

overheat. See Sections 4 and 5 for 

more information on your vehicle's 

cooling system. 

■ RECREATIONAL 

VEHICLE TOWING 

If you decide to tow your vehicle 

behind another vehicle for use at 

your destination, be sure to use 

the proper towing equipment. 

Follow all instructions that come 

with the towing equipment. 

The most common methods for 

recreational vehicle towing are: 

• towing your vehicle on a platform 

trailer, with all four wheels 

off the ground 

• towing your vehicle with all 

four wheels on the ground 

• towing your vehicle with two 

wheels on the ground and two 

wheels up on a dolly 

. . . 352


Section 3 

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE ON A 

PLATFORM TRAILER 

If your vehicle has all-wheel drive 

or if it is an STS-V Model, it can 

only be towed with all four wheels 

off the ground. 

Tow the vehicle on a platform 

trailer. 

See your dealer or a professional 

towing service if you need to have 

your vehicle towed. 

NOTICE 

• STS-V Models 

Because of its reduced ground 

clearance, your vehicle was 

not designed to be towed 

with any of its wheels on the 

ground. 

Towing your vehicle with any 

of its wheels on the ground 

may result in vehicle damage. 

• All-Wheel Drive Vehicles 

Towing an all-wheel drive 

vehicle with any of its wheels 

on the ground will damage 

drivetrain components. 

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE WITH 

ALL FOUR WHEELS ON THE 

GROUND 

Your vehicle was not designed to 

be towed with all four wheels on 

the ground. 

NOTICE 

Towing the vehicle with all four 

wheels on the ground will 

damage drivetrain 

components. 



– 

– 

– 


towing service if you 

need to have your vehicle 

towed. 

353 . . .



TOWING YOUR VEHICLE WITH 

TWO WHEELS ON THE GROUND 

AND TWO WHEELS UP ON A 

DOLLY 

Rear-Wheel Drive Vehicles and 

Non-STS-V Models Only 

NOTICE 

This vehicle has reduced 

ground clearance. 

Because of the reduced ground 

clearance, towing your vehicle 

with two wheels on the ground 

and two wheels up on a dolly 

may result in vehicle damage. 

When towing your vehicle, 

always follow the towing procedure 

listed in this manual, or 

tow the vehicle on a platform 

trailer with all four wheels off 

the ground. 

The vehicle can be towed with the 

rear wheels secured on a towing 

dolly. 

Use the following procedure: 

1. Securely attach the vehicle 

being towed to a dolly and to 

the tow vehicle. 


instructions. 


3. Shift the transmission into P 

(Park). 

4. Have the steering wheel 

clamped in a straight-ahead 

position. 

5. Turn off the ignition and 

remove the key. 

NOTICE 

If the doors are locked with the 

security system armed, the 

alarm will activate when the 

vehicle is inclined for towing. 

. . . 354


–––– 

4 

Service 

and 

Mai 

ntenanc 

e 

Maintenance Guidelines................................356 

Accessories and Modifications ......................356 

Fuel ................................................................357 

Fuel Consumption and Emissions 

Information..................................................359 

Filling the Tank .............................................359 

Hood Release.................................................362 

Engine Compartment....................................363 

Engine Oil .....................................................367 

Engine Coolant .............................................372 

Automatic Transmission Fluid........................377 

Transfer Case Lubricant 

(All-Wheel Drive Vehicles) ............................378 

Front Axle Lubricant 

(All-Wheel Drive Vehicles) ............................378 

Rear Axle Lubricant .......................................379 

Rear Differential Cooler (STS-V Model Only)..380 

Power Steering Fluid .....................................380 

Brake Master Cylinder Fluid...........................382 

Windshield Washer Fluid ...............................384 

Battery ..........................................................384 

Air Cleaner/Filter ...........................................385 

Passenger Compartment Air Filter .................387 

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...........389 

Section 4 - Service and Maintenance 

Tires ...............................................................391 

Run-Flat Tires (STS-V) ....................................392 

Inflation ........................................................394 

High Speed Operation ..................................395 

Tire Pressure Monitor....................................396 

Inspection and Rotation ................................399 

Tire Replacement ..........................................401 

Tire Chains.................................................... 403 

Winter Tires ..................................................404 

Wheel Locks ..................................................405 

Wheels ...........................................................405 

Wheel Alignment and Tire Balancing ............405 

Wheel Replacement ......................................405 

Lifting the Vehicle (STS-V Model Only)........408 

Vehicle Identification Number......................410 

Service Parts Identification Label..................411 

Fuses and Circuit Breakers ............................411 

Engine Compartment Fuse Block ..................415 

Left Side Rear Seat Fuse Block .......................418 

Right Side Rear Seat Fuse Block .....................420 

Bulb Replacement .........................................422 

Replacement Bulb Specifications ..................423 

Specifications and Capacities........................424 

Component Specifications ............................424 

Capacities (Approximate)..............................427 

Fuel Consumption and Emissions 

Information ..................................................428 

Appearance Care...........................................430 

355 . . .


Service and Maintenance 

■ MAINTENANCE 

GUIDELINES 

The required maintenance 

intervals vary considerably 

between climates, geographical 

locations, terrain and driving 

conditions. The export-specific 

Maintenance Schedule booklet 

provided with your vehicle 

shows the intervals required for 

the various maintenance 

procedures for your specific 

area. Make sure to follow the 

maintenance intervals listed in 

the export-specific Maintenance 

Schedule booklet and not those 

listed in any other English 

booklet that might be provided 

with your vehicle. 

CAUTION 

Make sure you dispose of materials 

in accordance with environmental 

protection 

regulations to help protect the 

environment and your health. 

Some parts cannot be recycled. 

■ ACCESSORIES AND 

MODIFICATIONS 

Adding accessories to your vehicle 

can affect your vehicle's performance 

and safety. 

Modifications may cause problems 

or damage to vehicle systems such 

as air bags, braking, stability, ride 

and handling, emissions, aerodynamics, 

durability, and electronic 

systems like antilock brakes, traction 

control and stability control. 

This damage would not be 


See your dealer before adding any 

equipment. 

. . . 356


Section 4 

CAUTION 

NOTICE 

Use clean fuel only. Contaminated 

fuel may reduce the life 

of the fuel delivery system and 

the engine. 

Fuel containing the octaneenhancing 

additive called 

methylcyclopentadienyl 

manganese tricarbonyl (MMT) 

is not recommended. 

See your dealer for information 

on additives. 

Your vehicle was not designed 

for fuels that contain methanol. 

Methanol can corrode metal 

parts in your fuel system and 

can also damage plastic and 

rubber parts. Damage caused 

by the use of fuels that contain 

methanol would not be 


Fuel containing oxygenates, 

such as ethers and ethanol, and 

reformulated fuel may be available 

in your area. 

It is recommended that you use 

these fuels if they comply with 

the required fuel specifications. 

However, E-85 (85% ethanol) 

and other fuels containing 

more than 10% ethanol must 

not be used in vehicles that 

were not designed for those 

fuels. 

■ FUEL 

CAUTION 

Fuel vapor is highly flammable. 

Keep sparks, flames and smoking 

materials away from fuel. 

The engine in your vehicle is 

designed to accept unleaded 

gasoline only. The use of leaded 

gasoline could affect your vehicle's 

performance as well as your vehicle's 

warranty. 

– 

– 

– 

– 

357 . . .



Use of the recommended fuel is an 

important part of the proper maintenance 

of your vehicle. 

You should use a high quality fuel 

which meets the minimum octane 

rating recommended. 

For the 3.6L V6 engine, use gasoline 

with a posted octane of 91 

(research method) or higher. For 

best performance and when 

towing a trailer, use a middle or 

premium grade gasoline. 



(research method) or higher. A 

middle grade gasoline with posted 

octane of 91 or higher can also be 

used, but the vehicle's acceleration 

may be slightly reduced. 



(research method) or higher. For 

best performance, use a gasoline 

with a posted octane of 98. In an 

emergency, a middle grade gasoline 

with a posted octane of 91 or 

higher can also be used. 

NOTICE 

If 91 octane fuel is used in the 

4.4L V8 engine, do not perform 

aggressive driving maneuvers. 

Refill the fuel tank with 95 

octane fuel as soon as possible 

to avoid engine damage. 

The use of gasoline with an octane 

rating lower than that recommended 

may cause engine knock. 

Continued use can cause engine 

damage and void the warranty. 

If you detect a heavy engine knock 

even when using a gasoline of the 

recommended octane rating, have 

the engine checked. Short periods 

of engine knock during hill climbing 

and acceleration are 

acceptable. 

To help keep fuel injectors and 

intake valves clean, see your dealer 

for information about preventing 

deposit-related problems. 

. . . 358


Section 4 

Fuel Consumption and 

Emissions Information 

See "Fuel Consumption and Emissions 

Information" later in this 

section for information regarding 

fuel consumption and carbon 

dioxide emissions. 

Filling the Tank 

The cap is behind a hinged door 

on the right side of your vehicle. 

Press on the rear edge of the fuel 

door and it will pop open. 

Use the fuel cap key to unlock the 

cap. 

Remove the fuel filler cap by turning 

slowly counter-clockwise. The 

cap has a spring in it. If you let go 

of the cap too soon, it will spring 

back to the right. Replace it by 

turning it clockwise. When you put 

the cap back on, continue to turn 

it clockwise until you hear a clicking 

noise. 

If the fuel cap is not installed properly, 

the CHECK GAS CAP 


Information Center display. See 


Messages" in Section 1. 

Also see "Malfunction Indicator 

Light" under "Warning Lights" in 


Check the fuel cap to be sure that 

it is properly installed. 

– 

– 

– 

– 

359 . . .



CAUTION 

Fuel vapor is highly flammable. 

Keep sparks, flames and smoking 

materials away from fuel. 

If you get gasoline on you and 

then something ignites it, you 

could be badly burned. 

To avoid injuries to you and 

others, read and follow all 

instructions on the gas station 

pump. 

Turn off your engine before 

refueling. 

CAUTION 

If you open the cap rapidly 

while pressure inside the tank is 

high, gasoline may spray out 

from the tank. Before you fully 

open the cap, turn it slightly to 

release the pressure from inside 

the tank. 

NOTICE 

If you have to get a new cap, be 

sure to get the right one. Otherwise, 

the cap may not vent 

properly, leading to serious fuel 

tank and emissions system 

damage. Your dealer knows the 

correct cap for your vehicle. 

CAUTION 

• Never fill a portable fuel container 

while it is in your 

vehicle. 

• Dispense gasoline only into 

approved containers. 

• Do not leave the fuel pump 

unattended while refueling. 

• Keep children away from the 

fuel pump. 

• Bring the fill nozzle in contact 

with the inside of the fill 

opening before operating the 

nozzle. 

Contact should be maintained 

until the filling is 

complete. 

•Avoid answering or making 

phone calls on your cellular 

phone. 

• Do not smoke while pumping 

gasoline. 

. . . 360


Section 4 

CAUTION 

CAUTION 

CAUTION 

Static electricity can ignite 

gasoline vapor. You can be 

burned and your vehicle 

damaged. 

Before you open the fuel filler 

cap, touch a metal part on your 

vehicle to discharge the static 

electricity in your body. 

Do not return to your seat while 

refueling. If you return to your 

seat, your body may be 

recharged with static electricity. 

To allow room for fuel expansion 

in the fuel tank (caused by 

heat from the engine), fill the 

tank only until the pump's automatic 

nozzle shuts off. 

If a fire starts while you are refueling, 

do not remove the 

nozzle. Stop the flow of fuel by 

turning off the pump. Notify 

the station attendant and leave 

the area immediately. 

NOTICE 

Don't spill fuel on the vehicle's 

exterior surfaces. It can damage 

your paint. If you do, wash it off 


– 

– 

– 

– 

361 . . .



■ HOOD RELEASE 

To open the hood, first pull the 

handle inside the vehicle, on the 

lower, driver's side of the instrument 

panel. 

Then pull up the secondary latch 

lever at the front of the vehicle and 

raise the hood. 

CAUTION 

An electric cooling fan can start 

even if the engine is not 

running. Be careful around any 

underhood electric fan. 

Be careful not to drop or spill 

things that will burn onto a hot 

engine. They could start a fire 

and you or others could be 

burned. 

Before closing the hood, make 

sure that all filler caps are on 

properly. 

Also, if your vehicle is equipped 

with engine compartment shields, 

make sure that the shields are 

properly reinstalled. 

See "Engine Compartment 

Shields" later in this section for 


. . . 362


Section 4 

■ ENGINE 

COMPARTMENT 

CAUTION 

Be careful not to drop or spill 

things that will burn onto a hot 

engine. They could start a fire 

and you or others could be 

burned. 

Engine Compartment Shields (If 

equipped) 


with engine compartment shields 

that surround the vehicle's engine 

cover. 

These shields need to be removed 

in order to access some underhood 

components. 

To remove the shields: 

1. Turn the fasteners to the left 

until they pop out. 

2. Remove the fasteners and the 

shields. 

To reinstall the shields: 

1. Locate the tabs on the left and 

right sides of each shield. 

2. Guide the tabs into the openings 

on the tower-to-tower 

brace in the engine 

compartment. 

– 

– 

3. Insert the fasteners into the 

top of the shield and press 

them back into place. 

– 

– 

363 . . .



3.6 L V6 Engine 

When you open the hood, you'll 

see: 

1. Engine Compartment Fuse 

Block 

2. Remote Negative Battery 

Terminal 

3. Remote Positive Battery 

Terminal 

4. Windshield Washer Reservoir 

5. Battery 

6. Passenger Compartment Air 

Filter 

7. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 

8. Oil Fill Cap 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 

9. Engine Oil Dipstick 

10. Brake Fluid Reservoir 

11. Engine Coolant Surge Tank 

and Pressure Cap 

12. Air Cleaner/Filter 

. . . 364


Section 4 

4.6 L V8 Engine 


see: 


Block 

2. Battery 


Terminal 


Filter 



Terminal 


1 2 3 4 5 6 

7 8 9 10 11 12 

– 

– 

– 







– 

365 . . .



4.4 L Supercharged V8 Engine 


see: 


Terminal 

2. Battery 


Block 


Filter 


Terminal 


7. Intercooler System Pressure 

Cap 



1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 






. . . 366


Section 4 

NOTICE 

Failure to use the recommended 

oil can result in engine 

damage not covered by your 

warranty. 

Checking the Fluid Level 

The best time to check the engine 

oil level is when the oil is warm: 

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface 

and apply the parking 

brake. 

Engine Oil 

CAUTION 

Used oil filters and empty oil 

containers should not be 

disposed of with regular trash. 

Have the oil and oil filter 

changed by an authorized 

service center, familiar with the 

requirements of the law regarding 

used oil disposal, to help 

protect the environment and 

your health. 

NOTICE 

Do not flush the engine oil 

system. 

The engine could be damaged 

and the repairs would not be 


Engine oil must be kept at correct 

levels to help ensure proper lubrication 

of the vehicle's engine. 

It is normal for an engine to use 

some oil, and some engines use 

more oil when they are new. It is 

the owner's responsibility to check 

the engine oil level regularly. 

2. Stop the engine and wait a 

few minutes for the oil to 

drain back into the oil pan. 

3. Remove the dipstick and wipe 

it clean. 

4. Reinsert the dipstick all the 

way until it is firmly seated. 

5. Remove the dipstick again and 

check the oil level. 

Keep the dipstick pointed 

down to get an accurate 

reading. 

– 

– 

– 

– 

367 . . .



. . . 368 

The oil level must be in the 

cross-hatched area on the dipstick. 

Add oil as required. 

Avoid over-filling the engine 

since this may cause engine 

damage. 

NOTICE 

Don't add too much oil. If your 

engine has so much oil that the 

oil level gets above the upper 

mark that shows the proper 

operating range, your engine 


NOTICE 

If you use your vehicle for 

competitive driving, your 

engine may use more oil than it 

would with normal use. Low oil 

levels can damage the engine. 

Be sure to check the oil level 

often during competitive driving 

and keep the level at or near 

the upper mark that shows the 

proper operating range on the 

engine oil dipstick. 

6. Reinstall the dipstick. 

FOR 

GASOLINE 

ENGINES 

C E R TIFIE D 

• AMERICAN PETROLEUM INSTITUTE • 

Choosing the Right Oil Quality 

Your vehicle requires the use of a 

synthetic oil meeting GM standard 

GM4718M. 

Your vehicle was filled with Mobil 

1 ® synthetic oil at the factory, 

which meets all the requirements 

for your vehicle. 

Oil meeting this standard will also 

have the American Petroleum 

Institute Starburst symbol on its 

container. 

Only use oil that has the American 

Petroleum Institute Starburst 

symbol on its container.


Section 4 

If an oil meeting GM standard 

GM4718M is not available, use an 

oil that meets the American Petroleum 

Institute Service SM or GM- 

LL-A-025 service requirements. 

However, when you are not 

changing the oil, but rather 

adding oil to maintain the engine 

oil level, oil meeting this GM standard 

may not be available. You 

may use a substitute 5W-30 oil 

with the American Petroleum Institute 

Starburst symbol at all 

temperatures. 

Substitute oil not meeting GM 

Standard GM4718M should not 

be used for an oil change. 

SAE 0W-30 

SAE 5W-30 

SAE 10W-30 

SAE 5W-40 

SAE 10W-40 

°C -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 

°F -22 -4 14 32 50 68 86 104 122 

– 

– 

– 

Choosing the Right Oil Viscosity 

SAE 5W-30 is best for your vehicle. 

If you are unable to find oil of the 

recommended viscosity, then 

consider the range of temperature 

your vehicle will be operated in 

before the next oil change and use 

the chart to choose an alternative 

that meets the required quality 

standards. 

369 . . . 

–



NOTICE 

Using engine oils of a viscosity 

other than those recommended 

could result in engine damage. 



Engine Oil Additives 

Do not add anything to your 

engine oil. Oils of the recommended 

quality are all you need for 

good performance and engine 

protection. 

Engine Oil Change Intervals 

The required oil and oil filter 

change intervals vary considerably 

between climates, geographical 

locations, terrain and driving 

conditions. The export-specific 


provided with your vehicle shows 

the oil and oil filter change intervals 

required for your specific area. 

Make sure to follow the change 

intervals listed in the export-specific 


and not those listed in any other 

English booklet that might be 

provided with your vehicle. 

. . . 370


Section 4 

The oil and oil filter change intervals 

recommended in the Maintenance 

Schedule for your engine 

are based on the use of recommended 

quality oils and high quality 

filters. Using oil other than 

those recommended, or changing 

the oil and filter at longer intervals 

than recommended could reduce 

engine life. 

NOTICE 

The 4.4L V8 engine uses a 

specific oil filter. Use of engine 

oil filters other than the filter 

recommended could result in 

engine damage. 



How frequently you have to 

change the oil depends on your 

driving patterns, engine rpm and 

engine temperature. 

Depending on your driving conditions, 

the mileage interval at which 

an oil change is necessary can vary 

considerably. 

When the remaining oil life is low, 

the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON 

message will appear. 



information. 

After the oil change message 

comes on, change the engine oil 

as soon as possible within the next 

1000 km (600 miles). 

Even if the oil life system does not 

indicate that an oil change is 

necessary, the engine oil and filter 

must be changed at least once a 

year. 

After you change the oil, the oil life 

monitor will need to be reset. See 



Information Center" in Section 1 



- ENGINE OIL LIFE 

– 

– 

– 

– 

371 . . .



It is normal for an engine to use 

some oil, and some engines use 

more oil when they are new. It is 

the owner's responsibility to check 

the engine oil level regularly. 

NOTICE 

Engine damage resulting from 

improper maintenance is not 

covered by the New Vehicle 

Warranty. 

Engine Coolant 

CAUTION 

If your engine overheats, see 

"Engine Overheating" in 

Section 5. Continued operation 

of the overheated engine, even 

for a short time, may result in 

a fire and the possibility of 

personal injury and/or severe 

vehicle damage. 

CAUTION 

The cooling system in your 

vehicle is pressurized. Only add 

coolant when the cooling 

system or coolant is cold. 

The cooling system in your vehicle 

is designed to use a coolant (a 

mixture of ethylene glycol, corrosion 

inhibitors and water) rather 

than plain water. Use a 50/50 

mixture of clean water and DEX- 

COOL ® coolant. If you use this 

mixture, you don't need to add 

anything else. 

. . . 372


Section 4 

NOTICE 

Do not substitute any liquids for 

the proper coolant mixture. 

Otherwise, premature corrosion 

may result and the engine 

coolant will require change 

sooner. 

Damage caused by the use of 

any coolant that is not recommended 

is not covered by your 

new vehicle warranty. 

If you use the proper coolant, 

you do not need any extra additives 

or inhibitors. These can be 

harmful to your vehicle. 

Check the coolant level at regular 

intervals, such as when refueling. 

The coolant level can be checked 

by looking at the see-through 

surge tank without having to 

remove the cap. 

The vehicle must be on a level 

surface. 

CAUTION 





Locate the coolant surge tank and 

follow the arrow from the top of 

the tank, down the side to the 

horizontal mark. 

If the engine compartment is cool, 

the level should be at the FULL 

COLD/FROID mark. 

– 

– 

– 

– 

373 . . .



CAUTION 






If the coolant level is low, add a 

50/50 mixture of water and DEX- 

COOL ® coolant to bring the level 

to the proper mark. 

CAUTION 









NOTICE 

If there is too much water in the 

coolant mixture, the liquid 

could freeze and crack the 

engine and other vehicle parts. 

CAUTION 









technician. 

Reinstall the cap. 

See the Maintenance Schedule 

booklet to find out when the coolant 

must be replaced. 

NOTICE 

The surge tank cap is a pressure-type 

cap and must be 

tightly installed to prevent coolant 

loss and possible engine 

damage from overheating. Be 

sure the cap is hand tightened 

and fully seated. 

CAUTION 

Used coolant should not be 


Have the coolant changed by 

an authorized service center, 

familiar with the requirements 

of the law regarding used coolant 

disposal, to help protect the 

environment and your health. 

. . . 374


Section 4 

INTERCOOLER SYSTEM (STS-V 

MODELS ONLY) 

NOTICE 


the coolant level should be up to 

the COLD FILL mark on the intercooler 

filler neck. 

The intercooler system on the 

4.4L V8 engine has a specific 

coolant fill procedure. Failure to 

follow this procedure may 

result in the engine overheating 

and in severe engine damage. 

See "Intercooler System" under 

"Engine Overheating" in 

Section 5 for the proper fill 

procedure. 


surface. 

Turn off the engine. 

Locate the intercooler system pressure 

cap. 

CAUTION 






If the coolant level is low, add a 

50/50 mixture of water and DEX- 

COOL ® coolant to bring the level 

to the proper mark. 

– 

– 

– 

Reinstall the cap. 

– 

375 . . .



CAUTION 









CAUTION 









technician. 

NOTICE 

The intercooler system cap is a 

pressure-type cap and must be 






. . . 376


Section 4 

Automatic Transmission 

Fluid 

It is not necessary to check the 

transmission fluid in your vehicle, 

however you may have the fluid 

level checked by your dealer or 

service center when you have the 

oil changed. If the fluid is leaking, 

have your vehicle serviced. 

There is a specific procedure for 

checking and changing the automatic 

transmission fluid. 

As it is difficult to perform the 

procedure yourself, have the fluid 

level checked or changed by your 

dealer or service center. 

See the "Recommended Fluids and 

Lubricants" chart later in this 

section to determine what kind of 

fluid to use. 

Change the fluid and filter at the 

intervals recommended in your 


NOTICE 


any fluid that is not recommended 



– 

– 

– 

– 

377 . . .



Transfer Case Lubricant 

(All-Wheel Drive Vehicles) 

It is not necessary to regularly 

check the fluid unless you suspect 

there is a leak in the system or you 

hear an unusual noise. 

Fluid loss in this system could indicate 

a problem. Have the system 

inspected. 




fluid to use. 

Park the vehicle on a level surface 

and apply the parking brake. 


Check the level of the lubricant by 

removing the plug. 

Add lubricant, if needed, to bring 

the level up to the bottom of the 

filler plug hole . 

When reinstalling the plug, do not 

overtighten it. 

A 

Front Axle Lubricant (All- 

Wheel Drive Vehicles) 







inspected. 




fluid to use. 




. . . 378


Section 4 

Rear Axle Lubricant 

A 







inspected. 

– 





filler plug hole . 




fluid to use. 






filler plug hole. 

– 

– 



– 

379 . . .



Rear Differential Cooler 


Your vehicle may be equipped with 

a rear differential cooler system. 

The differential cooler is designed 

to reduce the temperature of the 

rear differential fluid during high 

speed driving. The differential cooler 

system is controlled by the 

powertrain control module and 

functions when conditions require 

it to operate. 

The differential cooler system also 

has a maintenance feature that 

operates the system for approximately 

15 seconds under certain 

conditions during initial vehicle 

operation. You may hear the 

system run during this maintenance 

cycle. This is normal. 


this system, fluid capacity is 0.31 

liters above the standard system. 

Power Steering Fluid 


check the power steering fluid 

unless you suspect there is a leak in 

the system or you hear an unusual 

noise. 



inspected. 

. . . 380


Section 4 

To check the fluid level: 

1. Turn off the ignition and let 

the engine compartment cool 

down. 




fluid to use. 

2. Wipe the cap and the top of 

the reservoir clean. 

3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the 

dipstick clean. Replace the cap 

and completely tighten it. 

4. Remove the cap again and 

check the fluid level on the 

dipstick. 

The level should be within the 

HOT area. 

5. If the level is low, add enough 

fluid to bring the level up to 

the proper area on the 

dipstick. 

NOTICE 

Using the wrong kind of fluid 

could damage system components. 

Always use the recommended 

fluid. 


any fluid that is not recommended 



– 

– 

– 

– 

381 . . .



Brake Master Cylinder Fluid 

There are two reasons why the 

brake fluid level in the master 

cylinder might go down. The first 

is that the brake fluid level decreases 

by an acceptable amount 

during normal brake lining wear. 

When new linings are put in, the 

fluid level goes back up. The other 

reason is that fluid may be leaking 

out of the brake system. If it is, you 

should have the brake system 

fixed. 

It is not a good idea to "top off" 

your brake fluid. Adding brake 

fluid will not correct a leak. If you 

add fluid when the linings are 

worn, then there will be too much 

fluid when you get new brake 

linings. You should add (or 

remove) brake fluid, as necessary, 

only when work is done on the 

brake hydraulic system. 

CAUTION 

If there is too much brake fluid, 

it can spill on the engine. The 

fluid will burn if the engine is 

hot enough. You or others 

could be burned, and your 

vehicle could be damaged. Add 

brake fluid only when work is 

done on the brake hydraulic 

system. 

CAUTION 

Used brake fluid should not be 


Have the brake fluid changed 

by an authorized service center, 

familiar with the requirements 

of the law regarding used brake 

fluid disposal, to help protect 


health. 

. . . 382


Section 4 

Check the master cylinder fluid 

level if the CHECK BRAKE FLUID 

message appears on the Driver 




information. 

The level should be at the proper 

mark. 

If it is low, bring it up to the proper 

level using DOT-3 fluid from a 

sealed container. 

To prevent contamination of the 

brake fluid, make sure the brake 

reservoir and cap are thoroughly 

clean before removing the cap. 

DOT-4 brake fluid is also compatible 

with the components of your 

brake system. 

Before adding DOT-4 brake fluid, 

flush the brake hydraulic system. 

If you choose to use DOT-4 brake 

fluid, flush your brake system and 

refill it with new brake fluid every 

two years. 

See "Recommended Fluids and 

Lubricants" later in this section. 

CAUTION 

With the wrong kind of fluid in 

your brake system, your brakes 

may not work well. This could 

cause a collision. Always use the 

proper brake fluid. 

NOTICE 

– 

• Using the wrong kind of fluid 

could severely damage system 

components. Always use 

the proper brake fluid. 

• Don't spill brake fluid on the 

vehicle's exterior surfaces. It 

can damage your paint. If you 

do, wash it off immediately. 

– 

– 

– 

383 . . .



Windshield Washer Fluid 

Use windshield washer solvent 

such as GM Optikleen ® rather 

than water to prevent freezing and 

for better cleaning. 

If the washer fluid reservoir is low 

on fluid, CHECK WASHER FLUID 



Add washer fluid until the tank is 

full. 

NOTICE 

• Don't mix water with readyto-use 

washer fluid. It could 

freeze and damage washer 

system components. 

• When it's very cold outside, 

only fill the tank 3/4 full with 

fluid to allow for expansion. 

• Don't use engine coolant for 

your windshield washer. It can 

damage your washer system 

and paint. 

Battery 

CAUTION 

Batteries have acid that can 

burn you and gas that can 

explode. You can be hurt badly 

if you aren't careful. See the 

section titled "How to Use this 

Manual" for tips on how to 

work around a battery without 

getting hurt. 

Battery posts, terminals and 

related accessories contain lead 

and lead compounds which can 

cause cancer and reproductive 

harm. Wash hands after 

handling. 

. . . 384


Section 4 


battery that requires no periodic 

maintenance. 

When it is time for a new battery, 

purchase one with same replacement 

number that is shown on the 

original battery's label. 

• You will never have to add 

water to the battery. 

• If your vehicle will not be 

driven for an extended period 

of time, disconnect the cable 

from the negative ("-") terminal 

of the battery or use a "trickle" 

charger to prevent discharge. 

Air Cleaner/Filter 

3.6L V6 and 4.6L V8 Engines 

A disposable air filter element is 

contained in the air cleaner. 

Inspect and change the filter at the 

intervals recommended in your 


1. To access the filter, remove 

the screws that hold the air 

cleaner cover in place. 

Remove the cover. 

2. Disconnect the coolant recovery 

hose so that it is not going 

across the top of the engine 

air cleaner/filter. 

3. Loosen the clamp and remove 

the duct from the passenger 

side of the engine air cleaner/ 

filter. 

4. The two sides of the air 

cleaner/filter housing are 

hinged at the bottom. Open 

the cover by pushing the top 

of the cover toward the 

engine. 

5. Remove the filter from the 

housing. 

Take care to dislodge as little 

dirt as possible. 

– 

– 

– 

– 

385 . . .



6. Away from the vehicle's 

engine compartment, lightly 

shake the filter to release loose 

dust and dirt. 

Change the filter if it remains 

caked with dirt. 

For the type of filter to use, see 

"Component Specifications" 

under "Specifications and Capacities" 


7. Reverse the steps for 

installation. 

CAUTION 

The air filter must be placed 

properly unless you are doing 

repairs or maintenance work. 

Dirt could enter the engine and 

may damage it. 

If the engine is started with the 

air filter improperly positioned, 

a backfire might occur and it 

may cause a fire due to the 

flame possibly created near the 

engine. 

4.4L V8 Engine 

There is a specific procedure to 

inspect and/or replace the air filter 

element on the 4.4L V8 engine. 

It is recommended that this procedure 

be performed by your dealer. 

See your dealer or a qualified technician 

for service. 

. . . 386


Section 4 


Air Filter 


passenger compartment air filter 

which filters outside air entering 

the vehicle. 

There are two types of filters 

available: 

• Standard dust filter 

The filter removes contaminants 

such as pollen and dust 

from the air entering the 

vehicle. 

• Dust/odor filter 

This filter removes contaminants 

such as pollen and dust 

from the air entering the vehicle, 

and has a charcoal element 

which helps reduce odors. 

Change the filter at the intervals 

recommended in your Maintenance 

Schedule. 



control system, the filter may 

require early replacement. 

The access panel for the filter is on 

the passenger's side of the engine 

compartment, below the hood at 

the base of the windshield. 

– 

– 

– 

– 

387 . . .



To change the filter: 

1. Peel back the rubber hood 

seal from the edge of the 

screen covering the vent. 

2. Remove the three fasteners 

that hold the filter cover in 

place. 

Remove the cover. 

3. Lift the outboard edge of the 

plastic water deflector to 

release the retention tab. 

Lift the inboard edge of the 

plastic water deflector to release 

the retension tab. 

4. Lift and slide the water deflector 

towards the inboard side, 

and remove it. 

The top edge of the filter 

should be visible. 

5. Lift the filter up and out of the 

housing. 

NOTICE 

Driving without the passenger 

compartment air filter properly 

installed may allow water or 

other debris to enter the 

climate control system. 

The climate control system 


Be sure to install a new air filter 

after removing the old one. 

6. Install the new air filter. 

Make sure the arrow on the filter 

is pointing toward the passenger 

compartment. 

7. Reverse steps 1 through 3 to 

reinstall the water deflector, 

filter cover and hood seal. 

. . . 388


Section 4 

■ RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS 

USAGE 

Engine Oil 

Engine Coolant 

Intercooler System (4.4 L V8 

Only) 

Hydraulic Brake System 

Windshield Washer Solvent 

Parking Brake Cable Guides 

FLUID / LUBRICANT 

To determine the needed oil quality and viscosity for your vehicle's 

engine, see "Engine Oil" earlier in this section. 

50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL ® coolant. 

See "Engine Coolant" earlier in this section. 

50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL ® coolant. 

See "Intercooler System" earlier in this section. 

Delco Supreme 11 ® brake fluid or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid. 

GM Optikleen ® washer solvent. 

Chassis lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI grade 2, category LB or 

GC-LB (GM part no. 12377985 or equivalent). 

Power Steering System GM power steering fluid (GM part no. 89021184). 

Automatic Transmission DEXRON ® -VI Automatic transmission fluid. 

Key Lock Cylinders Multi-purpose lubricant, Superlube ® (GM part no. 12346241). 

– 

– 

– 

– 

Rear Axle 

Front Axle (All-Wheel Drive) 

SAE 75W-90 Synthetic axle lubricant (GM part no. 89021677 or equivalent) 

meeting GM Specification 9986115. 

SAE 75W-90 Synthetic axle lubricant (GM part no. 89021677 or equivalent) 

meeting GM Specification 9986115. 

389 . . .



■ RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS (CONTINUED) 

USAGE 

FLUID / LUBRICANT 

Transfer Case (All-Wheel Drive) Manual Transmission Fluid (GM part no. 88861800). 

Hood Latch Assembly, Secondary 

Latch, Pivots, Spring Anchor 

and Release Pawl 

Lubriplate ® lubricant aerosol (GM part no. 12346293) or lubricant meeting 

requirements of NLGI grade 2, category LB or GC-LB. 

Hood and Door Hinges Multi-purpose lubricant, Superlube ® (GM part no. 12346241). 

Weatherstrip Conditioning 

Weatherstrip lubricant (GM part no. 3634770) or dielectric silicone 

grease (GM part no. 12345579). 

. . . 390


Section 4 

■ TIRES 

Your new vehicle comes with highquality 

tires made by a leading tire 

manufacturer. 

If you ever have questions about 

your tire warranty, see the warranty 

booklet included with your vehicle's 

Owner's Manual or see your 

selling dealer. 

CAUTION 

Poorly maintained and improperly 

used tires are dangerous. 

• Do not overload your tires. 

Overloading the tires could 

cause them to overheat. You 

could have an air-out and a 

serious accident. 

• Do not underinflate your tires. 

Underinflating the tires could 

cause them to overheat. You 

could have an air-out and a 

serious accident. 

• Check the inflation pressure 

regularly. Tire pressure should 

be checked when the tires are 

cold. 


• Do not overinflate your tires. 

Overinflated tires are more 

likely to be punctured. 

•Worn, old tires can cause accidents. 

If the tread is badly 

worn, or if a tire has been 

damaged, replace it. 

• If you will be driving at high 

speeds, see "High Speed 

Operation" later in this section 

for inflation pressure 

adjustment information. 

– 

– 

– 

– 

391 . . .



NOTICE 


P255/45R18, 255/45ZR18 or 

P275/40R19 size tires, they are 

low-profile tires and are more 

susceptible to damage from 

road hazards or curb impact 

than standard profile tires. 

Tire and/or wheel assembly 

damage can occur when 

coming into contact with road 

hazards like potholes or sharp 

edged objects or when sliding 

into a curb. The vehicle warranty 

does not cover this type of 

damage. Keep tires set to the 

correct inflation pressure and, 

when possible avoid contact 

with curbs, potholes and other 

road hazards. 

RUN-FLAT TIRES (STS-V) 

Your vehicle does not have a spare 

tire or equipment to change a flat 

tire. 

The tires on your vehicle are runflat 

tires. These tires are built to 

operate effectively without any air 

pressure for up to 80 km and at 

speeds up to 90 km/h, but would 

then have to be replaced. 

However, if the distance you travel 

on a flat tire is less than 80 km, and 

if your speed is maintained at less 

than 90 km/h, you may be able to 

repair the flat tire. 

CAUTION 

If the system detects low tire 

pressure in one or more of the 

tires, the low tire pressure warning 

light will appear and 

CHECK TIRE PRESSURE will be 

displayed on the Driver Information 

Center. 


your vehicle's handling capabilities 

are reduced during severe 

maneuvers. If you drive too fast, 

you could lose control of the 

vehicle. You or others could be 

injured. Don't drive over 90 km/ 

h when this message is 

displayed. Drive cautiously and 

check the tire pressures as soon 

as possible. 

. . . 392


Section 4 

Run-flat tires perform so well without 

any air that a Tire Pressure 

Monitor may be used to alert you 

if a tire has lost pressure. See "Tire 

Pressure Monitor" later in this 

section. 

When driving on a flat tire, avoid 

pot-holes. Otherwise, wheel 

damage may occur. 

CAUTION 

Run-flat tires could explode 

during improper service. You or 

others could be injured or killed 

if you attempt to repair, 

replace, dismount or mount a 

run-flat tire. Let only a qualified 

technician service your tires. 

When a tire has been damaged, or 

if you have driven any distance on 

a deflated run-flat tire, check with 

an authorized service center to 

determine whether the tire can be 

repaired or whether it must be 

replaced. 

To maintain your vehicle's run-flat 

tire feature, make sure all replacement 

tires are run-flat tires. 

The valve stems on your run-flat 

tires have sensors that are part of 

the Tire Pressure Monitor system. 

The valve stem/sensors contain 

batteries which are designed to 

last ten years, under normal conditions. 

When battery replacement is 

required, the entire valve stem/ 

sensor assembly must be replaced. 


NOTICE 

Do not use liquid sealants in 

your tires. The use of sealants 

could damage the tire pressure 

monitor sensors. 



– 

– 

– 

– 

393 . . .



INFLATION 

See the tire information label for 

your vehicle's tire inflation 


To determine the location of your 

vehicle's tire information label, see 

"Vehicle Loading" in Section 3. 

The label gives the correct inflation 

pressures for your tires when 

they're cold. Cold means your 

vehicle has been sitting for three 

hours or more - or, if driven at all, 

for no more than 1.5 km (1 mile). 

The air pressure indicated on the 

label as "cold" should be maintained 

for the tires to perform 

properly. However, do not overload 

your vehicle. See "Vehicle 

Loading" in Section 3. 

Maintaining the cold tire pressure 

indicated on the tire information 

label leads to better fuel economy, 

longer tire life, a more comfortable 

ride and better overall driveability. 

If you replace the original tires on 

your vehicle with tires of a different 

size, the pressure listed on the 

tire information label may not be 

correct. Be sure to determine the 

correct tire pressure for the size of 

the tires on your vehicle. 

Check your tires at least once a 

month. 

NOTICE 

Improper tire pressure 

promotes adverse effects in tire 

life and vehicle performance. 

Excessively low inflation causes 

deflection of the tire and tire 

overheating which reduces tire 

strength and thus may damage 

the tires. It also causes tire overloading, 

abnormal wear, poor 

driveability, and poor fuel 

economy. 

Excessively high inflation causes 

abnormal tire wear and poor 

ride which promotes vehicle 

damage due to impact from 

road bumps. 

. . . 394


Section 4 

To check and adjust tire pressure: 

You cannot tell if your tires are 

properly inflated simply by looking 

at them. Radial tires may look 

properly inflated even when they 

are underinflated. 

For tire pressure inspection, the 

use of a quality pocket tire pressure 

gage is recommended. 

Remove the valve cap from the tire 

valve stem. 

Press the tire gage firmly onto the 

valve to get a pressure 

measurement. 

If the pressure is low, add air until 

you reach the recommended 

pressure. 

If you overfill the tire, release air by 

pushing on the metal stem in the 

center of the tire valve. 

Recheck the tire pressure. 

Be sure to put the valve caps back 

on the valve stems. They help 

prevent leaks by keeping out dirt 

and moisture. 

High Speed Operation 

CAUTION 

Driving at high speeds, 

160 km/h (100 mph) or higher, 

puts an additional strain on 

tires. Sustained high-speed 

driving causes excessive heat 

buildup and can cause sudden 

tire failure. You could crash and 

you or others could be killed. 

Some high-speed rated tires 

require inflation pressure 

adjustment for high-speed 

operation. When speed limits 

and road conditions permit a 

vehicle to be driven at high 

speeds, make sure the tires are 

rated for high-speed operation, 

are in excellent condition, and 

are set to the correct cold tire 

inflation pressure for the vehicle 

load. 

– 

– 

– 

– 

395 . . .



If you will be driving at speeds of 

160 km/h (100 mph) or faster, 

where it is legal, set the cold inflation 

pressure to the maximum 

inflation pressure shown on the 

tire sidewall or to 265 kPa (38 psi), 

whichever is lower. When you end 

this high-speed driving, return to 

the cold inflation pressure shown 

on the tire information label. 

See "Vehicle Loading" in Section 3 


Tire Pressure Monitor 

NOTICE 

Modifications made to the tire 

pressure monitor system by 

anyone other than an authorized 



This system uses radio and sensor 

technology to monitor tire 

pressure. 

Sensors, located on each wheel, 

transmit tire pressure readings to a 

receiver in the vehicle. 

If the system detects low tire pressure 

in one or more of the tires, the 

low tire pressure warning light will 

appear and CHECK TIRE PRES- 

SURE will be displayed on the 

Driver Information Center. 

If you get the low tire pressure 

warning, stop as soon as possible, 

check all the tires for damage and 

inflate them to the proper 

pressure. 

. . . 396


Section 4 

The low tire pressure warning light 

and/or the CHECK TIRE PRES- 

SURE message will appear at each 

ignition cycle until the low tire 

pressure condition is corrected. 


information: 

• Low Tire Pressure Light 


Messages 

- CHECK TIRE PRESSURE 

Excessively low inflation causes 

deflection of the tire and tire overheating 

which reduces tire 

strength and thus may damage 

the tires. It also causes tire overloading, 

abnormal wear, poor 

driveability, and poor fuel 

economy. 

Check the tire inflation pressures 

regularly using your Driver Information 

Center. 

Check your tires at least once a 

month. 

See the tire information label for 

your vehicle's tire inflation 





If you replace the original tires on 

your vehicle with tires of a different 

size, the pressure listed on the 

tire information label may not be 

correct. Be sure to determine the 

correct tire pressure for the size of 

the tires on your vehicle. 

Make sure the replacement tire is 

compatible with your tire pressure 

monitoring system. If not, the 

system may give inaccurate low 

pressure warnings. 

– 

– 

– 

– 

397 . . .



Cooler weather conditions may 

cause the low tire pressure warning 

light and/or the CHECK TIRE 

PRESSURE message to appear 

when you start the vehicle. The 

message will disappear as you 

drive. This could be an early indicator 

that the tire pressures are 

getting low and need to be 

checked and inflated to the proper 

pressure. 

If the warning light or the message 

does not disappear, make sure to 

check the tire pressure and inflate 

the tires to the recommended 

pressure as necessary. 

The Tire Pressure Monitor can alert 

you about a low tire pressure 

condition, but it does not replace 

normal tire maintenance. 

It is the owner's responsibility to 

make sure the correct tire pressure 

is maintained. 

Tire Pressure Monitor System 

Problems 

The low tire pressure warning light 

will flash for about one minute and 

then shine steadily for the remainder 

of the ignition cycle if a problem 

with the tire pressure monitor 

system is detected. 

The warning will reappear each 

time the vehicle is started until the 

problem is corrected. 

A text message may also appear in 


display. 

SERVICE TIRE MONITOR appears 

when the tire pressure monitoring 

system is not working properly. 

This message and/or the low tire 

pressure light may appear under 

the following conditions: 

• One or more of the tire sensors 

may be missing or inoperative. 

• Following normal tire rotation, 

the tire pressure monitor system 

was not reset properly to 

match the sensor's identification 

code to its corresponding 

tire/wheel position. See your 


• The original tires or wheels on 

your vehicle were replaced 

with tires or wheels not compatible 

with the tire inflation 

monitor system. 

. . . 398


Section 4 

• The vehicle is near a facility or 

an electronic device that uses 

radio wave frequencies similar 

to those of the tire pressure 

monitor system. 

If the problem persists, see your 


Some vehicles are equipped with a 

tire sealant and compressor kit. 

The kit contains a liquid tire sealant 

approved by General Motors. 

See "Tire Sealant and Compressor 

Kit" for more information. 

NOTICE 


tire pressure monitoring 

system. 

Use only the GM-approved tire 

sealant. See your dealer for 

assistance. 

Other liquid tire sealants may 

damage the tire pressure 

sensors. 

INSPECTION AND 

ROTATION 

• Vehicles with front and rear 

tires of different sizes: 

Do not rotate your tires 

because the front and rear tires 

are different sizes. They are 

directional tires and should not 

be used at any other tire 

location. 

Check your tires and wheels 

regularly for unusual wear or 

damage. 

– 

– 

– 

– 

399 . . .



• If your vehicle is equipped with 

the same size tires on all four 

wheels, they can be rotated. 

To make your tires last longer, 

have them inspected and 

rotated at the mileages recommended 

in your Maintenance 

Schedule. Follow the diagram 

above. 

After rotation, adjust the front 

and rear tire pressures according 

to the tire information 

label. 

If you rotate your tires or 

replace any of your tires, the 

tire pressure monitor will need 

to be reset. See your dealer for 

service. 

Make sure the wheel nuts are 

properly tightened. 



CAUTION 















CAUTION 

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly 

tightened wheel nuts can 

cause the wheel to become 

loose and even come off. This 

could lead to an accident. Be 

sure to use the correct wheel 

nuts. 

NOTICE 










. . . 400


Section 4 

TIRE REPLACEMENT 

The rubber in your vehicle's tires 

degrades over time, even if the 

tires are not used. Various factors 

affect how quickly rubber 

degrades. Driving speeds, road 

conditions, temperatures, vehicle 

loading, and inflation pressure 

maintenance all affect how the 

tires on your vehicle age. 

If maintained properly according 

to the maintenance schedule, the 

tires on your vehicle will most likely 

require replacement before they 

become degraded due to age. 

A 

Your tires have tread wear indicators 

. They tell you when a tire 

has 1.6 mm (1/16 inch) or less of 

tread left. 

If you can see the tread wear indicators 

at three places around the 

tire, as in this picture, you need a 

new tire. Here are other things 

that mean you need to get a new 

tire: 

• The tread or sidewall is 

cracked, cut or snagged deep 

enough to show cord or fabric. 

• The tire has a bump, bulge or 

split. 

The tire information label says 

what size tires you need. 





replace all four tires at the same 

time. 

Replacing fewer than four tires at 

one time can affect the braking 

and handling performance of your 

vehicle. 

When replacing tires, you should 

use the same size, load range, 

speed rating and construction 

type as the original tires on the 

vehicle. 

See "Winter Tires" later in this 


– 

– 

– 

– 

401 . . .



Make sure the replacement tire is 

compatible with your tire pressure 

monitoring system. If not, the 

system may give inaccurate low 

pressure warnings. 

See "Tire Pressure Monitor" earlier 


information. 

CAUTION 

Mixing brands, sizes or types of 

tires on your vehicle (other than 

the tire brand/size/type originally 

installed on your vehicle) 

could cause you to lose control 

while driving and may also 

damage the vehicle. Be sure to 

use the correct brand, size and 

type tires on all wheels. 

If you rotate your tires or replace 

any of your tires, the tire pressure 

monitor will need to be reset. See 


Using a tire or wheel size other 

than the size originally installed on 

your vehicle may cause problems 

or damage to various vehicle 

systems, such as braking, ride and 

handling, and resistance to rollover, 

and to electronic systems like 

antilock brakes, traction control 

and stability control. 

CAUTION 

If you add different sized 

wheels, and then if tires not 

recommended for those wheels 

are selected, your vehicle may 

not provide an acceptable level 

of performance and safety. 

You may increase the chance 

that you will crash and suffer 

serious injury. 

Only use GM specific wheel and 

tire systems developed for your 

vehicle, and have them properly 

installed by a GM certified 

technician. 

. . . 402


Section 4 

CAUTION 

NOTICE 

TIRE CHAINS 

Never drive faster than the 

speed for which your tires are 

rated, regardless of the legal 

speed limit. If you anticipate 

driving your vehicle at high 

speeds frequently and/or for 

prolonged periods of time, 

check with your vehicle/tire 

dealer for the proper type of 

tires to use for your specific 

driving and weather conditions. 

Vehicles left standing for an 

extended period of time may 

be prone to exhibit flat spotting 

on the tires. 

CAUTION 

If you use bias-ply tires on your 

vehicle, the wheel rim flanges 

could develop cracks after 

many miles of driving. A tire 

and/or wheel could fail suddenly, 

causing a crash. Use only 

radial-ply tires with the wheels 

on your vehicle. 

CAUTION 

Do not use tire cables if your 

tire size is: 

• P275/40R19 

There is not enough clearance. 

Tire cables used on a vehicle 

without the proper amount of 

clearance can cause damage to 

the brakes, suspension or other 

vehicle parts. The area 

damaged by the tire cables 

could cause you to lose control 

of your vehicle and you or 

others may be injured in a 

crash. 

– 

– 

– 

– 

403 . . .



Use tire cables only when you have 

to. 

Use only 11 mm (0.5 inch) traction 

cables that meet or exceed SAE 

Class "S" requirements and that 

are the correct size for your tires. 

Install them on the rear tires as 

tightly as possible with the ends 

securely fastened. 

Do not install tire cables on the 

front tires. 

Drive slowly and follow the manufacturer's 

instructions. If you hear 

the cables contacting the vehicle, 

stop and retighten them. 

NOTICE 

Driving too fast or spinning the 

wheels with cables on will 

damage the vehicle. 

WINTER TIRES 

Your all season tires may not offer 

the traction or level of performance 

you would like on snow or 

ice. If you expect to frequently 

drive on snow or ice covered 

roads, you may want to get winter 

tires. 

See your dealer for details regarding 

winter tire availability and 

proper tire selection. 

If you choose to use winter tires, 

you should use the same size, load 

range, speed rating and construction 

type as the original tires on 

the vehicle. 

When using winter tires on your 

vehicle, be sure to use them on all 

four wheels. 

Using winter tires could adversely 

affect vehicle handling. There may 

be a decrease in dry road traction, 

an increase in road noise and a 

shorter tire tread life. 

Winter tires with the same speed 

rating as the original tires may not 

be available for H, V, W, Y and ZR 

speed rated tires. If you choose 

snow tires with a lower speed 

rating, never exceed the tire's 

maximum speed capability. 

See "Tire Replacement" earlier in 

this section for additional 

information. 

. . . 404


Section 4 

WHEEL LOCKS 

■ WHEELS 

Wheel Replacement 

The wheel lock key package may 

be located in a bag in the trunk. 

The package includes the wheel 

lock key and instructions. 

There is also a registration number 

printed on a card in the package. 

Make sure not to lose this card in 

case the wheel lock key is lost and 

a replacement is needed. 

When removing the wheels on 

your vehicle, make sure to use the 

wheel lock key. 

Wheel Alignment and Tire 

Balancing 

If there is unusual tire wear or if the 

vehicle pulls one way or the other, 

the alignment may need to be 

reset. 

If the vehicle vibrates when you 

are driving on a smooth road, the 

wheels may need to be balanced. 

Replace any wheel that is bent, 

cracked, or badly rusted or corroded. 

If wheel nuts keep coming 

loose, the wheel, wheel nuts and 

wheel bolts should be replaced. 

While some aluminum wheels can 

be repaired, other types of wheels 

should be replaced if they leak air. 

Use only new, GM original equipment. 

See your dealer for 

assistance. 

– 

– 

– 

– 

405 . . .



Using a wheel size other than the 

size originally installed on your 

vehicle may cause problems or 

damage to various vehicle 

systems, such as braking, ride and 

handling, and resistance to rollover, 

and to electronic systems like 

antilock brakes, traction control 

and stability control. 

CAUTION 

Using the wrong replacement 

parts could be dangerous. It 

could affect the braking and 

handling of your vehicle. You 

could lose control of the vehicle 

and you or others may be 

injured. 

NOTICE 

The wrong wheel can cause 

problems with bearing life, 

brake cooling, speedometer or 

odometer calibration, headlight 

aim, bumper height, vehicle 

ground clearance and tire clearance 

to the body and chassis. 

CAUTION 

Putting a used wheel on the 

vehicle is dangerous. 

You would not know how the 

wheel had been used or how 

many miles it had been driven. 

The wheel could fail suddenly, 

causing a crash. 

. . . 406


Section 4 

CAUTION 

CAUTION 

NOTICE 















Never use oil or grease on studs 

or nuts. If you do, the nuts 

might come loose. Your wheel 

could fall off, causing a serious 

accident. 

CAUTION 

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly 

tightened wheel nuts can 

cause the wheel to become 

loose and even come off. This 

could lead to an accident. Be 

sure to use the correct wheel 

nuts. If you have to replace 

them, be sure to get the right 

kind. 









later in this Section for the 

proper wheel nut torque. 

– 

– 

– 

– 

407 . . .



■ LIFTING THE VEHICLE 

(STS-V MODEL ONLY) 

NOTICE 

If the doors are locked with the 

security system armed, the 

alarm will activate when the 

vehicle is inclined for towing. 

CAUTION 

Lifting a vehicle can cause injury. 

The vehicle can slip off the 

jack and injure you or other 

people. 

To help prevent the vehicle 

from moving: 

• Find a level place to lift your 

vehicle. 

• Set the parking brake firmly. 

• Place the automatic gear shift 

in P (Park). 

•Turn off the engine. 

• Put blocks at the front and 

rear of the tires that will stay 

in contact with the ground. 

CAUTION 

Getting under a vehicle when it 

is jacked up is dangerous. If the 

vehicle slips off the jack, you 

could be badly injured or killed. 

Never get under a vehicle when 

it is supported only by a jack. 

CAUTION 

Raising your vehicle with the 

jack improperly positioned can 

damage the vehicle or may 

allow the vehicle to fall off the 

jack. To avoid personal injury 

and vehicle damage, be sure to 

fit the jack lift head into the 

proper location before raising 

the vehicle. 

. . . 408


Section 4 

NOTICE 

Damage caused by raising the 

vehicle with the jack improperly 

positioned is not covered by the 

vehicle warranty. 

To prevent vehicle damage: 

• Make sure the jack meets the 

weight standards for the vehicle 

and is in good working 

order. 

• Be sure to follow any instructions 

that come with the jack. 

• Place a pad or block between 

the jack and the vehicle. 

• Make sure to use the proper 

jacking locations. 

• Lift the vehicle only in the 

areas specified in this manual. 

See your dealer for more 

information. 

Lifting From the Front 

The front lifting points can be 

accessed from either side of the 

vehicle, behind the front tires. 

Locate the front lifting points 

using the diagram above. 

The front lifting location is 37 cm 

from the rear edge of the front 

wheel well. 

Place a pad or block between the 

jack and the vehicle. 

Make sure the jack is centered on 

the lifting point. 

Then raise the vehicle off the 

ground to the required height. 

– 

– 

– 

– 

409 . . .



Place a pad or block between the 

jack and the vehicle. 

Make sure the jack is centered on 

the lifting point. 

Then raise the vehicle off the 

ground to the required height. 

SAMPLE4UX1M072675 

Lifting From the Rear 

The rear lifting points can be 

accessed from the rear of the 

vehicle. 

Locate the rear lifting points using 

the diagram above. 

The rear lifting location is 17 cm 

from the front edge of the rear 

wheel well. 

■ VEHICLE 

IDENTIFICATION 

NUMBER 

This number is the legal identifier 

for your vehicle. 

The vehicle identification number 

appears on a plate in the front 

corner of the instrument panel, on 

the driver's side. You can see it if 

you look through the windshield 

from outside your vehicle. 

. . . 410


Section 4 

The number may be found in one 

or more of the following locations: 

• on the shock tower in the 

engine compartment on the 

right side of the vehicle 

• on the lower right side of the 

engine cylinder block. 

• Service Parts Identification 

Label 

• Certification/Tire Label 

The eighth character of the vehicle 

identification number is the 

engine code. This code will help 

you identify your engine, specifications 

and replacement parts. 

■ SERVICE PARTS 

IDENTIFICATION LABEL 

This label is located in the trunk. It 

is very helpful if you ever need to 

order parts. 

On this label, you will find the 

following information: 

• the vehicle identification 

number 

• the model designation 

• paint information 

• a list of all production options 

and special equipment 

Do not remove this label from the 

vehicle. 

■ FUSES AND CIRCUIT 

BREAKERS 

The wiring circuits in your vehicle 

are protected from short circuits 

by a combination of fuses, circuit 

breakers and fusible thermal links. 

This greatly reduces the chance of 

fires caused by electrical problems. 

If you ever have a problem on the 

road and don't have a spare fuse, 

you can borrow one that has the 

same amperage. Just pick some 

feature of your vehicle that you 

can get along without - like the 

radio or cigarette lighter - and use 

its fuse, if it is the correct amperage. 

Replace it as soon as you can. 

– 

– 

– 

– 

411 . . .



The underhood fuse block is located 

on the right side of the engine 

compartment. 


engine compartment shields, the 

shields need to be removed in 

order to access the fuse block. 

See "Engine Compartment 

Shields" earlier in this section for 


There are also two fuse blocks 

located under the rear seat. 

See "Removable Rear Seat Cushion" 

in Section 2 for information 

on removing or installing the 

cushion. 

To remove a fuse block cover, 

press the tabs on the cover, then 

lift the cover off. 

Reinstall the cover when you are 

done. 

NOTICE 

There are exposed wires below 

the rear seat cushion. 

Do not let the metal on the seat 

cushion touch the exposed 

wires. 

Touching the exposed wires 

with metal could cause a short 

that could damage the battery 

and/or wires. 

Avoid contact between the rear 

seat and the fuse center when 

removing or installing the 

cushion. 

Do not remove covers from 

covered parts. 

Do not store anything under 

the seat. 

CAUTION 

If a safety belt is twisted or is not 

properly routed through the 

seat cushion, it will not provide 

the protection that is needed in 

a crash. If it hasn't been routed 

through the seat cushion at all, 

it won't be there for the next 

passenger to use. After reinstalling 

the seat cushion, check to 

be sure that the safety belts are 

properly routed and are not 

twisted. 

. . . 412


Section 4 

20 

A 

Note: 

Your vehicle may not have all 

the fuses listed. 

NOTICE 

Do not spill liquids on the vehicle's 

electrical components, or 

damage may occur. 

– 

You can remove fuses with a fuse 

extractor. 

Look at the silver-colored band 

inside the fuse. If the band is 

broken or melted , replace the 

fuse. Be sure you replace a bad 

fuse with a new one of the correct 

size and rating. 

Always reinstall the fuse block 

cover when you are done. 

– 

– 

If a fuse blows, have your vehicle 

serviced immediately. 

– 

413 . . .



1 

49 50 51 

6 14 

55 56 

69 

2 

3 

4 

21 

23 

25 

27 

22 

24 

26 

28 

39 

40 

41 

42 

43 

44 

45 

52 

53 

54 

57 58 

15 16 17 

59 61 67 

18 

60 62 68 

63 

13 

19 20 

64 

70 

71 

72 

73 

74 

75 

29 

46 

12 

65 

5 

30 

31 

47 

48 

66 

32 

33 

34 

35 

36 

37 

38 

7 8 9 10 11 

. . . 414


Section 4 

Engine Compartment Fuse 

Block 

No. Circuits Protected 

Relays 

1 Cooling Fan, High 

Speed 

2 Cooling Fan, Low Speed 

3 Starter 

4 Front Blower Motor 

5 Windshield Wiper, High 

Speed 

6 Cooling Fan Series/Parallel 

7 Horn 

8 Brake Vacuum Pump 

9 Air Conditioning Compressor 

Clutch 


10 Fuel Cooling Pump 

11 Accessory; Rain Sensor; 

Headlight Washer Relay 

Coil; Windshield Wiper/ 

Washer Module 

12 Low-Beam Headlight; 

High Intensity Discharge 

Lighting 

13 High-Beam Headlight 

14 Parking Lights; Instrument 

Panel Dimming; 

Rear License Lights 

15 Fog Lights 

16 Spare 

No. 

Circuits Protected 

17 Heated Washer Nozzle; 

Air Quality; Antilock 

Brake System; Climate 

Control Panel; Transmission 

Control Module; 

Engine Control Module; 

Instrument Cluster 

18 Engine Controls 

19 Spare 

20 Spare 

– 

– 

– 

– 

415 . . .




Block (Continued) 

No. 


J-Case Fuses 

21 Cooling Fan, High 

Speed 

22 Spare 

23 Cooling Fan, Low Speed 

24 Not Used 

25 Starter 

26 Left Side Rear Seat Fuse 

Block 

27 Antilock Brake System 

Module; Stabilitrak ® 

System 

28 Left Side Rear Seat Fuse 

Block 

29 Right Side Rear Seat 

Fuse Block 

30 Spare 

31 Blower Motor 

No. 


48 Right Side Rear Seat 

Fuse Block 

Mini Fuses 

32 Spare 

33 Antilock Brake System 

Module; Stabilitrak ® 

System 

34 Horn 

35 Spare 

36 Air Conditioning Compressor 

Clutch 

37 Fuel Cooling 

38 Wiper/Washer Module 

Assembly 

No. 


39 Climate Control Panel; 

Headlight Leveling Control; 

Active Cruise Control; 

Relay Coils; Starter; 

Front Blower 

40 Not Used 

41 Head-Up Display; Steering 

Column Switch 

42 Engine Control Module; 

Transmission Control 

Module 

43 Spare 

44 Instrument Panel Module; 

Assembly Line Data 

Link Connector 

45 Front Accessory Power 

Outlet 

46 Rear Accessory Power 

Outlet 

. . . 416


Section 4 



No. 


47 Spare 

49 Left Parking Lights; Left 

Taillight 

50 Right Parking Lights; 

Right Taillight 

51 License Plate; Instrument 

Panel Dimming 

53 Spare 

54 Spare 

55 Climate Control Panel 

56 Antilock Brake Controller 

57 Engine Control Module; 

Transmission Control 

Module; Instrument 

Cluster 

58 Heated Headlight 

Washer; Air Quality 

Sensor 

No. 


59 Left High-Beam 

Headlight 

60 Right High-Beam 

Headlight 

61 Spare 

62 Instrument Panel Module, 

Voltage Check 

63 Spare 

64 Right Low-Beam 

Headlight 

65 Left Low-Beam 

Headlight 

66 Rain Sensor; Wiper 

Switch 

67 Rain Sensor; Relay Coil 

for Headlight Washer 

68 Front Fog Lights 

69 Easy Key Module; Instrument 

Panel Module 

No. 


70 Pre Oxygen Sensor; 

Camshaft Phaser Solenoid 

Actuator Valve 

Sensor 

71 Even Coils; Even Fuel 

Injectors 

72 Odd Coils; Odd Fuel 

Injectors 

73 Post Oxygen Sensor 

74 Engine Control Module 

75 Brake Vacuum Pump 

Circuit Breakers 

52 Headlight Washer Motor 

– 

– 

– 

– 

417 . . .



1 2 

3 4 5 6 

7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 

20 21 22 

23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 

Left Side Rear Seat Fuse 

Block 

. . . 418 


1 Intercooler Pump (STS- 

V Model Only) (Relay) 

2 Electronic Level Control; 

Compressor 

(Relay) 

3 Left Taillight; Left Position 

Lights (Relay) 

4 Power Seats (Circuit 

Breaker) 

5 Amplifier (Fuse) 

No. 


6 Spare (Diode) 

7 Intercooler Pump (STS- 

V Model Only) (Fuse) 

8 Theft Sensors; Auto 

Shifter; Power Sounder 

(Fuse) 

9 Suspension Module 

(Fuse) 

No. 


10 Rear Door Modules 

(Fuse) 

11 Electronic Level Control; 

Exhaust Solenoid 

(Fuse) 

12 Driver's Door Module; 

Front Door Subwoofers 

(Fuse) 

13 Infotainment System; 

Supervisory Control 

Module (Fuse)


Section 4 

Left Side Rear Seat Fuse 


No. 


14 Rear Heated Seats 

(Fuse) 

15 Spare (Fuse) 


17 Front Passenger Heated 

Seat; Auto Shifter; 

Occupant Protection; 

Electronic Tension 

Reducer for Front 

Safety Belts (Fuse) 

18 Trunk Release Motor 

(Relay) 

No. 


19 Reverse Lights; Ultrasonic 

Rear Parking 

Assist; Inside Rearview 

Mirror (Relay) 

20 Right Taillights; Right 

Position Lights (Relay) 

21 Ignition 3 (Relay) 

22 Electronic Level Control 

(Fuse) 

23 Rear Shelf Speaker 

(Fuse) 

24 Memory Seat Module; 

Lumbar (Fuse) 

No. 


25 Trunk Release; Valet 

Lockout Switch (Fuse) 

26 Reverse Lights; Ultrasonic 

Rear Parking 

Assist; Inside Rearview 

Mirror (Fuse) 

27 Air Bag (Fuse) 

28 Taillights (Fuse) 

29 Taillights; Position 

Lights (Relay) 

30 Splice Pack (Green) 

(Joint Connector) 

– 

– 

– 

– 

419 . . .



1 2 

3 4 5 6 

7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 

20 21 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 

22 

Right Side Rear Seat Fuse 

Block 


1 Spare (Relay) 

2 Rear Window Defogger 

(Relay) 

3 Fuel Pump (Relay) 

4 Power Window Motors 

(Circuit Breaker) 

5 Rear Window Defogger 

(Fuse) 


6 Trunk Release (Diode) 

7 Canister Vent Solenoid 

(Fuse) 

8 Right Turn Signal (Fuse) 

9 Sunroof Module (If 

equipped) (Fuse) 

10 Stoplights (Fuse) 

11 Rear Fog Lights (Fuse) 

No. 


12 Front Passenger Heated 

Seat Module (Fuse) 

13 Radio (Fuse) 

14 Sensing and Diagnostic 

Monitor; Passenger 

Sensing System; Passenger 

Air Bag (Fuse) 

. . . 420


Section 4 

Right Side Rear Seat Fuse 


No. 


15 Rear Integration Module; 


Assist; Inside 

Rearview Mirror; Column 

Lock Module; 

Power Sounder; Supervisory 

Control Module 

(Fuse) 

16 Underhood Fuse Block 

Run; Crank Relay Coil; 

Rear Fog Light Relay Coil 

(Fuse) 

No. 


17 Heated Steering Wheel; 

Column Lock Module 

(Fuse) 

18 Rear Foglights (Relay) 

19 Stoplights (Relay) 

20 Interior Lights (Relay) 

21 Ignition 1 (Relay) 


23 Interior Lights (Fuse) 

24 Front Passenger Door 

Module; Right Power 

Subwoofer (Fuse) 

No. 


25 Left Turn Signal; Lane 

Departure Warning System 

(Fuse) 

26 Fuel Pump (Fuse) 

27 Rear Differential Cooling 

Pump (If equipped) 

(Fuse) 

28 Rear Integration Module 

(Fuse) 

29 Rear Differential Cooling 

Pump (If equipped) 

(Relay) 

30 Splice Pack (Blue) (Joint 

Connector) 

– 

– 

– 

– 

421 . . .



■ BULB REPLACEMENT 

See your dealer for any bulb 

changing procedure not listed in 

this section. 

High Intensity Discharge 

Lighting 

CAUTION 

High Intensity Discharge lights 

(xenon lights) operate at a very 

high voltage. Be sure not to 

touch them. Do not try to 

service the system components. 

You could be seriously injured. 


Your vehicle is equipped with high 

intensity discharge headlights. 

After a headlight bulb has been 

replaced, you may notice that the 

beam is a slightly different shade 

than it was originally. This is 

normal. 

Backup Lights 

1. Open the trunk. 

2. There is a cloth cover located 

on the underside of the trunk 

lid. 

Pull out the pushpins that secure 

the top portion of the 

cloth cover. 

Fold the cloth cover down 

slightly. 

3. Locate the backup light 

assembly on the inside of the 

trunk lid. 

4. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise 

to unlock the socket 

from the housing. 

Then, pull the socket straight 

out. 

5. Pull the bulb straight out of 

the socket. 

6. Reverse the steps to install a 

new bulb. 

. . . 422


Section 4 

■ REPLACEMENT BULB SPECIFICATIONS 

See your dealer for any bulb not listed in this section. 

Backup Lights ...................................................................................................... P27/7W LL or 3157K 

– 

– 

– 

– 

423 . . .



■ SPECIFICATIONS AND CAPACITIES 

Component Specifications 

3.6 L HFV6 Engine 

VIN Code .......................................................................................................................................... V 

Horsepower....................................................................................................... 229 kW @ 6400 min -1 

Engine Torque................................................................................................. .374 Nm @ 5200 min -1 

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................................................................ 25798271* or A2944C** 

Engine Oil Filter.............................................................................................. 25177917* or PF2129** 

Passenger Compartment Air Filter.................................................................... 88957450* or CF13C** 

Spark Plugs.............................................................................92220447* or 41-990** (Gap 1.11 mm) 

Wheel Nut Torque...................................................................................................................140 Nm 

* GM part number 

** AC Delco ® part number 

. . . 424


Section 4 

Component Specifications (Continued) 

4.6 L DOHC V8 Engine 

VIN Code .......................................................................................................................................... A 

Horsepower.................................................................................................... 238.8 kW @ 6400 min -1 

Engine Torque.................................................................................................. 427 Nm @ 4400 min -1 


Engine Oil Filter.................................................................................................. 89017342* or PF61** 






– 

– 

– 

– 

425 . . .



Component Specifications (Continued) 


VIN Code ..........................................................................................................................................D 

Horsepower....................................................................................................... 350 kW @ 6400 min -1 

Engine Torque.................................................................................................. 595 Nm @ 3800 min -1 


Engine Oil Filter............................................................................................... 89017527* 1 or PF26** 1 






1 NOTICE: 

The 4.4L V8 engine uses a specific oil filter. Use of engine oil filters other than the filter recommended could 

result in engine damage. 

The repairs would not be covered by your warranty. 

. . . 426


Section 4 

Capacities* (Approximate) 

Fuel Tank....................................................................................................................................66.2 L 

Brake Fluid....................................................................................................................................1.0 L 

Cooling System 

3.6 L V6...................................................................................................................................10.6 L 

4.6 L V8...................................................................................................................................11.1 L 

4.4 L V8...................................................................................................................................12.7 L 

4.4 L V8 Intercooler ...................................................................................................................2.5 L 

Engine Oil (with Filter) 

3.6 L V6.....................................................................................................................................5.7 L 

4.6 L V8.....................................................................................................................................7.6 L 

4.4 L V8.....................................................................................................................................8.5 L 

Automatic Transmission (Pan Removal and Filter Replacement) 

6-Speed.....................................................................................................................................6.3 L 

6-Speed (V-Series) .....................................................................................................................6.2 L 

Air Conditioning Refrigerant (R-134a).................................................................................................‡ 

*Recheck all fluid levels after filling. 

‡ For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge amount, see the refrigerant caution label located 

under the hood. This information can also be found in the vehicle service manual. 

– 

– 

– 

– 

427 . . .



■ FUEL CONSUMPTION AND EMISSIONS INFORMATION 

3.6 L HFV6 ENGINE 

Fuel Consumption 

Urban Fuel Consumption............................................................................................16.7 L/100 km 

Ex-Urban Fuel Consumption.........................................................................................7.5 L/100 km 

Combined Fuel Consumption......................................................................................10.9 L/100km 

Carbon Dioxide Emissions 

Urban Carbon Dioxide....................................................................................................... 396 g/km 

Ex-Urban Carbon Dioxide.................................................................................................. 179 g/km 

Combined Carbon Dioxide................................................................................................ 258 g/km 

. . . 428


Section 4 

■ FUEL CONSUMPTION AND EMISSIONS INFORMATION (CONTINUED) 

4.6 L DOHC V8 ENGINE 


Rear-Wheel Drive Vehicles 

Urban.........................................................................................................................19.3 L/100 km 

Extra-Urban ..................................................................................................................9.7 L/100 km 

Combined ..................................................................................................................13.2 L/100 km 

All-Wheel Drive Vehicles 

Urban.........................................................................................................................19.7 L/100 km 

Extra-Urban ................................................................................................................10.9 L/100 km 

Combined ..................................................................................................................14.1 L/100 km 


Rear-Wheel Drive Vehicles 

Urban (actual) ................................................................................................................... 459 g/km 

Extra-Urban (actual) .......................................................................................................... 231 g/km 

Combined (weighed) ........................................................................................................ 314 g/km 

All-Wheel Drive Vehicles 

Urban (actual) ................................................................................................................... 468 g/km 

Extra-Urban (actual) .......................................................................................................... 260 g/km 

Combined (weighed) ........................................................................................................ 336 g/km 

– 

– 

– 

– 

429 . . .



■ FUEL CONSUMPTION AND EMISSIONS INFORMATION (CONTINUED) 



Urban Fuel Consumption............................................................................................22.2 L/100 km 

Ex-Urban Fuel Consumption.......................................................................................12.4 L/100 km 

Combined Fuel Consumption......................................................................................16.0 L/100km 


Urban Carbon Dioxide....................................................................................................... 526 g/km 

Ex-Urban Carbon Dioxide.................................................................................................. 295 g/km 

Combined Carbon Dioxide................................................................................................ 380 g/km 

■ APPEARANCE CARE 

General Motors offers products specially designed to maintain the appearance and to help care for your 

vehicle. 

See your dealer for more information. 

. . . 430


–––– 

– 

5 

Prob 

lems 

on 

the 

Road 

Jump Starting ................................................432 

Towing...........................................................437 

Engine Overheating ......................................437 

Checking and Adding Coolant ......................440 

Intercooler System (STS-V Models Only) .......443 

Flat Tires ........................................................445 

Run-Flat Tires (STS-V) ....................................445 

Standard Tires ..............................................447 

If a Tire Is Flat................................................447 

Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit ...................448 

Section 5 - Problems on the Road 

If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck.............................463 

Rocking Your Vehicle ....................................464 

Recovery Hooks ............................................464 

Data Collection and Event Data Recorders...465 

431 . . .


Problems on the Road 

■ JUMP STARTING 

If your battery has run down, you 

may use another vehicle and some 

jumper cables to start your vehicle. 

The other vehicle must have a 12- 

volt battery with a negative 

ground system. 

NOTICE 

If the other vehicle does not 

have a 12-volt battery with a 

negative ground system, both 

vehicles could be damaged. 

CAUTION 

Batteries have acid that can 

burn you and gas that can 

explode. You can be hurt badly 

if you aren't careful. See the 

section titled "How to Use this 

Manual" for tips on how to 

work around a battery without 

getting hurt. 

Do not let battery fluid touch 

your skin. If you do get it in your 

eyes or on your skin, flush the 

place with water and get medical 

help immediately. 

CAUTION 

Every new GM vehicle uses a 

battery that requires no maintenance. 

However, if another 

battery has filler caps, be sure 

the right amount of fluid is 

there. If it is low, add water to 

make sure that there is no 

explosive gas present. 

Do not use a match or flame 

near a vehicle's battery. If you 

need more light, use a 

flashlight. 

NOTICE 

Trying to start your vehicle by 

pushing or pulling it won't work 

and could even damage your 

vehicle. 

. . . 432


Section 5 

To jump start your vehicle, 

follow these steps: 

NOTICE 

Ignoring these steps could 

result in costly damage to your 

vehicle. 



1. Get the vehicles close enough 

so the jumper cables can 

reach. Be sure the vehicles 

aren't touching each other. 

CAUTION 

To ensure that the vehicles do 

not roll, set the parking brake 

firmly on both vehicles involved 

in the jump starting procedure. 

Shift an automatic transmission 

into P (Park) and a manual 

transmission into N (Neutral) 

before setting the parking 

brake. 

2. Turn off the ignition on both 

vehicles. Turn off the radios 

and all lights that aren't 

needed. 

NOTICE 

If you leave the radio or other 

accessories on, they could be 

badly damaged. 



– 

– 

– 

Unplug any accessories that 

are plugged into the cigarette 

lighter or the accessory power 

outlets. 

– 

– 

433 . . .



3. Now open the hoods and 

locate the positive (+) and 

negative (-) battery terminals. 

CAUTION 





CAUTION 

Fans or other moving engine 

parts can injure you badly. Keep 

your hands away from moving 

parts once the engine is 

running. 

Your vehicle has remote positive 

(+) and negative (-) battery 

terminals. 

The remote positive (+) terminal 

is located near the engine 

compartment fuse block 

cover. 

The remote negative (-) 

ground is located on the shock 

tower in the engine compartment 

on the right side of the 

vehicle. 

Always use the remote positive 

and remote negative terminals 

instead of the terminals on 

your vehicle's battery. 

. . . 434


Section 5 

CAUTION 

Check that the jumper cables 

don't have any loose or missing 

insulation. If they do, you could 

get a shock and the vehicles 


NOTICE 

Do not connect positive (+) to 

negative (-) or you will get a 

short that would damage the 

battery and possibly other 

parts. 

Do not connect the negative (-) 

cable to the negative (-) terminal 

on the dead battery because 

this can cause sparks. 

7 

6 5 

4. Connect the positive (+) (red) 

cable to the positive (+) terminal 

on the discharged battery. 

Use the remote positive (+) 

terminal if the vehicle has one. 

5. Don't let the other end touch 

metal, then connect it to the 

positive (+) terminal of the 

good battery. 

Use the remote positive (+) terminal 

if the vehicle has one. 

4 

6. Now take the negative (-) 

(black) cable. First connect it 

to the good battery's negative 

(-) terminal. Use the 

remote negative (-) terminal if 

the vehicle has one. Don't let 

the other end touch metal yet. 

Do not connect the negative (- 

) cable to the negative (-) terminal 

on the dead battery because 

this can cause sparks. 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

435 . . .



7. Attach the other end of the 

negative cable to a heavy 

metal part on the engine of 

the vehicle with the discharged 

battery, or to a 

remote negative (-) ground 

location if the vehicle has one. 

Attach the cable at least 45 cm 

(18 inches) away from the 

dead battery, but not near engine 

parts that move. 

NOTICE 

Do not connect a negative 

cable to the engine control 

module, its mounting bracket, 

or any cables that attach to the 

engine control module bracket. 

Otherwise, the vehicle could be 

damaged. 

Always use the remote negative 

ground location instead of the 

terminal on your vehicle's 

battery. 

8. Start the vehicle with the 

good battery. Run the engine 

for a while. 

9. Then try to start the other 

vehicle. 

If the engine does not start after 

a few tries, the vehicle may 

need service. 

10. Remove the cables in reverse 

order to prevent electrical 

shorting. 

NOTICE 

Damage to your vehicle may 

result from electrical shorting if 

jumper cables are connected or 

disconnected incorrectly. To 

prevent electrical shorting, take 

care that the cables do not 

touch each other or any other 

metal. 

Connect or disconnect the 

cables in the correct order. 



. . . 436


Section 5 

■ TOWING 


towing service if you need to have 

your vehicle towed. 

Also, see "Recreational Vehicle 

Towing" in Section 3. 

■ ENGINE OVERHEATING 

CAUTION 

Steam from an overheated 

engine can burn you badly. 

Stay away from the engine if 

you see or hear steam coming 

from it. 

CAUTION 

Continued operation of an 

overheated engine, even for a 

short time, may result in a fire 

and the possibility of personal 

injury and/or severe vehicle 

damage. 

This could lead to costly repairs 

not covered by your warranty. 

See "Overheat Protection 


information. 

The engine coolant temperature 

gage shows the engine coolant 

temperature. If the pointer reaches 

the top of the gage, the engine is 

too hot! 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

437 . . .



If you see or hear steam coming 

from the engine, stop and turn the 

engine off. Do not open the hood 

until the engine has cooled down. 

An overheat warning message 

may appear in the driver information 

center display. 



information. 

If you get the overheat warning 

with no sign of steam: 

1. Turn off your air conditioner 

and turn on the heater at high 

speed. 

2. If you're in a traffic jam, shift 

to N (Neutral). 

If the message stays on or the coolant 

temperature gage still shows 

an overheat condition, pull over, 

stop and park your vehicle right 

away. 

If there is still no sign of steam and 

the vehicle is equipped with an 

electric cooling fan, run the engine 

at idle speed for about 3 minutes 

while you are parked. 

If there is still no sign of steam and 

the vehicle is equipped with an 

engine-driven cooling fan, press 

the accelerator pedal until the 

engine speed is about twice as fast 

as normal idle speed for about 3 

minutes while you are parked. 

If the overheat warning continues, 

turn off the engine and get everyone 

out of the vehicle right away. 

See "Overheat Protection Mode" 


information. 

. . . 438


Section 5 

CAUTION 

CAUTION 





Do not run the engine if there is 

a leak. All the coolant could leak 

out and cause an engine fire. 

You could be burned. 

If the coolant in the surge tank has 

been boiling, do not touch it until 

it has cooled down. 

The vehicle should be parked on a 

level surface. 




If the coolant level is low, there 

may be a leak in the cooling 

system. 

NOTICE 

Running your engine without 

coolant could cause engine 

damage that wouldn't be 


See "Overheat Protection 


information. 

– 

– 

– 

CAUTION 

Engine parts may be very hot. 

Do not touch them. 

– 

– 

439 . . .



If the coolant is leaking, have it 

fixed immediately. 

If the coolant is not leaking and 

the engine is overheated, the 

engine cooling fans should be 

running. If not, the fans must be 

serviced. 

Overheat Protection Mode 

If you still have the overheat warning, 

the engine has a feature 

whereby it alternates firing groups 

of cylinders to minimize engine 

damage and to allow you to drive 

your vehicle to the nearest service 

center. You will notice a significant 

loss in power and engine 

performance. 

Avoid driving an extended 

distance and/or towing a trailer 

while driving in this mode. 

NOTICE 

After driving in this mode, allow 

the engine to cool before 

attempting any repairs. Once 

cool, repair the cause of coolant 

loss and change the oil. 

Checking and Adding 

Coolant 

CAUTION 






The coolant level can be checked 

by looking at the see-through 

surge tank without having to 

remove the cap. 


surface. 

. . . 440


Section 5 




CAUTION 









NOTICE 





CAUTION 

• Do not substitute any liquids 

for the proper coolant mixture. 

The engine could catch 

on fire and you or others 

could be burned. 

• Do not spill coolant on hot 

engine parts. 

NOTICE 






sooner. 





If coolant is visible in the surge 

tank: 

If coolant is visible in the tank but 

the level is not up to the FULL 

COLD/FROID mark, wait a while 

for the engine to cool, then add a 

50/50 mixture of clean water and 

DEX-COOL ® coolant at the coolant 

surge tank. See "Engine Coolant" 

in the "Service and 

Maintenance" section. 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

441 . . .



If no coolant is visible in the 

surge tank: 

Add a 50/50 mixture of clean 

water and DEX-COOL ® coolant at 

the coolant surge tank. See 

"Engine Coolant" in the "Service 

and Maintenance" section. 

Here's how to add coolant to the 

coolant tank: 



1. To remove the cap when the 

cooling system is no longer 

hot, turn it slowly one quarter 

turn to the left and then stop. 

If you hear a "hiss", wait for 

that to stop. The "hiss" means 

there is still some pressure left. 

Then, remove the cap. 

2. Add the proper coolant mixture 

to the surge tank until the 

level reaches slightly above 

the FULL COLD/FROID mark. 

3. With the pressure cap off, start 

the engine and let it run until 

you can feel that the upper 

radiator hose is getting hot 

(watch out for the engine 

cooling fans). 

4. If the level in the surge tank 

has dropped, add more of the 

coolant mixture to bring the 

level back up to the proper 

mark. 

. . . 442


Section 5 

5. Then replace the cap. Be sure 

the cap is tight. 

6. Start the engine and allow it 

to idle for a few minutes. 

Intercooler System (STS-V 

Models Only) 

Turn off the ignition and let the 

engine compartment cool down. 

If coolant is not visible in the horizontal 

tube portion of the intercooler 

filler neck, wait a while for 

the engine to cool, then add a 50/ 

50 mixture of clean water and 

DEX-COOL ® coolant to the intercooler 

system. 

CAUTION 






CAUTION 









NOTICE 





– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

443 . . .



CAUTION 

• Do not substitute any liquids 

for the proper coolant mixture. 

The engine could catch 

on fire and you or others 

could be burned. 

• Do not spill coolant on hot 

engine parts. 

NOTICE 






sooner. 





Here's how to add coolant to the 

intercooler system: 



1. To remove the cap when the 

cooling system is no longer 

hot, turn it slowly one quarter 

turn to the left and then stop. 

If you hear a "hiss", wait for 

that to stop. The "hiss" means 

there is still some pressure left. 

Then, remove the cap. 

2. Add the proper coolant mixture 

to bring the fluid level up 

to the COLD FILL mark on the 

filler neck. 

3. With the intercooler system 

pressure cap off, start the 

engine and let it run for a couple 

of minutes. 


By this time, the coolant level 

inside the filler neck may be 

lower. 

. . . 444


Section 5 

5. If the level drops to where 

coolant is no longer visible in 

the horizontal tube portion of 

the filler neck, then with the 

engine off, add more of the 

proper coolant mixture until 

the level is again visible in the 

horizontal tube portion. 

6. Reinstall the cap. 

NOTICE 

The intercooler system cap is a 

pressure-type cap and must be 






If the coolant is not at the proper 

level when the system cools down 

again, see your dealer. 

■ FLAT TIRES 

RUN-FLAT TIRES (STS-V) 

Your vehicle has neither a spare 

tire, nor jacking equipment. 


Run-Flat Tires, you will not have to 

stop on the side of the road to 

change a flat tire. See "Run-Flat 

Tires" and "Tire Pressure Monitor" 

under "Tires" in Section 4. 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

445 . . .



CAUTION 

If the system detects low tire 

pressure in one or more of the 

tires, the low tire pressure warning 

light will appear and 

CHECK TIRE PRESSURE will be 

displayed on the Driver Information 

Center. 


your vehicle's handling capabilities 

are reduced during severe 

maneuvers. If you drive too fast, 

you could lose control of the 

vehicle. You or others could be 

injured. Don't drive over 90 km/ 

h when this message is 

displayed. Drive cautiously and 

check the tire pressures as soon 

as possible. 

CAUTION 

Run-flat tires could explode 

during improper service. You or 

others could be injured or killed 

if you attempt to repair, 

replace, dismount or mount a 

run-flat tire. Let only a qualified 

technician service your tires. 

When a tire has been damaged, or 

if you have driven any distance on 

a deflated run-flat tire, check with 

an authorized service center to 

determine whether the tire can be 

repaired or whether it must be 

replaced. 

NOTICE 

Do not use liquid sealants in 

your tires. The use of sealants 

could damage the tire pressure 

monitor sensors. 



. . . 446


Section 5 

STANDARD TIRES (IF 

EQUIPPED) 


with a tire sealant and compressor 

kit. 

This kit uses a liquid tire sealant to 

seal temporarily a puncture, less 

than 6 mm in size, in the tread 

area of a tire. 


Kit" later in this section. 

If a Tire Is Flat 

Avoid further tire and wheel 

damage by driving very slowly to a 

level place to change your tire. 

Turn on your hazard warning 

flashers. 


2. Place the automatic gear shift 

in P (Park). 


4. Inspect the flat tire. 

WHEEL LOCKS 

When removing the wheels on 

your vehicle, make sure to use the 

wheel lock key. 

See "Wheel Locks" under "Tires" in 

Section 4. 

– 

– 

You may be able to use the tire 

sealant and compressor kit (if 

equipped) to reinflate the tire. 

– 


Kit" for more information. 

– 

– 

447 . . .



Tire Sealant and 

Compressor Kit (If 

equipped) 


tire sealant and compressor kit, 

your vehicle has neither a spare 

tire, nor jacking equipment. 

The tire sealant and compressor kit 

uses a liquid tire sealant and air to 

seal small punctures in the tread 

area of a tire. 

The tire sealant cannot repair tire 

damage caused while driving on a 

flat tire, a tire that has had a blow 

out or a tire that has punctures in 

the sidewall area. 

The kit can also be used without 

the sealant. See "Using the Air 

Compressor Without Tire Sealant" 


If the tire has been separated from 

the wheel or has damaged sidewalls 

or a puncture larger than 6 

mm (0.2 inches) that allows rapid 

air loss, call a tire repair facility. 

Damage to the tire is severe and 

the sealant will not be effective. 

If the flat tire is due to a small 

puncture, less than 6 mm (0.2 

inches) in size, in the tread area of 

the tire, a tire sealant and 

compressor kit may be used to 

temporarily seal and inflate the 

damaged tire. 

Do not remove any small object 

that has penetrated the tire tread. 



• Using the Tire Sealant and 

Compressor Kit 

After inflating the tire to its recommended 

pressure, drive the vehicle 

8 km (5 miles) to evenly distribute 

the tire sealant and seal the 

puncture. 

If the sealant is not removed from 

the damaged tire within 161 km 

(100 miles) of driving, the tire will 

probably require replacement. 

Take the vehicle to the dealer as 

soon as possible to have the 

damaged tire repaired. 

. . . 448


Section 5 

Be aware of the following concerning 

tire sealant: 

• Tire sealant is only a temporary 

fix. 

• The tire sealant solution is a 

one-time use application for 

one tire only. 

• The tire sealant may not be as 

effective beyond the expiration 

date. 

Check the expiration date on 

the sealant canister label. 

NOTICE 


tire pressure monitoring 

system. 

Use only the GM-approved tire 

sealant. See your dealer for 

assistance. 

Other liquid tire sealants may 

damage the tire pressure 

sensors. 

REMOVING THE TIRE SEALANT 

AND COMPRESSOR KIT 


is located in the spare tire storage 

area of the trunk. 

Your vehicle is equipped with one 

of two possible tire sealant and 

compressor kits. 

– 

– 

See your dealer to purchase a 

new tire sealant canister. 

– 

– 

– 

449 . . .



1 

2 3 4 5 6 

5. tire sealant canister 

6. black air only hose 

7. clear sealant/air hose 

8. air compressor accessory plug 

1 

4 5 

2 

7 

7 

8 

3 6 


equipped with an air or sealant 

selector switch has the following 

features: 

1. selector switch 

2. on/off button 

3. air pressure gage 

4. air pressure deflation button 

The other tire sealant and 

compressor kit has the following 

features: 

1. air compressor 

2. tire sealant canister 

3. air compressor accessory plug 

4. I/O (on/off) switch 

5. air pressure gage 

6. air compressor inflator hose 

7. sealant filling hose 

. . . 450


Section 5 

To remove the tire sealant and 

compressor kit from the vehicle, 


1. Open the trunk. 

2. Remove the spare tire cover. 

3. Remove the kit from the spare 

tire well. 

C 

A 

B 

– 

- Compressor kits equipped 

with a selector switch: 

Remove wing nut . 

Remove the tire sealant and 

compressor kit from the 

foam tray . 

- Compressor kits not 

equipped with a selector 

switch: 

Squeeze the tabs on the 

buckle to release the strap on 

the tire sealant and compressor 

kit. 

4. Remove the tire sealant and 


vehicle. 

– 

– 

– 

– 

451 . . .



The compressor kit may be 

equipped with an accessory adapter 

located in a compartment on 

the bottom the compressor. 

With this feature, you can inflate 

things like air mattresses, balls etc. 

USING THE TIRE SEALANT AND 

COMPRESSOR KIT 

CAUTION 

Be sure to read and follow all 

safety instructions on the sealant 

canister label. 

If it is cold outside, warm the 

compressor kit in a heated environment 

for about five minutes 

before using the kit. This will help 

inflate the tire more quickly. 

Sealing and Inflating a Flat Tire 

Before beginning the procedure, 

read all the instructions. 

1. Turn on the hazard warning 

flashers. 

Stop and park the vehicle in a 

safe place. 

Do not remove any small object 

that has penetrated the 

tire. 

2. Place the automatic gear shift 

in P (Park). 

3. Turn off the engine and apply 

the parking brake. 

. . . 452


Section 5 


compressor kit and place the 

kit near the flat tire. 

See the following, earlier in 

this section, for more 

information: 

- Removing the Tire Sealant 

and Compressor Kit 

5. Unwrap the clear air/sealant 

filling hose and the accessory 

plug from the compressor. 

For compressor kits not 


switch, pull the top portion of 

the accessory plug cord out 

first, and then the bottom portion. 

Unsnap the plug from the 

compressor to release it. 

Do not plug the air compressor 

into the accessory outlet at 

this time. 

6. Remove the valve cap from 

the tire valve stem. 

7. Make sure the air compressor 

is off. 

8. Firmly attach the sealant filling 

hose to the tire valve stem. 

To tighten, turn the end of the 

hose clockwise. 

9. Disconnect any accessories 


power outlets. 

10. Plug the air compressor into 

the one of the accessory 


- Note: 

Only use the cigarette lighter 

outlet to plug in the air compressor 

if the vehicle is not 

equipped with an accessory 

power outlet. 

Do not close the doors or windows 

on the power cord. 


The engine must be running to 

avoid draining the battery 

while running the air compressor 

using battery power. 

CAUTION 

Idling the engine inside an 

enclosed area such as a garage, 

and/or with the climate control 

system's fan off, may produce 

dangerous exhaust fumes. 

12. Turn the selector switch (if 

equipped) counterclockwise 

to the sealant and air position. 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

453 . . .



13. Press I (on) or the on/off button 


The compressor will force sealant 

and air into the tire. 

Tire sealant may leak from the 

puncture hole until the vehicle 

is driven and the hole has been 

sealed. 

Initially, the pressure gage 

reading will be high while the 

air compressor pushes the 

sealant into the tire. When the 

tire begins inflating with air, 

the pressure reading will drop 

quickly, and then rise again as 

the tire inflates. 

14. Use the air compressor to 

inflate the tire to the proper 

inflation pressure as shown on 

the Tire and Loading Information 

Label. 


Label" in Section 3 for 


15. Check the tire pressure using 

the air pressure gage on the 

tire sealant and compressor 

kit. 

- NOTE: 

The pressure gage reading is 

slightly higher while the air 

compressor is on. Turn the 

compressor off to get an accurate 

pressure reading. 

NOTICE 

If the proper tire pressure 

cannot be reached after 25 

minutes, the vehicle should not 

be driven. Damage to the tire is 

severe and the tire cannot be 

inflated or sealed using the tire 

sealant and compressor kit. 

CAUTION 

Be careful not to overinflate 

things. They could explode and 

you or others could be injured. 

Be sure to follow any instructions 

that come with the tire 


Inflate the tire to its recommended 

pressure. 

Do not exceed the recommended 

pressure. 

. . . 454


Section 5 

16. Press O (off) or the on/off button 

to turn the air compressor 


17. Remove the air compressor 

plug from the accessory 

power outlet. 

- NOTE: 

Complete the following steps 

quickly. 

The tire will not be sealed 

and air may leak from the 

puncture until the vehicle is 

driven and the sealant has 

been distributed in the tire. 

CAUTION 

The air compressor may be hot. 

Do not touch the compressor 

until it has cooled down. 

18. Turn the end of the hose 

counterclockwise to disconnect 

it from the tire valve 

stem. 

19. Reinstall the cap on the valve 

stem. 

20. Store the hose in its original 

location. 

21. Store the air compressor 

accessory plug in its original 

position. 

22. If you were able to inflate the 

tire successfully, remove the 

maximum speed label (if 

equipped) from the sealant 

canister. 

The maximum speed label reminds 

you to drive cautiously 

and not to exceed 90 km/h 

(55 mph) until you have the 

damaged tire inspected and 

repaired. 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

455 . . .



23. Attach the maximum speed 

label (if equipped) to a highly 

visible location within the 

vehicle. 

24. Restow the tire sealant and 

compressor kit in reverse order 

as removal. 

CAUTION 

Storing the tire sealant and 

compressor kit or other equipment 

in the passenger's 

compartment of the vehicle 

could cause injury. In a sudden 

stop or collision, loose equipment 

could strike someone. 

Store them in the proper place. 

25. Drive the vehicle 8 km (5 

miles) to evenly distribute the 

tire sealant. 

26. Stop and park the vehicle in a 

safe place. 

27. Check the tire pressure after 

driving to see if the puncture 

has been sealed. 

Check the tire pressure using 

the air pressure gage on the air 

compressor. 

If the tire pressure has not dropped 

more than 68 kPa (10 psi) below 

the recommended inflation pressure, 

inflate the tire up to the standard 

operating pressure as shown 

on the tire information label. 

See "Using the Air Compressor 

Without Tire Sealant" later in this 

section. 

If the tire pressure drops more 

than 68 kPa (10 psi) below the 

recommended inflation pressure, 

the vehicle should not be driven 

farther. Damage to the tire is 

severe and the tire cannot be 

inflated or sealed using the tire 


Use a cloth to wipe up any tire 

sealant on the sides of the vehicle, 

tire and wheel. 

Take the vehicle to the dealer as 

soon as possible to have the 

damaged tire inspected and 

repaired. 

. . . 456


Section 5 

Make sure that you dispose of the 

used sealant canister in accordance 

with local regulations. 

Ask your dealer, a service station or 

a local recycling center for proper 

disposal information. 

After using the tire sealant, be sure 

to replace the sealant canister in 

the tire sealant and compressor kit. 



• Disconnecting and Replacing 

the Tire Sealant Canister 

USING THE AIR COMPRESSOR 

WITHOUT TIRE SEALANT 



vehicle. 



information: 



2. Unwrap the black air hose and 

the accessory plug from the 

compressor. 

For compressor kits not 


switch, pull the lever up to unlock 

the air compressor inflator 

hose from the sealant canister. 

Pull the top portion of the accessory 

plug cord out first, and 

then the bottom portion. Unsnap 

the plug from the compressor 

to release it. 

Do not plug the air compressor 

into the accessory outlet at 

this time. 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

457 . . .



3. Remove the valve cap from 

the tire valve stem. 

4. Firmly attach the air inflator 

hose to the tire valve stem. 



To tighten, turn the end of 

the hose clockwise. 



switch: 

Push down on the lever to secure 

the hose to the valve 

stem. 

5. Disconnect any accessories 



6. Plug the air compressor into 

the one of the accessory 


- Note: 

Only use the cigarette lighter 

outlet to plug in the air compressor 

if the vehicle is not 

equipped with an accessory 

power outlet. 

Do not close the doors or windows 

on the power cord. 


The engine must be running to 

avoid draining the battery 

while running the air compressor 

using battery power. 

CAUTION 

Idling the engine inside an 

enclosed area such as a garage, 

and/or with the climate control 

system's fan off, may produce 

dangerous exhaust fumes. 

8. Turn the selector switch (if 

equipped) clockwise to the air 

only position. 

9. Press I (on) or the on/off button 


. . . 458


Section 5 

10. Inflate the tire to the recommended 

inflation pressure as 

shown on the Tire and Loading 

Information Label. 


Label" in Section 3 for 


11. Check the tire pressure using 

the air pressure gage on the 

tire sealant and compressor 

kit. 

The pressure gage reading is 

slightly higher while the air 

compressor is on. Turn the 

compressor off to get an accurate 

pressure reading. 

CAUTION 

Be careful not to overinflate 

things. They could explode and 

you or others could be injured. 

Be sure to follow any instructions 

that come with the tire 


Inflate the tire to its recommended 

pressure. 

Do not exceed the recommended 

pressure. 

12. Press O (off) or the on/off button 

to turn the air compressor 


CAUTION 

The air compressor may be hot. 

Do not touch the compressor 

until it has cooled down. 

13. Remove the air compressor 

plug from the accessory 

power outlet. 

– 

– 

– 

To release excess air, push on 

the metal stem in the center of 

the tire valve or press the air 

pressure deflation button (if 

equipped). 

– 

– 

459 . . .



14. Disconnect the hose from the 

tire valve. 



Turn the end of the hose 

counterclockwise to disconnect 

it from the tire valve 

stem. 



switch: 

Pull the lever up to unlock the 

air compressor inflator hose 

from the tire valve stem. 

15. Reinstall the cap on the valve 

stem. 

16. Store the hose in its original 

location. 

17. Store the air compressor 

accessory plug in its original 

position. 

Restow the tire sealant and 

compressor kit in reverse order as 

removal. 

CAUTION 

Storing the tire sealant and 

compressor kit or other equipment 

in the passenger's 

compartment of the vehicle 

could cause injury. In a sudden 

stop or collision, loose equipment 

could strike someone. 

Store them in the proper place. 

DISCONNECTING AND 

REPLACING THE TIRE SEALANT 

CANISTER 

The tire sealant canister supplies a 

one-time use application for one 

tire only. 

After using the tire sealant, be sure 

to replace the sealant canister in 

the tire sealant and compressor kit. 

. . . 460


Section 5 

To replace the tire sealant canister, 




vehicle. 



information: 



2. Unwrap the hose from the 

compressor and tire sealant 

canister. 



Unwrap the clear sealant filling 

hose from the 

compressor. 

The yellow sealant canister 

release button is now visible. 



switch: 

Pull the lever up to unlock the 

air compressor inflator hose 

from the sealant canister. 

Unwrap the air compressor 

inflator hose from the sealant 

canister. 

Unwrap the sealant filling 

hose from the compressor. 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

461 . . .



3. Remove the sealant canister 

from the air compressor. 



Press the yellow button to release 

the sealant canister. 



switch: 

Rotate the sealant canister so 

that the inflator hose is 

aligned with the slot in the 

compressor. 

Pull up on the sealant canister 

to remove it from the air 

compressor. 

See your dealer to purchase a 

new tire sealant canister. 

Installing the Tire Sealant 

Canister 

• Compressor kits equipped with 

a selector switch: 

- Press the new sealant canister 

into place. 

-Wrap the sealant filling hose 

around the air compressor 

channel. 

. . . 462


Section 5 

• Compressor kits not equipped 


- Rotate the sealant canister so 

that the sealant filling hose is 

aligned with the slot in the 

compressor. 

- Push the sealant canister 

down and rotate the canister 

clockwise. 

-Wrap the sealant filling hose 

around the air compressor 

channel. 

- Push the air compressor inflator 

hose onto the sealant canister 

inlet and push the lever 

down. 

■ IF YOUR VEHICLE GETS 

STUCK 

If your vehicle gets stuck in sand, 

mud, ice or snow, you will need to 

spin the wheels. 

Do not, however, spin the wheels 

too fast. 

CAUTION 

If you let your tires spin at high 

speed, they could explode. You 

or others could be injured. Also, 

the transmission or other parts 

of the vehicle could overheat 

and cause an engine fire or 

other damage. 

For information about using tire 

chains on your vehicle, see "Tire 

Chains" under "Tires" in Section 4. 

– 

– 

– 

Stow the tire sealant and compressor 

kit in the vehicle. 

See your dealer for more 

information. 

If the vehicle gets stuck, spin 

the wheels as little as possible. 

Do not spin the wheels above 

55 km/h (35 mph), as shown 

on the speedometer. 

– 

– 

463 . . .



Rocking Your Vehicle 

To free your vehicle when it is 

stuck: 

1. Turn the steering wheel left 

and right to clear the area 

around the front wheels. 

2. Press the traction control button 

to turn the system off. 


console. 


in Section 1. 

3. Shift the transmission back 

and forth between R (Reverse) 

and a forward gear, spinning 

the wheels as little as possible. 

Wait until the wheels stop 

spinning before shifting gears. 

Release the accelerator pedal 

while you shift and press it 

lightly when in gear. 

The rocking motion may free the 

vehicle. 

If it does not, you may need to 

have the vehicle towed out. 

Recovery Hooks 


with recovery hooks. 

FRONT RECOVERY HOOK (IF 

EQUIPPED) 

The front recovery hook access 

door is located on the front fascia 

on the right side of the vehicle. 

REAR RECOVERY HOOK (IF 

EQUIPPED) 

The rear recovery hook access 

door is located on the left side of 

the rear fascia. 

Eye Bolt Installation 

To install the eye bolt, do the 

following: 

1. Pull open the access door and 

insert the eye bolt. 

2. Rotate the eye bolt clockwise 

to tighten firmly. 

. . . 464


Section 5 

■ DATA COLLECTION 

AND EVENT DATA 

RECORDERS 

Your vehicle has computer 

modules that monitor and control 

vehicle systems and performance. 

These modules may record and 

store this information for future 

use. 

Stored information may be used to 

help diagnose and repair malfunctions. 

It can also be used to 

improve driving safety and crash 

performance. 

Some modules may also record 

data about how you operate the 

vehicle, such as the rate of fuel 

consumption or average vehicle 

speed. 

These modules may also retain the 

owner's personal preferences, such 

as radio pre-sets, seat positions 

and temperature settings. 

The event data recorder in your 

vehicle is designed to record data 

related to vehicle dynamics and 

safety systems. 

During a crash, your vehicle may 

record information about the 

condition of the vehicle and how it 

was operated, and how the various 

safety systems performed. 

Data is recorded only if a non-trivial 

crash situation occurs. 

In most cases, data is recorded for 

only about 30 seconds. 

Special equipment is needed to 

retrieve this data. 

Law enforcement agencies or 

others may have equipment that 

can retrieve the information if they 

have access to the vehicle or to the 

device that stores the data. 

While no personal data is recorded 

by the event data recorder, law 

enforcement agencies or others 

may combine the data stored by 

your vehicle with the personal 

information routinely acquired 

during a crash investigation. 

– 

– 

– 

– 

– 

465 . . .



GM will only access this information 

with the consent of the vehicle 

owner or lessee, in response to 

an official request of police or similar 

government office, as part of 

GM's defense of litigation, or as 

required by law. 

Data that GM collects or receives 

may also be used for GM research 

needs or may be made available to 

others for research purposes, 

where a need is shown and the 

data is not tied to a specific vehicle 

or vehicle owner. 

On vehicles equipped with the 

navigation system, the following 

information may also be recorded 

and stored: 

• Addresses 

• Destinations 

• Telephone numbers 

• Other trip information 


system manual for instructions on 

deleting stored information. 

Some vehicles use radio frequency 

identification technology for 

features such as tire pressure monitoring 

and keyless access systems. 

This technology does not use or 

record personal information or link 

to any other system containing 

this type of information. 

. . . 466


Index 

A 

Accessories ........................................................356 

Accessories - Retained Accessory Power .....200, 326 

Accessory Power Outlet .......................................84 

Adaptive Cruise Control ..............................25, 162 

Adaptive Cruise Control - Button .........................25 

Air - Air Cleaner/Filter ........................364, 365, 366 

Air Bag ..............................................................272 

Air Bag - Passenger Air Bag On/Off Indicator .....285 

Air Bag - Passenger Sensing System ...................279 

Air Bag - Warning Light ...............................37, 278 

Air Cleaner/Filter ...............................424, 425, 426 

Air Conditioning - Climate Control System ....25, 93 

Air Conditioning - 

Dual Zone Climate Control System ...................94 

Air Conditioning - Rear Climate Control ............104 

Air Conditioning - Refrigerant ............................427 

Air Conditioning Mode .......................................99 

Air Outlets ...................................................25, 102 

Alert - Forward Collision Alert System ..........25, 154 

All-Wheel Drive .................................................336 

All-Wheel Drive - Transfer Case Lubricant ..........378 

Antenna ............................................................144 

Antilock - Antilock Brakes ..................................342 

Antilock Brakes - Warning Light .......................... 33 

Appearance Care .............................................. 430 

Armrest - Center Console Storage ..................... 196 

Ashtray ....................................................... 25, 198 

Audio .......................................................... 25, 106 

Audio - Antenna ............................................... 144 

Audio - Anti-Theft Feature ................................. 144 

Audio - Base Radio Main Menu ......................... 136 

Audio - Care of Your Compact Disc Player ........ 134 

Audio - Care of Your Compact Discs ................. 134 

Audio - Compact Disc Changer ......................... 123 

Audio - Radio Personalization ............................ 136 

Audio - RDS Features and Controls .................... 118 

Audio - 

RDS Sound System With 6-Disc CD Player ...... 108 

Audio - Reconfigurable Radio Display Buttons ... 135 

Audio - 

Steering Wheel Audio Controls ......... 25, 142, 147 

Automatic Headlight System ............................... 88 

Automatic Ride Control .................................... 344 

Axle - Limited Slip Rear Axle .............................. 340 

Axle - Maximum Front and Rear Axle Weights .. 346 

Axle - Rear Axle Lubricant ................................. 379 

467 . . .


Index 

B 

Battery ......................................364, 365, 366, 384 

Battery - Battery Saver .........................................93 

Battery - Charging System Light ..........................31 

Battery - Electric Power Management ................204 

Battery - Jump Starting ......................................432 

Battery - 

Remote Negative Battery Terminal ..364, 365, 366 

Battery - 

Remote Positive Battery Terminal ....364, 365, 366 

Belts - Lap/Shoulder Belt ...................................262 

Belts - Replacing Safety Belts .............................268 

Belts - Safety Belt Extension ...............................268 

Belts - Safety Belt Pretensioners .........................272 

Belts - Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ...........269 

Belts - Safety Belts .........................................6, 260 

Belts - Shoulder Belt Comfort Guides .................266 

Belts - Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster .................265 

Brake System Warning Light ................................32 

Brakes ...............................................................340 

Brakes - Adjustment ..........................................341 

Brakes - Antilock Brakes .....................................342 

Brakes - Antilock Brakes Warning Light ................33 

Brakes - Brake Assist ...........................................343 

Brakes - Brake Fluid Reservoir .............364, 365, 366 

Brakes - Disc Brake Wear Indicators ................... 341 

Brakes - Fluid ............................................ 382, 427 

Brakes - Parking Brake ....................................... 342 

Brakes - Pedal Travel ......................................... 341 

Brakes - Trailer Brakes ....................................... 350 

Brakes - Warning Light ........................................ 32 

Break-In - New Vehicle Break-In Period .............. 303 

Bulbs - Replacement ......................................... 422 

Bulbs - Replacement Specifications ................... 423 

C 

Capacities .................................................. 424, 427 

Carbon Dioxide - Fuel Consumption and 

Emissions Information ..................................... 428 

Cargo - Certification Label ................................ 346 

Cargo - Convenience Net ................................. 193 

Cargo - Maximum Front and Rear Axle Weights 346 

Cargo - Tire and Loading Information Label ...... 345 

Cargo - Trunk Area ........................................... 190 

Cargo - Vehicle Loading .............................. 14, 344 

Cautions - Exhaust Warnings ............................... 12 

Cautions - Important Safety Precautions .......... 6-20 

CD Player - Playing MP3 format CDs ................. 126 

Center Console Armrest .................................... 196 

Chains - Tire Chains .......................................... 403 

Chains - Trailer Towing Safety Chains ............... 350 

. . . 468


Index 

C (Continued) 

Charging System - Warning Light ..........................31 

Children - Anchors for Child Restraints with 

Lower Attaching Points and Top Tether ..........295 

Children - Child Restraint Top Strap ..................296 

Children - Child Restraints .................................287 

Children - Older Children ..................................293 

Children - Securing a Child Restraint with 

Lower Attaching Points and Top Strap ............299 

Chimes - Chime Volume Adjustment .........231, 247 

Circuit Breakers .................................................411 

Climate Control - Air Conditioning Mode ............99 

Climate Control - 

Dual Zone Climate Control System ...................94 

Climate Control - Operating Tips ......................102 

Climate Control - Rear .......................................104 

Climate Control System .................................25, 93 

Clock ...........................................................25, 106 

Compact Disc - 

Care of Your Compact Disc Player ...................134 

Compact Disc - Care of Your Compact Discs .....134 

Compact Disc - Compact Disc Changer ............123 

Compact Disc - RDS Sound System 

With 6-Disc CD Player .....................................108 

Compartment - Center Console Armrest ........... 196 

Compartment - Glove Box .......................... 25, 197 

Components - Component Specifications ......... 424 

Console - Center Console Armrest .................... 196 

Controls - 

Dash- and Console-Mounted Controls .............. 25 

Controls - Keyless Ignition Controls ..................... 25 

Controls - 

Mounted on Steering Wheel/Column ............. 146 

Coolant ............................................................ 372 

Coolant - Checking and Adding Coolant ........... 440 

Coolant - Coolant Temperature Gage ................. 27 

Coolant - Engine Coolant Reservoir ............. 17, 427 

Coolant - Engine Coolant Surge Tank 364, 365, 366 

Coolant - Engine Coolant Temperature Light ...... 31 

Coolant - Intercooler System ..................... 375, 443 

Coolant - Intercooler System Pressure Cap ........ 366 

Coolant - Rear Differential Cooler ...................... 380 

Cruise Control .................................... 25, 158, 162 

Cruise Control - Adaptive Cruise Control Button . 25 

Cruise Control - Indicator Light ........................... 40 

Cupholders ................................................. 25, 197 

Customization - Feature Customization ..... 208, 237 

469 . . .


Index 

D 

Dash - Instrument Cluster ..............................25, 27 

Dash- and Console-Mounted Instruments 

and Controls .....................................................25 

Data Collection .................................................465 

Defogger - Rear Window ...................................102 

Display - Driver Information Center ...............25, 29 

Display - Head-Up Display Controls .....................25 

Displays - Language Selection ...........................237 

Doors ................................................................187 

Doors - Anti-lockout Feature ..............................189 

Doors - Central Door Lock System .....................317 

Doors - Door Locks ............................................187 

Doors - Manual Door Locks ...............................188 

Doors - Power Door Locks .................................187 

Doors - Programmable Automatic Door Locks ...188 

Doors - Rear Door Security Locks .......................189 

Driver Information Center ...................................41 

Driver Information Center - Buttons ..............25, 42 

Driver Information Center - Display ...............25, 29 

Driver Information Center - Messages .................53 

Driver Information Center - Timer .......................49 

Driver Information Center - 

Trip Information Button ..............................28, 42 


Trip Information Displays ..................................52 

. . . 470 


Vehicle Information Displays ............................. 47 

Driving - New Vehicle Break-In Period ............... 303 

Driving - Off-Road Driving on Hills ...................... 14 

Dual Zone Climate Control System ..................... 94 

E 

Electric Power Management ............................. 204 

Electrical - Engine Compartment 

Fuse Block .............................. 364, 365, 366, 415 

Electrical - Fuses and Circuit Breakers ................ 411 

Electrical - Left Side Rear Seat Fuse Block ........... 418 

Electrical - Retained Accessory Power ........ 200, 326 

Electrical - Right Side Rear Seat Fuse Block 420, 421 

Electrical Accessories - Power Outlet .................... 84 

Emissions - 

Fuel Consumption and Emissions Information . 428 

Engine - Air Cleaner/Filter ................. 424, 425, 426 

Engine - Checking and Adding Coolant ............ 440 

Engine - Coolant ............................................... 372 

Engine - Coolant Temperature Gage ................... 27 

Engine - Coolant Temperature Warning Light ..... 31 

Engine - Engine Block Heater ............................ 331 

Engine - Engine Compartment .................... 17, 363 

Engine - Engine Compartment Shields .............. 363 

Engine - Engine Coolant Reservoir ............... 17, 427


Index 

E (Continued) 

Engine - Engine Coolant Surge Tank ..364, 365, 366 

Engine - Engine Flooding ..................................330 

Engine - Engine Oil ....................................367, 427 

Engine - Engine Oil Dipstick ..............364, 365, 366 

Engine - Engine Oil Fill Cap ...............364, 365, 366 

Engine - Engine Oil Filter ...................424, 425, 426 

Engine - Engine Oil Life .......................................50 

Engine - Engine Starting ....................................327 

Engine - Engine Starting Problems .....................328 

Engine - Engine Torque .....................424, 425, 426 

Engine - Failure to Start .....................................329 

Engine - Horsepower .........................424, 425, 426 

Engine - Intercooler System .......................375, 443 

Engine - Intercooler System Pressure Cap ..........366 

Engine - Oil Pressure Warning Light ....................30 

Engine - Overheat Protection Mode ..................440 

Engine - Overheating ....................................5, 437 

Event Data Recorders ........................................465 

Exhaust - Exhaust Warnings .................................12 

F 

Features - Feature Customization ...............208, 237 

Features - Vehicle Programming and 

Personalization Features ..................................204 

Filter - Air Cleaner/Filter .................... 364, 365, 366 

Filter - Engine Oil .............................. 424, 425, 426 

Filter - Passenger Compartment 

Air Filter .......... 364, 365, 366, 387, 424, 425, 426 

Flooding - Engine Flooding ............................... 330 

Fluid - Automatic Transmission Fluid ................. 377 

Fluid - Brake Fluid ............................................. 427 

Fluid - Brake Master Cylinder Fluid .................... 382 

Fluid - Checking and Adding Coolant ............... 440 

Fluid - Engine Coolant ...................................... 372 

Fluid - Engine Oil ...................................... 367, 427 

Fluid - Power Steering Fluid .............................. 380 

Fluid - Windshield Washer Fluid ........................ 384 

Fluids - Recommended Fluids and Lubricants .... 389 

Fog - Fog Lamp Light .......................................... 39 

Fog - Fog Lights ............................................ 25, 90 

Fog - Rear Fog Lamp Light .................................. 39 

Fog - Rear Fog Lights .......................................... 91 

Fog Lights ..................................................... 25, 90 

Forward Collision Alert System .................... 25, 154 

Four-Wheel Drive - Off-Road Driving on Hills ...... 14 

Frequency - 

Transmitter Frequency Approval Code ............ 321 

Fuel .................................................................. 357 

Fuel - Average Fuel Economy .............................. 48 

471 . . .


Index 

F (Continued) 

Fuel - Filling the Tank ........................................359 

Fuel - Fuel Consumption and 

Emissions Information .....................................428 

Fuel - Fuel Gage ..................................................29 

Fuel - Fuel Tank .................................................427 

Fuel - Instant Fuel Economy .................................48 

Fuses .................................................................411 

Fuses - Engine Compartment 

Fuse Block ...............................364, 365, 366, 415 

Fuses - Left Side Rear Seat Fuse Block ................418 

Fuses - Right Side Rear Seat Fuse Block ......420, 421 

G 

Gage - Coolant Temperature Gage ......................27 

Gage - Fuel Gage ................................................29 

Gas - Filling the Fuel Tank .................................359 

Gears - Gearshift Lever ........................................25 

Glove Box ...................................................25, 197 

Guidelines - Maintenance Guidelines .................356 

H 

Hazard Warning Flasher ......................................77 

Hazard Warning Flasher - Control ........................25 

Headlights - High Beam Indicator ........................27 

Headlights - Leveling Control ..............................90 

Headlights - Twilight delay ............................... 221 

Headlights - Washer .................................... 89, 152 

Headlights - Wiper-Activated Headlights ............. 89 

Head-Up Display ................................................. 72 

Head-Up Display Controls ................................... 25 

Heater - Engine Block Heater ............................. 331 

Heating - Climate Control System ................. 25, 93 

Heating - Dual Zone Climate Control System ...... 94 

Heating - Rear Climate Control ......................... 104 

High Beam - Indicator ......................................... 27 

Hills - Parking a Trailer on Hills .......................... 351 

Hitches ............................................................. 349 

Hood - Release ............................................ 25, 362 

Hooks - Recovery Hooks .................................... 464 

Horn ........................................................... 25, 148 

Horsepower - Engine Horsepower ..... 424, 425, 426 

I 

Identification - Vehicle Identification Number ... 410 

Ignition - Keyless Ignition .................................. 324 

Ignition - Keyless Ignition Controls ...................... 25 

Illuminated Entry System .................................... 92 

Immobilizer - Immobilizer System ..................... 305 

Indicator - Headlight High Beam ......................... 27 

Indicator - Passenger Air Bag On/Off Indicator .. 285 

Indicator - Turn Signal ........................................ 27 

. . . 472


Index 

I (Continued) 

Inflatable Restraint System .................................272 

Inflatable Restraint System - 

Passenger Air Bag On/Off Indicator .................285 

Inflatable Restraint System - 

Passenger Sensing System ...............................279 

Inflatable Restraint System - Warning Light .37, 278 

Inflation - High Speed Operation Inflation .........395 

Inflation - Low Tire Pressure Light ........................40 

Inflation - Tire and Loading Information Label ...345 

Inflation - Tire Inflation ......................................394 

Inflation - Tire Pressure Monitor ..................50, 396 

Inflation - Tire Pressure Monitor Displays .............50 

Instrument Cluster ........................................25, 27 

Instrument Panel - Light Dimmer ..................25, 91 

Instruments - Dash- and Console-Mounted 

Instruments .......................................................25 

Intercooler ........................................366, 375, 443 

J 

Jacking ............................................................5, 18 

Jacking - Lifting the Vehicle ...............................408 

K 

Keyless Access System ....................................... 313 

Keyless Access System - Transmitter .................. 313 

Keyless Entry - Battery Replacement .................. 319 

Keyless Entry - 


Keyless Entry - Transmitter Range ..................... 318 

Keyless Entry - Vehicle Remote-Start .......... 249, 321 

Keys .................................................................. 303 

Keys - Immobilizer System ................................ 305 

Keys - Keyless Access System ............................. 313 

Keys - Transmitter Range .................................. 318 

L 

Label - Certification Label .................................. 346 

Label - Maximum Front and Rear Axle Weights . 346 

Label - Service Parts Identification Label ............ 411 

Label - Tire and Loading Information Label ....... 345 

Label - Vehicle Identification Number ............... 410 

Language - Language Selection ........................ 237 

Lever - Gearshift Lever ........................................ 25 

Lever - Multifunction Lever ................. 25, 146, 153 

Light - Air Bag Light .................................... 37, 278 

Light - Antilock Brake System Warning Light ....... 33 

Light - Brake System Warning Light .................... 32 

Light - Charging System Light ............................ 31 

473 . . .


Index 

L (Continued) 

Light - Cruise Control Light .................................40 

Light - 

Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light .....31 

Light - Engine Oil Pressure Warning Light ............30 

Light - Fog Lamp Light ........................................39 

Light - Lights On Reminder Light .........................39 

Light - Low Tire Pressure Light .............................40 

Light - Malfunction Indicator Light ......................34 

Light - Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light .....271 

Light - Rear Fog Lamp Light ................................39 

Light - Safety Belt Reminder Light .....................270 

Light - Traction System Malfunction Light ...........36 

Lighter ........................................................25, 198 

Lights ..................................................................85 

Lights - Automatic Headlight System ...................88 

Lights - Battery Saver ...........................................93 

Lights - Bulb Replacement .................................422 

Lights - Exterior Lights ...................................25, 93 

Lights - Fog Lights .........................................25, 90 

Lights - Hazard Warning Flasher ..........................77 

Lights - Headlight Leveling Control .....................90 

Lights - Headlight Washer ...........................89, 152 

Lights - Headlights ..............................................25 

Lights - Illuminated Entry System .........................92 

Lights - Instrument Cluster Warning Lights ..........29 

. . . 474 

Lights - Instrument Panel Light Dimmer ........ 25, 91 

Lights - Interior Lights ................................... 91, 93 

Lights - Lights On Reminder ................................ 87 

Lights - Lights On Reminder Light ....................... 39 

Lights - Main Switch ........................................... 85 

Lights - Reading Lights ........................................ 92 

Lights - Rear Fog Lights ....................................... 91 

Lights - Twilight delay ....................................... 221 

Loading - Certification Label ............................. 346 

Loading - 

Maximum Front and Rear Axle Weights .......... 346 

Loading - Tire and Loading Information Label ... 345 

Loading - Vehicle Loading ........................... 14, 344 

Locks - Anti-lockout Feature .............................. 189 

Locks - Central Door Lock System ..................... 317 

Locks - Deadbolt ............................................... 317 

Locks - Door Locks ............................................ 187 

Locks - Manual Door Locks ............................... 188 

Locks - Power Door Locks ................................. 187 

Locks - Programmable Automatic Door Locks ... 188 

Locks - Rear Door Security Locks ....................... 189 

Lubricant - Rear Axle Lubricant ......................... 379 

Lubricant - Transfer Case Lubricant ................... 378 

Lubricants - 

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants .............. 389 

Lumbar - Power Lumbar Control ....................... 255


Index 

M 

Maintenance - 

Air Cleaner/Filter .....364, 365, 366, 424, 425, 426 

Maintenance - Automatic Transmission Fluid .....377 

Maintenance - Battery ...............364, 365, 366, 384 

Maintenance - Brake Fluid .................................427 

Maintenance - Brake Fluid Reservoir ..364, 365, 366 

Maintenance - Brake Master Cylinder Fluid ........382 

Maintenance - Checking and Adding Coolant ...440 

Maintenance - Engine Coolant ..........................372 

Maintenance - Engine Coolant Reservoir .....17, 427 

Maintenance - 

Engine Coolant Surge Tank .............364, 365, 366 

Maintenance - Engine Oil ..........................367, 427 

Maintenance - Engine Oil Dipstick .....364, 365, 366 

Maintenance - Engine Oil Fill Cap ......364, 365, 366 

Maintenance - Engine Oil Filter .........424, 425, 426 

Maintenance - Intercooler System .............375, 443 

Maintenance - Intercooler System Pressure Cap 366 

Maintenance - Maintenance Guidelines .............356 

Maintenance - 

Maintenance When Trailer Towing ..................352 

Maintenance - Power Steering Fluid ..................380 

Maintenance - 

Power Steering Fluid Reservoir ........364, 365, 366 

Maintenance - Rear Axle Lubricant ....................379 

Maintenance - Rear Differential Cooler .............. 380 

Maintenance - 

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants .............. 389 

Maintenance - Transfer Case Lubricant ............. 378 

Maintenance - Windshield Washer Fluid ............ 384 

Maintenance - 

Windshield Washer Reservoir .......... 364, 365, 366 

Malfunction Indicator Light ................................ 34 

Map - Map Pockets ........................................... 197 

Memory - 

Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering Column ... 255 

Memory - Navigation Memory Menu ............... 251 

Messages - Driver Information Center ................. 53 

Mirrors .............................................................. 179 

Mirrors - Automatic Inside Day/Night Mirror ..... 182 

Mirrors - Curb View Assist Mirror ...................... 181 

Mirrors - Heated Mirror ..................................... 180 

Mirrors - Inside Mirror ....................................... 181 

Mirrors - 

Memory Seat, Mirrors and Steering Column ... 255 

Mirrors - Navigation Memory Menu ................. 251 

Mirrors - Outside Mirror .................................... 179 

Mirrors - Power Folding Mirrors ........................ 180 

Mirrors - Power Mirrors ..................................... 179 

Mirrors - Vanity ................................................. 182 

Modifications .................................................... 356 

475 . . .


Index 

M (Continued) 

MP3 - Playing MP3 format CDs .........................126 

Multifunction Lever .............................25, 146, 153 

N 

Navigation - Navigation System ..................25, 145 

Net - Convenience Net ......................................193 

O 

Object Detection - 

Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist ..................182, 200 

Odometer ...........................................................28 

Off-Roading - Driving on Hills ..............................14 

Oil - Engine Oil ..........................................367, 427 

Oil - Engine Oil Dipstick ....................364, 365, 366 

Oil - Engine Oil Filter .........................424, 425, 426 

Oil - Engine Oil Life .............................................50 

Oil - Oil Fill Cap .................................364, 365, 366 

Oil - Oil Pressure Warning Light ...........................30 

Overhead - Overhead Area and Roof .................194 

Overhead - Sunroof ...........................................194 

Overheating - Engine ....................................5, 437 

Overheating - 

Engine Overheat Protection Mode ..................440 

. . . 476 

P 

Parking - Parking a Trailer on Hills ..................... 351 

Parking - Parking Brake ..................................... 342 

Parking - Stopping the Engine .......................... 330 

Parking - Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist ..... 182, 200 

Parking - Vehicle Parking ................................... 337 

Parts - Service Parts Identification Label ............. 411 


Air Filter .......... 364, 365, 366, 387, 424, 425, 426 

Passenger Sensing System ................................. 279 

Passenger Sensing System - System Operation 

with a Child Restraint ..................................... 282 

Passenger Sensing System - System Operation 

with Adult Passengers ..................................... 284 

Personalization - Radio Personalization .............. 136 

Personalization - Vehicle Programming and 

Personalization Features .................................. 204 

Pocket - Map Pockets ........................................ 197 

Power - Retained Accessory Power ............ 200, 326 

Power Outlet - Electrical Accessories .................... 84 

Pregnancy - Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy .. 269 

Programmable Features ............................ 208, 237 

Programmable Features - Language Selection ... 237 

Programmable Features - Twilight delay ........... 221 

Programming - Vehicle Programming and 

Personalization Features .................................. 204


Index 

R 

Radio ..........................................................25, 106 

Radio - Antenna ................................................144 

Radio - Anti-Theft Feature ..................................144 

Radio - Audio Controls Mounted on 

Steering Wheel ..................................25, 142, 147 

Radio - Base Radio Main Menu ..........................136 

Radio - Care of Your Compact Disc Player .........134 

Radio - Care of Your Compact Discs ..................134 

Radio - Compact Disc Changer .........................123 

Radio - Radio Personalization .............................136 

Radio - RDS Features and Controls ....................118 

Radio - RDS Sound System With 

6-Disc CD Player .............................................108 

Radio - Reconfigurable Radio Display Buttons ....135 

Radio Data System Features and Controls ..........118 

Rear Differential Cooler .....................................380 

Rear Fog Lights ...................................................91 

Rear Window - Defogger ...................................102 

Reclining - 

Front Seatback Power Reclining Control ..........254 

Recovery Hooks .................................................464 

Refrigerant ........................................................427 

Remote Keyless Entry - Transmitter Frequency 

Approval Code ................................................321 

Restraint System - Warning Light .............. 270, 271 

Restraints - Air Bag ............................................ 272 

Restraints - Anchors for Child Restraints with 

Lower Attaching Points and Top Tether .......... 295 

Restraints - Child Restraint Top Strap ................ 296 

Restraints - Child Restraints ............................... 287 

Restraints - Head Restraints ............................... 258 

Restraints - Lap/Shoulder Belt ........................... 262 

Restraints - Older Children ................................ 293 

Restraints - Passenger Air Bag On/Off Indicator . 285 

Restraints - Passenger Sensing System ............... 279 

Restraints - Replacing Safety Belts ..................... 268 

Restraints - Safety Belt Extension ....................... 268 

Restraints - Safety Belt Pretensioners ................. 272 

Restraints - Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ... 269 

Restraints - Safety Belts ................................. 6, 260 

Restraints - Securing a Child Restraint with 

Lower Attaching Points and Top Strap ............ 299 

Restraints - Shoulder Belt Comfort Guides ......... 266 

Restraints - Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ......... 265 

Restraints - Supplemental Restraints .................. 271 

Ride - Automatic Ride Control ........................... 344 

Rocking Your Vehicle ........................................ 464 

Roof - Overhead Area and Roof ......................... 194 

Roof - Sunroof .................................................. 194 

477 . . .


Index 

S 

Safety - Air Bag ..................................................272 

Safety - Anchors for Child Restraints with 

Lower Attaching Points and Top Tether ..........295 

Safety - Child Restraint Top Strap ......................296 

Safety - Child Restraints .....................................287 

Safety - Important Safety Precautions ...............6-20 

Safety - Lap/Shoulder Belt .................................262 

Safety - Older Children ......................................293 

Safety - Passenger Air Bag On/Off Indicator .......285 

Safety - Passenger Sensing System .....................279 

Safety - Replacing Safety Belts ...........................268 

Safety - Safety Belt Extension .............................268 

Safety - Safety Belt Pretensioners .......................272 

Safety - Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy .........269 

Safety - Safety Belts .......................................6, 260 

Safety - Securing a Child Restraint with 

Lower Attaching Points and Top Strap ............299 

Safety - Shoulder Belt Comfort Guides ...............266 

Safety - Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ...............265 

Safety - Supplemental Restraints ........................271 

Safety - Trailer Towing Safety Chains .................350 

Safety Belts - Warning Light ......................270, 271 

Seats - Front Seatback Power Reclining Control .254 

Seats - Head Restraints ......................................258 

Seats - Heated Seats ..................................255, 257 

. . . 478 

Seats - Memory Seat, Mirrors and 

Steering Column ............................................ 255 

Seats - Navigation Memory Menu ..................... 251 

Seats - Power Lumbar Control ........................... 255 

Seats - Power Seat Controls .............................. 254 

Seats - Rear Seat Pass-Through Door ................. 192 

Seats - Removable Rear Seat Cushion ................ 259 

Seats - Seat Controls ......................................... 254 

Secure Car Feature ............................................ 186 

Security - Immobilizer System ........................... 305 

Security - Intrusion Sensor ........................ 307, 311 

Security - Theft Deterrent System ...................... 307 

Sensor .............................................................. 101 

Sensor - Intrusion Sensor .......................... 307, 311 

Service - Service Parts Identification Label ......... 411 

Shade - Sun Visors ............................................ 194 

Shifting - Gearshift Lever ..................................... 25 

Solar Sensor ...................................................... 101 

Sound System ............................................. 25, 106 

Sound System - Antenna ................................... 144 

Sound System - Anti-Theft Feature .................... 144 

Sound System - Base Radio Main Menu ............ 136 

Sound System - 

Care of Your Compact Disc Player .................. 134 

Sound System - Care of Your Compact Discs .... 134 

Sound System - Compact Disc Changer ............ 123


Index 

S (Continued) 

Sound System - Radio Personalization ...............136 

Sound System - RDS Features and Controls .......118 


RDS Sound System With 6-Disc CD Player .......108 


Reconfigurable Radio Display Buttons .............135 


Steering Wheel Audio Controls .........25, 142, 147 

Spare Tire ........................................................5, 18 

Spark Plugs .......................................424, 425, 426 

Specifications ....................................................424 

Specifications - Component Specifications .........424 

Specifications - 

Replacement Bulb Specifications .....................423 

Speedometer .......................................................28 

Stabilitrak - Stabilitrak System ..............................82 

Stability - Stabilitrak System .................................82 

Starting - Engine Flooding .................................330 

Starting - Engine Starting ..................................327 

Starting - Engine Starting Problems ...................328 

Starting - Failure to Start ...................................329 

Starting - Jump Starting .....................................432 

Starting - Keyless Ignition ..................................324 

Starting - Keyless Ignition Controls ......................25 

Starting - Starting Instructions ...........................327 

Starting - Vehicle Remote-Start ................. 249, 321 

Steering ............................................................ 340 

Steering - Power Steering ................................. 340 

Steering - Power Steering Fluid ......................... 380 

Steering - 

Power Steering Fluid Reservoir ........ 364, 365, 366 

Steering - Speed Sensitive Steering ................... 340 

Steering Column - Controls Mounted on 

Steering Wheel/Column ................................. 146 

Steering Column - 

Power Telescopic Tilt Wheel Control ......... 25, 148 

Steering Wheel - Audio Controls ......... 25, 142, 147 

Steering Wheel - Controls Mounted on 

Steering Wheel/Column ................................. 146 

Steering Wheel - 

Heated Steering Wheel Control ................ 25, 147 

Steering Wheel - 

Power Telescopic Tilt Wheel Control ......... 25, 148 

Steering Wheel - Steering Wheel Controls ........... 25 

Steering Wheel Controls ..................................... 25 

Stopping the Engine ......................................... 330 

Storage ............................................................. 196 

Storage - Center Console Armrest ..................... 196 

Storage - Convenience Net ............................... 193 

Storage - Cupholders .................................. 25, 197 

Storage - Glove Box .................................... 25, 197 

479 . . .


Index 

S (Continued) 

Storage - Map Pockets .......................................197 

Storage - Trunk Area .........................................190 

Stuck - If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck ......................463 

Stuck - Recovery Hooks .....................................464 

Sun - Sun Visors ................................................194 

Sun - Sunroof ....................................................194 

Supports - Power Lumbar Control .....................255 

Suspension ........................................................344 

Suspension - Automatic Ride Control ................344 

T 

Tachometer .........................................................29 

Tank - Filling the Fuel Tank ................................359 

Temperature - Coolant Temperature Gage ..........27 

Temperature Sensor ..........................................101 

Terminals - 

Remote Negative Battery Terminal ..364, 365, 366 

Terminals - 

Remote Positive Battery Terminal ....364, 365, 366 

Theft Deterrent - Immobilizer System ................305 

Theft Deterrent - Intrusion Sensor .............307, 311 

Theft Deterrent - Theft Deterrent System ...........307 

Timer ..................................................................49 

Tires ..................................................................391 

Tires - Changing a Flat ............5, 18, 424, 425, 426 

. . . 480 

Tires - Flat Tires ................................................. 445 

Tires - High Speed Operation ............................ 395 

Tires - Inspection and Rotation .......................... 399 

Tires - Lifting the Vehicle ................................... 408 

Tires - Low Tire Pressure Light ............................. 40 

Tires - Run-Flat Tires .................................. 392, 445 

Tires - Spare Tire ............................................. 5, 18 

Tires - Standard Tires ........................................ 447 

Tires - Tire and Loading Information Label ........ 345 

Tires - Tire Chains ............................................. 403 

Tires - Tire Inflation ........................................... 394 

Tires - Tire Pressure Monitor ........................ 50, 396 

Tires - Tire Pressure Monitor Displays .................. 50 

Tires - Tire Replacement .................................... 401 

Tires - Tire Stowage ........................................ 5, 18 

Tires - Wheel Alignment and Tire Balancing ...... 405 

Tires - Winter Tires ............................................ 404 

Torque - Engine Torque .................... 424, 425, 426 

Towing ................................................... 5, 16, 437 

Towing - Maintenance When Trailer Towing ..... 352 

Towing - Recreational Vehicle Towing ............... 352 

Towing - 

Towing Your Vehicle on a Platform Trailer ...... 353 

Towing - Trailer Brakes ...................................... 350 

Towing - Trailer Towing .................................... 346 

Towing - Trailer Towing Hitches ....................... 349


Index 

T (Continued) 

Towing - Trailer Towing Safety Chains ...............350 

Towing - Trailer Turn Signals .............................350 

Towing - 

With All Four Wheels on the Ground .......352, 353 

Towing - With Two Wheels on the Ground and 

Two Wheels Up on a Dolly ..............................352 

Traction ............................................................339 

Traction - Limited Slip Rear Axle ........................340 

Traction - Stabilitrak System ................................82 

Traction - Traction Control Button .......................25 

Traction - Traction Control System ......................79 

Traction - Traction System Malfunction Light ......36 

Traditional Cruise Control .................................158 

Trailer - Hitches .................................................349 

Trailer - Parking a Trailer on Hills .......................351 

Trailer - Safety Chains ........................................350 

Trailer - Trailer Brakes ........................................350 

Trailer - Trailer Towing ......................................346 

Trailering - Maintenance When Trailer Towing ..352 

Trailering - Trailer Turn Signals ..........................350 

Transfer Case - All-Wheel Drive ..........................336 

Transfer Case - Transfer Case Lubricant .............378 

Transmission - Automatic ............................ 11, 332 

Transmission - Automatic Transmission 

Driver-Controlled Shift Mode .......................... 335 

Transmission - Automatic Transmission Fluid ..... 377 

Transmitter - Battery Replacement .................... 319 

Transmitter - Keyless Access System .................. 313 

Transmitter - 


Transmitter - Transmitter Range ........................ 318 

Transmitter - Vehicle Remote-Start ............ 249, 321 

Trip Odometer .................................................... 28 

Trunk - Emergency Trunk Release Handle .......... 193 

Trunk - Rear Seat Pass-Through Door ................ 192 

Trunk - Trunk Area ............................................ 190 

Trunk - Trunk Release ................................ 191, 316 

Turn Signal ....................................................... 153 

Turn Signal - Indicator ........................................ 27 

Turn Signal - Trailer Turn Signals ....................... 350 

Turn Signals ........................................................ 25 

U 

Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist .................... 182, 200 

481 . . .


Index 

V 

Valet Lockout Switch ...........................................78 

Vehicle - Lifting the Vehicle ...............................408 

Vehicle - New Vehicle Break-In Period ................303 

Vehicle - Rocking ...............................................464 

Vehicle Identification Number ...........................410 

Vehicle Remote-Start .................................249, 321 

Ventilation - Air Vents ..........................................25 

Ventilation - Rear ...............................................104 

Visors - Sun Visors .............................................194 

W 

Warning Light - Air Bag Light ......................37, 278 

Warning Light - Engine Coolant Temperature 

Warning Light ...................................................31 

Warning Light - 

Engine Oil Pressure Warning Light ....................30 

Warning Light - Lights On Reminder Light ..........39 

Warning Light - Low Tire Pressure Light ..............40 

Warning Light - Malfunction Indicator Light ........34 

Warning Lights ....................................................29 

Washer - Headlight ......................................89, 152 

Washer - Windshield ......................................... 152 

Washer - Windshield Washer Fluid .................... 384 

Washer - 

Windshield Washer Reservoir .......... 364, 365, 366 

Weight - 

Maximum Front and Rear Axle Weights .......... 346 

Wheels .............................................................. 405 

Wheels - Wheel Alignment and Tire Balancing .. 405 

Wheels - Wheel Locks ............................... 405, 447 

Wheels - Wheel Nut Torque .............. 424, 425, 426 

Wheels - Wheel Replacement .... 405, 424, 425, 426 

Windows .......................................................... 183 

Windows - Power .............................................. 184 

Windows - Secure Car Feature .......................... 186 

Windshield - Rain Sensitive Wipers .................... 150 

Windshield - Washer ......................................... 152 

Windshield - Wipers .......................................... 149 

Windshield Wipers/Washer Stalk ................. 25, 149 

Wipers - Rain Sensitive ...................................... 150 

Wipers - Windshield .......................................... 149 

Wipers - Wiper Disable Feature ......................... 151 

Wipers - Wiper-Activated Headlights ................... 89 

. . . 482

Table of Contents Cadillac STS/STS-V - IFS Europe BV

Create successful ePaper yourself

Delete template?

Save as template?